3654894165128161HyperMesh 14 Core Tutorials

HyperWorks 14.
0
HyperMesh Core Tutorials
HyperWorks is a division of Altair
altairhyperworks.com
Altair HyperWorks
A Platform for Innovation
Copyright 1986-2015 Altair Engineering Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copyright Altair Engineering Inc. All Rights Reserved for:

HyperMesh 1990-2015; HyperCrash 2001-2015; OptiStruct 1996-2015; RADIOSS 1986-2015; HyperView 1999-2015;
HyperView Player 2001-2015; HyperStudy 1999-2015; HyperGraph 1995-2015; MotionView 1993-2015; MotionSolve
2002-2015; HyperForm 1998-2015; HyperXtrude 1999- 2015; Process Manager 2003-2015; Templex 1990-2015;
TextView 1996-2015; MediaView 1999-2015; TableView 2013-2015; BatchMesher 2003-2015; HyperMath 2007-2015;
HyperWeld 2009-2015; HyperMold 2009-2015; Manufacturing Solutions 2005-2015; solidThinking 1993-2015; solidThinking
Inspire 2009-2015; solidThinking Evolve 1993-2015; Durability Director 2009-2015; Suspension Director 2009-2015;
AcuSolve 1997-2015; AcuConsole 2006-2015; SimLab 2004-2015; Virtual Wind Tunnel 2012-2015; MDS 2011-2015 and
FEKO (1999-2014 Altair Development S.A. (Pty) Ltd.; 2014-2015 Altair Engineering, Inc.); MDS 2011-2015 and VisSim
1989-2015.
Other Altair software applications include:
Altair PBS Works: Compute Manager 2007-2015; Display Manager 2007-2015; PBS 1994-2015; PBS Professional
1994-2015; PBS Application Services 2008-2015; PBS Analytics 2007-2015; and PBS Desktop 2007-2012; PBS Portal
2007-2011; e-BioChem 2007-2013; e-Compute 2000-2007; e-Render 2006-2010; OpenPBS 1994-2003 and Personal
PBS 2007-2012.
Altair Simulation Cloud Suite: Simulation Manager 2003-2015; Compute Manager 2003-2015; Display Manager 2003
2015; and Process Manager 2003-2015.
Altair Packaged Solution Offerings (PSOs) Copyright 2008-2015
Automated Reporting Director 2008-2015; Impact Simulation Director 2010-2015; Model Mesher Director 2010-2015; Model
Verification Director 2013-2015; Squeak and Rattle Director 2012-2015; Virtual Gauge Director 2012-2015; Weld
Certification Director 2014-2015
Altair intellectual property rights are protected under U.S. and international laws and treaties. Additionally, Altair software is
protected under patent #6,859,792 and other patents pending. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
ALTAIR ENGINEERING INC. Proprietary and Confidential. Contains Trade Secret Information.
Not for use or disclosure outside of Altair and its licensed clients. Information contained in Altair software shall not be decompiled,
disassembled, unlocked, reverse translated, reverse engineered, or publicly displayed or publicly performed in any manner.
Usage of the software is only as explicitly permitted in the end user software license agreement. Copyright notice does not imply
publication.
Third party software licenses
Software Security Measures:
Altair Engineering Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates reserve the right to embed software security mechanisms in the Software
for the purpose of detecting the installation and/or use of illegal copies of the Software. The Software may collect and transmit nonproprietary data about those illegal copies. Data collected will not include any customer data created by or used in connection with
the Software and will not be provided to any third party, except as may be required by law or legal process or to enforce our rights
with respect to the use of any illegal copies of the Software. By using the Software, each user consents to such detection and
collection of data, as well as its transmission and use if an illegal copy of the Software is detected. No steps may be taken to avoid
or detect the purpose of any such security mechanisms.
Altair Engineering Support Contact Information

Web site
www.altairhyperworks.com
Location
Telephone
e-mail
Australia
64.9.413.7981
anzsupport@altair.com
Brazil
55.11.3884.0414
br_support@altair.com
Canada
416.447.6463
support@altairengineering.ca
China
86.400.619.6186
support@altair.com.cn
France
33.1.4133.0992
francesupport@altair.com
Germany
49.7031.6208.22
hwsupport@altair.de
India
91.80. 6629.4500
1.800.425.0234 (toll free)
support@india.altair.com
Italy
39.800.905.595
support@altairengineering.it
Japan
81.3.5396.2881
support@altairjp.co.jp
Korea
82.70.4050.9200
support@altair.co.kr
Mexico
55.56.58.68.08
mx-support@altair.com
New Zealand
64.9.413.7981
anzsupport@altair.com
North America
248.614.2425
hwsupport@altair.com
Scandinavia
46.46.460.2828
support@altair.se
South Africa
27 21 8311500
support@altair.co.za
United Kingdom
01926.468.600
support@uk.altair.com
In addition, the following countries have resellers for Altair Engineering: Colombia, Czech Republic, Ecuador, Israel, Russia,
Netherlands, Turkey, Poland, Singapore, Vietnam, Indonesia
Official offices with resellers: Canada, China, France, Germany, India, Malaysia, Italy, Japan, Korea, Spain, Taiwan, United
Kingdom, USA
HyperMesh Core Tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials ........................................................................................................................................................ 1
Basics ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
HM-1000: Getting Started with HyperMesh ............................................................................................................. 5
HM-1010: Opening and Saving Files ......................................................................................................................... 9
HM-1020: Working with Panels .............................................................................................................................. 13
HM-1030: Organizing a Model ................................................................................................................................ 21
HM-1040: Controlling the Display ........................................................................................................................... 32
Geometry .................................................................................................................................................................... 43
HM-2000: Importing and Repairing CAD ................................................................................................................ 44
HM-2010: Generating a Midsurface ....................................................................................................................... 50
HM-2015: Auto-Midsurfacing with Advanced Extraction Options ......................................................................... 52
HM-2020: Simplifying Geometry ............................................................................................................................ 58
HM-2030: Refining Topology to Achieve a Quality Mesh ....................................................................................... 63
HM-2040: Creating and Editing Line Data............................................................................................................... 71
HM-2050: Creating Surfaces from Elements .......................................................................................................... 86
HM-2060: Creating and Editing Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 93
HM-2070: Geometry and Mesh Editing Using the Quick Edit Panel ..................................................................... 104
HM-2080: Modifying Models using solidThinking Inspire .................................................................................... 112
HM-2090: Dimensioning ....................................................................................................................................... 115
Meshing..................................................................................................................................................................... 122
1-D Elements ......................................................................................................................................................... 123
HM-3000: Creating 1-D Elements ..................................................................................................................... 124
2-D Elements ......................................................................................................................................................... 127
HM-3100: AutoMeshing.................................................................................................................................... 128
HM-3110: Meshing without Surfaces ............................................................................................................... 139
HM-3120: 2-D Mesh in Curved Surfaces ........................................................................................................... 146
HM-3130: QI Mesh Creation ............................................................................................................................. 150
HM-3140: Batch Meshing ................................................................................................................................. 159
HM-3150: Meshing a Model Using Shrink Wrap .............................................................................................. 164
3-D Elements ......................................................................................................................................................... 170
HM-3200: Tetrameshing ................................................................................................................................... 171
HM-3210: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces ..................................................................................... 178
Altair Engineering
HyperMesh Core 14.0 Tutorials

Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering
HM-3220: Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function ............................................................ 190
HM-3270: Using the TetraMesh Process Manager ........................................................................................... 196
Quality ....................................................................................................................................................................... 204
HM-3300: Checking and Editing Mesh .................................................................................................................. 205
HM-3320: Penetration .......................................................................................................................................... 225
Assembly ................................................................................................................................................................... 236
HM-3400: Creating Connectors ............................................................................................................................ 237
HM-3410: Creating Area Connectors .................................................................................................................... 252
HM-3420: Creating Bolt Connectors ..................................................................................................................... 257
HM-3430: Part Replacement Through Connectors............................................................................................... 261
HM-3440: Model Build and Assembly .................................................................................................................. 265
Morphing................................................................................................................................................................... 275
HM-3510: Freehand Morphing ............................................................................................................................. 276
HM-3520: Sculpting............................................................................................................................................... 280
HM-3540: Changing a Profile Using Map to Sections ........................................................................................... 283
HM-3560: Basics of Domains and Handles ........................................................................................................... 291
HM-3570: Altering Cross-Sections Using Domains ............................................................................................... 295
HM-3580: Morphing About an Axis Using Domains ............................................................................................. 297
HM-3590: Morph Adhesive Layers ....................................................................................................................... 299
HM-3600: Morph Tube to Different Configurations ............................................................................................. 303
HM-3610: Shaping a Dome Using Cyclic Symmetry .............................................................................................. 307
HM-3620: Shaping a Bead Using Cyclic Symmetry ............................................................................................... 311
HM-3625: Morph a Symmetric Part onto a New Geometry ................................................................................. 316
HM-3630: Morphing with Shapes ......................................................................................................................... 319
HM-3640: Interpolating Loads Using Shapes ........................................................................................................ 323
HM-3650: Creating Shapes Using Record ............................................................................................................. 326
HM-3660: Maintaining Area Using Constraints .................................................................................................... 330
HM-3670: Positioning a Dummy Using Limiting Constraints ................................................................................ 333
HM-3680: Preserving a Shape Using Cluster Constraints ..................................................................................... 336
HM-3690: Remeshing Domains After Morphing .................................................................................................. 341
Analysis Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 345
HM-4000: Setting up Loading Conditions ............................................................................................................. 346
HM-4010: Formatting Model for Analysis ............................................................................................................ 354
ii

Altair Engineering
HM-4020: Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties using HyperBeam ...................................... 364
HM-4030: Defining Composites ............................................................................................................................ 373
HM-4040: Working with Loads on Geometry ....................................................................................................... 379
HM-4060: Working with Include Files................................................................................................................... 390
HM-4070: OptiView .............................................................................................................................................. 398
Customization ........................................................................................................................................................... 400
Scripts .................................................................................................................................................................... 401
HM-8010: Add a Button to the User Page on the Utility Menu ........................................................................ 402
HM-8020: Create a Utility Menu Macro From a Command File ....................................................................... 404
HM-8030: Create a Utility Menu Macro to Create Constraints on a Plane ...................................................... 407
HM-8040: Create a Utility Menu Macro from a Tcl Script ................................................................................ 411
HM-8050: Create Forces on Nodes and Add a Button on the User Page ......................................................... 414
HM-8060: Calculate the Resultant Sum of Forces ............................................................................................ 418
HM-8070: Create Spline Surfaces on Tria Elements ......................................................................................... 422
HM-8080: Calculate the Radius of an Arc ......................................................................................................... 427
HM-8090: Create an OptiStruct PSHELL property............................................................................................. 432
Post-Processing ......................................................................................................................................................... 436
HM-9000: Exporting Data for Fatigue Analysis ..................................................................................................... 437
HM-9010: Free Body Diagram............................................................................................................................... 439
Altair Engineering

iii
HyperMesh Tutorials
Basics
HM-1000: Getting Started with HyperMesh
HM-1010: Opening and Saving Files
HM-1020: Working with Panels
HM-1030: Organizing a Model
HM-1040: Controlling the Display
Geometry
HM-2000: Importing and Repairing CAD
HM-2010: Generating a Midsurface
HM-2015: Auto-Midsurfacing with Advanced Extraction Options
HM-2020: Simplifying Geometry
HM-2030: Refining Topology to Achieve a Quality Mesh
HM-2040: Creating and Editing Line Data
HM-2050: Creating Surfaces from Elements
HM-2060: Creating and Editing Solid Geometry
HM-2070: Geometry and Mesh Editing Using the Quick Edit Panel
HM-2080: Modifying Models using solidThinking
HM-2090: Dimensioning
Meshing
1-D Elements
HM-3000: Creating 1-D Elements
2-D Elements
HM-3100: AutoMeshing
HM-3110: Meshing without Surfaces
HM-3120: 2-D Mesh in Curved Surfaces
HM-3130: QI Mesh Creation
HM-3140: Batch Meshing
HM-3150: Meshing a Model Using Shrink Wrap
3-D Elements
HM-3200: Tetrameshing
HM-3210: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces
HM-3220: Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function
HM-3270: Using the TetraMesh Process Manager
1
HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

Altair Engineering
Quality
HM-3300: Checking and Editing Mesh
HM-3320: Penetration
Assembly
HM-3400: Creating Connectors
HM-3410: Creating Area Connectors
HM-3420: Creating Bolt Connectors
HM-3430: Part Replacement Through Connectors
HM-3440: Model Build and Assembly
Morphing
HM-3510: Freehand Morphing
HM-3520: Sculpting
HM-3530: Changing a Curvature Using Map to Geometry
HM-3540: Changing a Profile Using Map to Sections
HM-3550: Morph Volume
HM-3560: Basics of Domains and Handles
HM-3570: Altering Cross-Sections Using Domains
HM-3580: Morphing About an Axis Using Domains
HM-3590: Morph Adhesive Layers
HM-3600: Morph Tube to Different Configurations
HM-3610: Shaping a Dome Using Cyclic Symmetry
HM-3620: Shaping a Bead Using Cyclic Symmetry
HM-3625: Morph a Symmetric Part onto a New Geometry
HM-3630: Morphing with Shapes
HM-3635: Working with a HyperMesh and HyperMorph Model in HyperStudy
HM-3640: Interpolating Loads Using Shapes
HM-3650: Creating Shapes Using Record
HM-3660: Maintaining Area Using Constraints
HM-3670: Positioning a Dummy Using Limiting Constraints
HM-3680: Preserving a Shape Using Cluster Constraints
HM-3690: Remeshing Domains After Morphing
HM-3695: Working with a Parameterized File Model for Shape Variables in HyperStudy
Altair Engineering

Analysis Setup
HM-4000: Setting up Loading Conditions
HM-4010: Formatting Model for Analysis
HM-4020: Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties using HyperBeam
HM-4030: Defining Composites
HM-4040: Working with Loads on Geometry
HM-4060: Working with Include Files
HM-4070: OptiView
Customization
Scripts
HM-8010: Add a Button to the User Page on the Utility Menu
HM-8020: Create a Utility Menu Macro From a Command File
HM-8030: Create a Utility Menu Macro to Create Constraints on a Plane
HM-8040: Create a Utility Menu Macro from a Tcl Script
HM-8050: Create Forces on Nodes and Add a Button on the User Page
HM-8060: Calculate the Resultant Sum of Forces
HM-8070: Create Spline Surfaces on Tria Elements
HM-8080: Calculate the Radius of an Arc
HM-8090: Create an OptiStruct PSHELL property
Post-Processing
HM-9000: Exporting Data for Fatigue Analysis
HM-9010: Free Body Diagram

Altair Engineering
Basics
Altair Engineering


In this tutorial, you will explore the basic concepts of HyperMesh's user interface. It is highly
recommended that you review this tutorial as it provides a general overview of HyperMesh.
Tools
The HyperMesh interface contains several areas. Each is described below.
Feature
Description
Title bar
The bar across the top of the interface is the title bar. It contains
the version of HyperMesh that you are running and the name of
the file you are working on.
Menu bar
Located just under the title bar. Like the pull-down menus in
many graphical user interface applications, these menus "drop
down" a list of options when clicked. Use these options to access
different areas of HyperMesh functionality.
Toolbars
Located around the graphics area, these buttons provide quick

access to commonly-used functions, such as changing display
options. They can be dragged and placed at the top or side of the
graphics area.
Tab area
The tab area is so named because various specialized tools

display on tabs in this area of the interface. Two such examples
are the Model Browser and the Utility Menu.
The Model tab contains the Model Browser. This tool
displays the contents of a model in a hierarchical tree
format. It can be used to create and edit many types of
entities, and also to organize them and control their display
status.

Altair Engineering
The Utility Menu contains four pages of tools that perform

various functions, accessed via buttons at the bottom of the
menu. The Disp page tools control how a model is displayed
in the graphics area. The other pages available are
QA/Model (element checking tools), Geom/Mesh (tools
for working with a models geometry as well as for creating
and editing meshes), and User (custom tools you create).
The content of the Utility tab changes based upon the
selected user profile.
Graphics area
The graphics area is the display area for your model. You can
interact with the model in three-dimensional space in real time. In
addition to viewing the model, entities can be selected
interactively from the graphics area.
Main menu
The main menu displays the functions available on each page. You
access those functions by clicking on the button corresponding to
the function you wish to use.
Main menu
pages
The main menu pages menu divides the main menu into groups
of related functions. Only one page of the main menu is displayed
at a time.
The Geom page contains functions for creating and editing
geometry.
The 1D, 2D, and 3D pages contain element creation and editing
tools grouped according to element type.
The Analysis page contains functions to set up analysis problems
and define boundary conditions.
The Tool page contains miscellaneous tools and model checking
functions.
The Post page contains post-processing functions.
Command
window
You can type HyperMesh commands directly into this text box and
execute them instead of using the HyperMesh graphical user
interface. This window is not displayed by default, but can be
opened via the View menu.
Status bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the screen. The left end
of the status bar displays your current location in the main menu.
By default, Geometry is displayed. The four fields on the right
side of the status bar display the current Include file, current
component collector, current part, and current load collector.
As you work in HyperMesh, any warning or error messages also
display in the status bar. Warning messages appear in green and
error messages appear in red.
Hint: You can hold the left mouse button down on top of a panel
to see a description for it in the status bar.
Altair Engineering

Starting HyperMesh
To start HyperMesh in Windows 7, go to Start > All Programs > Altair HyperWorks > HyperMesh
Desktop or HyperMesh.
To start HyperMesh on UNIX, perform the following steps:

1. Go to your operating system prompt.
2. Enter the full path of the HyperMesh script (e.g., <altair_home>\altair\scripts\hm) and press
ENTER.
Or
3. Type in a pre-defined alias that you or a systems administrator has created in the user .alias or
.cshrc file in the user home directory.
Start Directory
By default, HyperMesh uses a "start directory" for files. HyperMesh reads and writes a number of files
from the start directory:
At start up, HyperMesh reads configuration files (hm.mac, hmmenu.set, etc.).
Upon closing, HyperMesh writes out a command history file (command.cmf) and a menu settings
file (hmmenu.set).
By default, HyperMesh will read from/write to this directory for any open, save, save as, import,
or export functionality.
Image files (.jpg) created using the F6 key are saved to the start directory.
To determine the start directory on Windows, perform the following steps:

1. Right-click the HyperMesh icon.
2. Go to Properties.
3. On the Shortcut tab, view the path in the Start In field.
On UNIX, the start directory is determined by the following:

Location in which you typed the command to run HyperMesh
Your "home" directory if configuration files are not found in the start directory
HyperMesh Help
To obtain help for a particular feature, go to the Help menu and select HyperWorks Desktop or
HyperWorks Help Home. The help is organized by product and contains the following types of
information:
How to use individual functions
Notes on interfacing HyperMesh with external data types
Tutorials
Reference guides

Altair Engineering
Model Files
All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the
<install_directory>\tutorials\hm\ directory unless otherwise noted.
Altair Engineering


In this tutorial, you will learn how to:
Open a HyperMesh file
Import a file into a current HyperMesh session
Save the HyperMesh session as a HyperMesh model file
Export all of the geometry to an IGES file
Export all of the mesh data to an OptiStruct input file
Delete all of the data from the current HyperMesh session
Import an IGES file
Import an OptiStruct file to the current HyperMesh session
Exercise 1: Opening and Saving Files

This exercise uses the following model files: bumper_cen_mid1.hm, bumper_mid.hm, bumper_end.igs,
and bumper_end_rgd.fem. Each model file contains different sections of the bumper, that when
combined make up the whole bumper model. Copy the model files from
<install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ to your working directory.
Step 1: Open the HyperMesh model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm.

1. Start HyperMesh Desktop.
2. To open a HyperMesh model file, click File > Open > Model from the menu bar, or click
Standard toolbar.
on the
2. In the Open File dialog, navigate to your working directory and open the bumper_cen_mid1.hm
model file. HyperMesh loads a model containing mesh and geometry data.
Step 2: Import the HyperMesh model file, bumper_mid.hm, into the current
HyperMesh session.
1. To open the Import tab, click File > Import > Model from the menu bar, or click
Standard toolbar.
2. In the Import tab, click
on the
3. In the Open dialog, navigate to your working directory and open the bumper_mid.hm model file.
4. Click Import. HyperMesh imports the bumper_mid.hm model file on top of the existing data.
9

Altair Engineering
Step 3: Import the IGES geometry file, bumper_end.iges, into the current
HyperMesh session.
2. From the File type list, select IGES.

3. Click
4. In the Select IGES file dialog, navigate to your working directory and open the bumper_end.iges
geometry file.
5. Click Import. HyperMesh imports the IGES geometry file's data.
Step 4: Import the OptiStruct input file, bumper_end_rgd.fem, into the current
HyperMesh session.
2. From the File type list, select OptiStruct.

3. In the File field, navigate to your working directory and open the bumper_end_rgd.fem input file.
4. Click Import. HyperMesh imports a mesh for the bumper's end portion to the geometry
representing the bumpers end.
Altair Engineering

10
Step 5: Save the HyperMesh session as a HyperMesh model file called

practice.hm.
1. From the menu bar, click File > Save As > Model.
2. In the Save Model As dialog, navigate to your working directory and save the data in your current
session as a binary data file labeled practice.hm.
Step 6: Export the models geometry data to an IGES file called

practice.iges.
1. To access the Export tab, click File > Export > Geometry from the menu bar, or click
Standard toolbar.
on the
2. From the File type list, select IGES.

3. In the File field, navigate to your working directory and save the file as practice.igs.
4. Click Export. HyperMesh exports all of the geometry data (points, lines, surfaces) loaded in your
current session as a .iges file.
Step 7: Export the models mesh data to an OptiStruct input file called
practice.fem.
1. In the Export tab, click

3. In the File field, navigate to your working directory and save the file as practice.fem.
4. Click Export. HyperMesh exports all of the finite element data (nodes, elements, loads) loaded in
your current session as a .fem file.
Step 8 (Optional): Delete all data from the current HyperMesh session by
starting a new session.
1. To open a new HyperMesh model, click File > New > Model from the menu bar, or click
Standard toolbar.
on the
2. In the HyperMesh dialog, click Yes if you would like to discard all current model data.
11

Altair Engineering
Step 9 (Optional): Import the IGES geometry file you created, practice.igs.
1. To import the practice.igs file into your current session repeat step 3. HyperMesh imports the
geometry data in the file to the existing data.
Step 10 (Optional): Import the Optistruct input file you created,

practice.fem, into the current HyperMesh session.
1. To import the practice.fem file into the current session, repeat step 4. HyperMesh imports the
data in the file to the existing data.
With the completion of Steps 8, 9, and 10, your current HyperMesh session should contain all of the
geometry and mesh data that existed in the HyperMesh session that you saved to a HyperMesh file in
Step 5.
Step 11 (Optional): Save your work.

1. From the menu bar, click File > Save > Model.
Altair Engineering

12

A large portion of HyperMesh functionality is organized into panels. Many panels have common
attributes and controls, so once you become familiar with the features of one panel, it is much easier
to understand other panels.
Use the entity selector and the extended entity selection menu to select and unselect nodes and
elements from the graphics area.
Use the orientation selector to define vectors along which to translate nodes and elements.
Switch between different entities to select and methods to define vectors.
Toggle between two options.
Enter, copy and paste, and calculate numbers.
Use the rapid menu functionality to execute commands with the mouse buttons rather than
clicking buttons.
Interrupt, but not exit, a panel to go to another panel using the keyboard function keys.
Exercise
Step 1: Open and view the model file, bumper.hm.
2. From the menu bar, click File > Open > Model.
3. In the Open Model dialog, navigate to your working directory and open the bumper.hm model file.
A model appears in the graphics area.
Step 2: In the Translate panel, select nodes from the graphics area.
1. To open the Translate panel, click Mesh > Translate > Nodes from the menu bar.
2. Click the entity selector to active it.
Note: The cyan border around the entity selector indicates that it is active.
3. Optional: If necessary, click

wireframe.
on the Visualization toolbar to change the element view style to
4. In the graphics area, left-click on the corners of the elements to select a few nodes. HyperMesh
positions a small, white node at each element corner you select.
13

Altair Engineering
5. To reset the selection of nodes, click
on the entity selector.
Step 3: Select and unselect elements from the graphics area.

1. Click
on the entity selector, and select elems from the list of entities that can be translated.
The entity selector is now set to elems.
2. In the graphics area, left-click on the element handles (the dot at the element's center) to select
several elements. HyperMesh highlights the elements you select in white.
3. To unselect an element, right-click on the element handle in the graphics area.
Step 4: Select and unselect elements using the quick window selection
method.
1. Verify that the entity selector is active and set to elems.
2. In the graphics area, press SHIFT, left-click, and draw a rectangular window around a few
elements. HyperMesh selects all of the element handles inside of the rectangular window you drew.
3. To unselect the elements, press SHIFT, right-click, and draw a rectangular window around the
selected elements.
4. In the graphics area, press SHIFT and left-click. The Quick window pop-up menu appears,
containing eight icons.
Altair Engineering

14
5. Still pressing SHIFT, click
, and draw a polygon window around a few unselected elements.
6. Release the SHIFT key and mouse button. HyperMesh selects all of the element handles inside of
the polygon window.
Step 5: Select and unselect elements by using the extended entity selection
menu.
1. Click elems >> reverse. HyperMesh unselects the elements that you selected, and selects the
elements that were not selected.
2. Click elems >> by adjacent. HyperMesh selects the elements that are adjacent to the selected
elements.
Step 6: Shade the elements, reset the selection, and select a few adjacent
elements.
1. On the Visualization toolbar, click
than wireframe mode.
2. To clear the selection of elems, click

15
. HyperMesh displays the elements in shaded mode, rather
on the entity selector.

Altair Engineering
3. Using the entity selector, select a few elements that are adjacent to each other in the graphics
area.
Step 7: Specify a direction vector (N1 and N2 only) along which to translate
the selected elements.
1. On the orientation selector, click
and select N1, N2, N3 from the list of vector and plane
options, which define the direction in which to translate the selected elements.
2. To activate the N1 selector, click
Note: The cyan border around the N1 selector indicates that it is active. Since the entity selector is
no longer active, HyperMesh changes the color of the selected elements in the graphics area
to gray.
3. In the graphics area, select any node for N1. HyperMesh highlights the selected node in green, and
the active selector advances to N2 in the Translate panel.
4. In the graphics area, select a node near N1 for N2. HyperMesh highlights the selected node in
blue, and the active selector advances to N3 in the Translate panel.
Note: For this tutorial, you do not need to select a node for N3. Selecting N1 and N2 defines a
vector for the direction of translation. This vector goes from N1 towards N2. Selecting N3
defines a plane. The direction of translation is the positive direction of the vector normal to
the plane. The positive direction is determined by the right-hand rule.
Altair Engineering

16
Step 8: Specify a distance to translate the selected elements and then

translate them.
1. Click the second toggle and select magnitude = N2-N1.
2. Click translate+. HyperMesh translates the selected elements in the N1 to N2 direction by N2-N1
units in the graphics area.
Note: HyperMesh places a thick black border around translate+, which indicates that it is a rapid
menu button.
3. Instead of clicking translate+, middle-mouse click. HyperMesh translates the selected elements
again by N2-N1 units.
4. Click translate- twice. HyperMesh translates the selected elements in the negative N1-N2 vector
direction, and restores them to their initial position.
Step 9: Measure the distance between two nodes.

1. To interrupt, but not exit the Translate panel and go to the Distance panel on the Geom page,
press F4.
Note: The graphics area is currently not displaying the elements and nodes that you selected in the
Translate panel, however, they are still selected. When you return to the Translate panel,
they will reappear.
2. In the Distance panel, click two nodes. The N1 selector is active.
17

Altair Engineering
3. In the graphics area, select any node for N1. HyperMesh highlights the selected node in green, and
the active selector advances to N2.
4. In the graphics area, select a node near N1 for N2. The distance between N1 and N2 appears in
the distance = field.
5. In the distance = field, highlight the value.
6. To copy the value, press CTRL + C.

7. To return to the Translate panel, click return. The graphics area displays the elements and nodes
you selected earlier in the Translate panel.
Step 10: Specify a distance to translate the selected elements and then
translate them.
1. Click the second toggle and select magnitude =.
2. In the magnitude = field, highlight the value.
Altair Engineering

18
3. To paste the distance= value that you copied from the Distance panel, press CTRL + V.
4. Click translate+. HyperMesh translates the selected elements in the direction from N1 to N2 by
the number of units specified in the magnitude = field.
5. Click translate- once. HyperMesh translates the selected elements in the negative N1-N2 vector
direction, and restores them to their initial position.
Step 11: Calculate 5.5 * 10.5 and specify the resulting value for magnitude
=.
1. In the magnitude= field, right-click. The HyperMesh calculator appears.
2. Click 5 . 5 (in that order).

3. Click enter.
4. Click 10 . 5 (in that order).
5. Click X. The calculator displays a calculated value of 57.75.
6. Click exit. The calculator closes and 57.75 appears in the magnitude = field.
7. Optional: To enter a value in the magnitude = field, left-click in the field to highlight the current
value, then enter a new value.
Step 12: Specify a new vector and translate the elements again.
1. To reset the direction of the translated elements, click
the active selector.
on the direction selector. N1 becomes
2. In the graphics area, select three nodes for N1, N2, N3 to define a plane.
19

Altair Engineering
3. Click translate+ or middle-mouse click. HyperMesh translates the elements 57.75 units in the
positive direction normal to the defined plane.
4. To exit the panel, click return.

1. When you have completed all of the exercises in this tutorial, click File > Save > Model from the
menu bar.
Altair Engineering

20

A large portion of HyperMesh functionality is organized into panels. Many panels have common
attributes and controls, so once you become familiar with the features of one panel, it is much easier
to understand other panels.
Create geometry and organize it into components
Organize elements into the components
Rename components
Identify and delete empty components
Delete all of the geometry lines
Reorder the components in a specific order
Renumber all of the components, starting with ID 1 and incrementing by 1
Create an assembly
Organize the constraint
Exercise
It is recommend that you review the general overview before completing this tutorial.
Step 1: Retrieve the model file, bumper.hm.

Step 2: Create a component named geometry to hold the models geometry.

1. To create a new component, click Collectors > Create > Components from the menu bar, or
right-click in the Model browser and select Create > Components from the context menu.
2. In the Create component dialog, enter geometry in the Name field.
3. Click the Color icon, and select yellow.
21

Altair Engineering
4. Click Create. The Model browser displays the current component collector geometry in bold.
Step 3: Create two geometry lines and organize them into different
components.
1. To open the Lines panel, click Geometry > Create > Lines > Standard Nodes from the menu
bar.
2. Activate the node list selector.
3. In the graphics area, select two opposite and diagonal nodes of the same element as illustrated in
the image below:
4. Click create. HyperMesh creates a yellow line.

Note: This line is the same color as the geometry component, because it is organized into the
current component, geometry.
Altair Engineering

22
5. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on rigid and select Make Current from the
context menu. HyperMesh makes the rigid component the active component.
6. In the graphics area, select two opposite and diagonal nodes of the same element, but different
than the element selected above.
7. Click create. HyperMesh creates a red line.
Note: This line is the same color the rigid component, because it is organized into the current
component, rigid.
23

Altair Engineering
Step 4: Move all of the models geometry surfaces into the component,
geometry.
1. To open the Organize panel, click Geometry > Organize > Surfaces from the menu bar.
2. To go to the Collectors subpanel, click collectors.
3. Click
on the entity selector, and select surfs from the list of entities that can be collected. The
entity selector is now set to surfs.
4. Click surfs >> all. HyperMesh highlights all of the displayed surfaces in white, which indicates they
are selected.
Note: If there are surfaces that are not displayed, HyperMesh still selects them because you
selected surfs >> all.
5. Click dest component=.

6. From the list of components, select geometry.
7. Click move. Hypermesh moves the selected surfaces into the geometry component, and colors the
geometric entities yellow to match the component color.
Altair Engineering

24
Step 5: Move all the models shell elements (quads and trias) into the
component, center.
In this step, you should still be in the Organize panel, collectors subpanel.
1. Click
on the entity selector, and select elems from the list of entities that can be collected.
The entity selector is now set to elems.
2. Click elems >> by collector.
3. Select the components: mid1, mid2, and end.
4. Optional: To select a component in the graphics area, left-click on it. A check mark appears in the
check box of the component you selected in the panel area.
5. Optional: To unselect a component, right-click its check box in the panel area, or right-click on it in
the graphics area.
6. To complete your component selection, click select.
7. Click dest component =.
8. Select the component center.
9. Click move. HyperMesh moves the elements in the selected components into the center
component, and colors all of the shell elements cyan blue to match the component color.
25

Altair Engineering
Step 6: Rename the component center to shells.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on center and select Rename from the
context menu.
2. In the editable field, rename the component shells and then press ENTER.
Step 7: Identify and delete all of the empty components.

1. To open the Delete panel, press F2.
2. Set the entity selector to comps.
3. Click preview empty. The Status bar displays a message that says, "3 entities are empty."
Note: The empty entities are the mid1, mid2, and end components that no longer have elements
in them.
4. Click comps. HyperMesh displays a complete list of the models components.
Note: The empty components are indicated with a selected check box.
5. To return to the Delete panel, click return.

6. Click delete entity. The Status bar displays a message that says, "Deleted 3 comps 336 elems 28
surfs"
Step 8: Delete all the geometry lines in the model.

In this step, you should still be in the Delete panel.
1. Set the entity selector to lines.
2. Click lines >> all.
Altair Engineering

26
3. Click delete entity. HyperMesh deletes the two lines you created earlier.
4. To exit the Delete panel, click return.
Step 9: Move the component, geometry, to the front in the components list.
1. To open the Reorder panel, click Collectors > Reorder > Components from the menu bar.
3. On the right side of the panel, click the bottom switch and select name(id). HyperMesh displays
the IDs for each component next to its name. The ID for shells is 1, the ID for rigid is 5, and the ID
for geometry is 6.
4. Select the component, geometry.

5. To complete your selection, click select.
6. Under move to, select front.
7. Click reorder. HyperMesh applies the reorder function to the component, geometry.
8. To review the reordered list of components, click comps.
Note: The component, geometry, is at the top of the list. However, it still has the same ID, (6).
Step 10: Renumber the components to be the same as their position in the
list.
1. To open the Renumber panel, click Collectors > Renumber > Components from the menu bar.
2. Go to the single subpanel.
5. On the right side of the panel, click comps >> all.
6. To complete your selection, click select.
7. In the start with = field, enter 1.
8. In the increment by = field, enter 1.
9. In the offset = field, enter 0.
10. Click renumber. HyperMesh renumbers the components.
27

Altair Engineering
11. To review the renumbered list of components, click comps.

Note: The components are numbered according to their position in the list. Set the view to
name(id) to see the numbers.

Note: Having components with IDs that do not reflect their position in the models list of
components will not result in errors. However, having components with IDs that do reflect
their position in the models list of components can be helpful for organizational purposes.
Step 11: Create an assembly containing the components, shells and rigid.
1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Create > Assembly from the context menu.
2. In the Create Assembly dialog, enter elements in the Name field.
3. Select a Color for the assembly.
4. Click Create. HyperMesh creates the assembly.

5. In the Model browser, Component folder, select rigid and shells.
Tip:
To select multiple components, press Ctrl + left-click.
6. To add the selected components to the elements assembly, drag the components, using the left
mouse button, over the elements assembly until it highlights.
Altair Engineering

28
Step 12: Create a load collector named constraints.

1. To create a load collector, click Collectors > Create > Load Collectors from the menu bar, or
right-click in the Model browser and select Create > Load Collector from the context menu.
2. In the Create Load Collector dialog, enter constraints in the Name field.
3. Click the Color icon, and select red.
4. Click Create. HyperMesh creates the load collector, and the Status bar displays a message that
says, "Load collector created".
Note: The constraints load collector is displayed in bold in the Model browser, which indicates that
it is the active load collector. Any loads that are created will be organized into this load
collector.
Step 13: Move the models one constraint into the load collector,
constraints.
The existing load collector, loads, contains several forces and one constraint. In this step, you will use
the Organize panel is to move the one constraint in the load collector, constraints.
1. To open the Organize panel, click Collectors > Organize > Load Collectors from the menu bar.
2. Go to the collectors subpanel.
3. Set the entity selector to loads.
4. Select loads >> by config.
5. Click config =, and select const.
6. In the center of the panel, toggle from displayed to all.
7. Click select entities.

8. Verify that dest component= is set to the load collector, constraints.
9. Click move. HyperMesh moves the selected constraints into the load collector, constraints.
Step 14: Create a component from the Model Browser.

1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Create > Component from the context menu.
2. In the Create Component dialog, enter component1 in the Name field.
3. Click the Color icon, and select pink.
29
Altair Engineering
4. Click Create. HyperMesh creates the component, and appends it to the list.
5. In the Model browser, expand the Components folder to see that component1 is boldfaced in
the list, which indicates that it is the current component.
Step 15: Review the existing assembly elements from the Model Browser.
1. In the Model browser, expand the Assembly Hierarchy folder and then expand the elements
assembly folder. It contains two components, rigid and shells.
Note: Use can use the Assemblies panel to add components from one assembly to another
assembly. The Model browser does not allow you to do this, but you can create assemblies
from it.
Step 16: Add the components, geometry and component1, to the assembly,
assem_mid, using the Model browser.
1. In the Model browser, select the geometry and component1 components.
Tip:
To select multiple items in the Model browser one at a time, press and hold Ctrl and then
left-click the items. If you wish to select multiple items in the Model browser at once, leftclick the first item, press and hold SHIFT, and then left-click the last item in the list.
2. To add the selected components to the assem_mid assembly, drag the components, using the left
mouse button, over the assem_mid assembly until it highlights.
Step 17: Rename assem_mid to assem_geom in the Model browser.

1. In the Model browser, Assembly folder, right-click on assem_mid and select Rename from the
context menu.
2. In the editable field, rename the assembly assem_geom and then press Enter.
Step 18: Delete component1 from the Model Browser.

1. In the Model browser, right-click on component1 and select Delete from the context menu.
2. In the HyperMesh dialog, click Yes to confirm that you wish to delete the component. HyperMesh
deletes component1.
Altair Engineering
30
Note:
In the Model browser, there is no longer a boldfaced component name. This indicates
that there is no current component specified.
Step 19: Set the current component from the Model Browser.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on shells and select Make Current from the
context menu.
Note: The shells component name is boldfaced.
31

Altair Engineering

When performing finite element modeling and analysis setup, it is important to be able to view the
model from different vantage points and control the visibility of entities. You may need to rotate the
model to understand the shape, zoom in to view details more closely, or hide specific parts of the
model so other parts can be seen. Sometimes a shaded view is best, while other times, a wireframe
view allows you work on details inside the model. HyperMesh has many functions to help you control
the view, visibility, and display of entities.
Control the points of view using the mouse and toolbar.
Control the visibility of entities using the Display panel, Mask panel, and tools on the Utility
menu.
Control how entities look by using the toolbar and the Model browser.
Rename components.
Identify and delete empty components.
Delete all of the geometry lines.
Exercise
Step 1: Retrieve the HyperMesh model file, bumper.hm.
Step 2: Manipulate the model view using the mouse controls.

In this step, you will learn how to use CTRL + mouse keys to rotate the model, change the center of
rotation, zoom, fit, and pan.
1. Move your mouse pointer into the graphics area.
2. Press CTRL + Left Mouse Button (LMB) and move the mouse around. The model rotates with the
movement of the mouse, and a small white square appears in the middle of the graphics area,
indicating the center of the rotation.
3. Release the LMB and press it again to rotate the model in a different direction.
4. Press CTRL and quick-click the LMB anywhere on the model. The center of rotation square appears
near where you clicked, and HyperMesh searches for one of the conditions listed below, in the listed
order, and relocates the center of rotation at or near the first condition identified.
A nearby node or surface vertex
A nearby surface edge to project onto
A nearby geometry surface or shaded element
Note: If none of the conditions are met, the center of rotation is relocated to the center of the
screen.
5. To rotate the model and view the change in rotation behavior, press CTRL + LMB.
6. Press CTRL and quick-click the LMB anywhere in the graphics area, except for on the model.
HyperMesh relocates the center of rotation square to the center of the screen.
7. To rotate the model and observe the change in rotation behavior, press CTRL + LMB.
Altair Engineering

32
8. Press CTRL + Middle Mouse Button (MMB) and move the mouse around. HyperMesh draws a
white line along the path of the mouse movement.
9. Release the mouse button. HyperMesh zooms in on the portion of the model where the line was
drawn.
Note: You can also simply draw a line to zoom in on a portion of the model.
10. Press CTRL + quick-click the MMB. Hypermesh fits the model to the graphics area.
11. Press CTRL and spin the Mouse Wheel. Hypermesh zooms in or out on the model, depending on
which direction you spin the mouse wheel.
12. Move the mouse pointer to a different location in the graphics area and repeat step 2.11.
HyperMesh zooms zooms in or out on the model from where the mouse handle is located.
13. To fit the model to the graphics area, press CTRL + quick-click the MMB.
14. Press CTRL + Right Mouse Button (RMB) and move the mouse around. Hypermesh pans
(translates) the model according to the mouse movement.
Step 3: Manipulate the view of the model using the rotate functions on the
toolbar.
1. On the View Controls toolbar, left-click
(Dynamic Rotate).
2. Move the mouse pointer into the graphics area. The center of rotation square appears.
3. Press and hold the LMB, and then move the mouse around. The model rotates with the movement
of the mouse, similar to the way the model rotates when you press CTRL + LMB and move the
mouse.
4. Click the MMB on the model. The center of rotation square appears near where you clicked.
5. To exit the rotation mode, move the mouse pointer out of the graphics area or right-click.
6. On the View Controls toolbar, right-click
(Dynamic Rotate) and move the mouse pointer into
the graphics area. The center of rotation square appears.
7. To change the center of rotation, click the MMB on the model.
8. Click the LMB near the center of rotation square. The model rotates continuously in the direction of
your mouse pointer, relative to the center of rotation.
9. With the LMB still pressed, move the mouse around slowly. The direction and speed of the rotating
model changes.
Note: The farther the mouse pointer is from the center of rotation, the quicker the model rotates.
10. To rotate the model in a different direction, release the LMB, and then click it again.
11. Click the MMB anywhere in the graphics area, except on the model. The center of rotation square is
relocates to the screens center.
12. To exit the rotation mode, move the mouse pointer out of the graphics area or left-click.
Step 4: Manipulate the view of the model by using the zoom in and out
functions on the toolbar.
(Circle / Dynamic Zoom). The Status bar displays
the message, "Circle the data to be zoomed in on."
2. Move the mouse pointer into the graphics area.
3. Press the LMB and move the mouse around in the graphics area. HyperMesh draws a white line
along the path of the mouse movement.
33

Altair Engineering
4. Release the LMB. HyperMesh zooms in on the portion of the model where the line was drawn.
Note: You can also simply draw a linear line to zoom in on a portion of the model.
This function is similar to pressing CTRL + MMB to zoom into a portion of the model.
5. On the Standard Views toolbar, click
(Fit). HyperMesh fits the model to the graphics area.

(Zoom In / Out). HyperMesh zooms in on the model
by the factor specified in the Options panel.
model by the same factor.
(Zoom In / Out). HyperMesh zooms out on the
8. To open the Options panel, click Preferences > Meshing Options or Geometry Options from
the menu bar.
9. Go to the geometry or mesh subpanel.
10. In the zoom factor = field, enter 4.
by the larger, specified factor.
(Zoom In / Out). HyperMesh zooms in on the model

message "Drag up/down to zoom in/out."
(Zoom In / Out). The Status bar displays the
14. Move the mouse pointer into the graphics area, press the LMB, and then move the mouse pointer
up and down. HyperMesh zooms in and out on the model according to how far you move the mouse
up or down.
15. To exit the dynamic zoom mode, move the mouse pointer out of the graphics area or left-click.
Step 5: Manipulate the model view using the arrows and view panel on the
toolbar.
1. On the View Controls toolbar, right-click or left-click any of the Rotate icons ( ,
, ). The
model rotates in the direction of the arrow by the rotation angle specified in the Options panel.
(XY Top Plane View).
3. To open the Options panel, click Preferences > Meshing Options or Geometry Options from
the menu bar.
4. In the rotate angle = field, enter 90.
5. To return to the main menu, click return.
6. On the View Controls toolbar, click any of the Rotate icons (
the new specified rotation angle, 90.
). The model rotates by
7. Change the view of the model to any view.

8. To rotate the model, press CTRL + LMB, or click any of the Rotate icons on the View Controls
toolbar.
9. To zoom in or out on the model, press CTRL + MMB, or click any of the Zoom icons on the View
Controls toolbar.
10. From the Model browser, right-click anywhere and select Create > View from the context menu.
11. To see the new view name, expand the View folder.
12. Right-click on the view and select Rename from the context menu.
Altair Engineering

34
13. In the editable field, enter my_view for the new name.
14. To display a different view of the model, click
(XY Plane Top View).
15. To display the view, click my_view in the Model browser.
Step 6: Control the display of components using the toolbar.

the model's shell elements.
(Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines). HyperMesh shades
2. Left-click next to
(Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines), and select
(Shaded Elements
and Feature Lines). HyperMesh shades the model's elements and displays the features lines,
mesh lines are no longer displayed.
3. Left-click next to
(Shaded Elements and Feature Lines), and select
Elements). HyperMesh hides the model's feature lines.
4. To return to the wireframe shading mode, click

Visualization toolbar.
(Shaded
(Wireframe Elements Skin Only) on the
Step 7: Control the display of components using the Model browser.

35

Altair Engineering

mesh lines.
. HyperMesh shades all of the model's elements, with no
2. In the Model browser, right-click and select Columns > Show FE Style from the context menu. A
new column appears in the Model browser.
3. For the mid1 component, left-click
in the FE Style column.
4. From the pop-up menu of displays modes, select

(Wireframe Elements Skin Only).
HyperMesh changes only the mid1 components display mode to wireframe.
Altair Engineering

36
5. Experiment with the other display modes.

Icon
Display Mode
Wireframe Elements Element edges are displayed with lines.
Wireframe Elements Skin Only Element edges are displayed with lines for shell
elements only.
Shaded Elements The element is displayed as a filled polygon.
Shaded Elements with Mesh Lines The element is displayed as a filled polygon
with the feature edges drawn in mesh line color.
Hidden Line with Feature Lines The element is displayed as a filled polygon with
the feature edges in mesh line color.
Transparent The element is displayed as a filled transparent polygon.
Step 8: Control the visibility of various entity categories using the Model
browser.
1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Expand All from the context menu. All of the folders
in the browser expand.
2. At the top of the browser, click
entities in the model.
37
(Display none). HyperMesh turns off the display of all the

Altair Engineering
3. Click
(Display all). HyperMesh displays all of the entities in the model.
4. Left-click Component (5) to select all of the components in the model.

5. Click
(Display none). HyperMesh turns off the display of all the component collectors.
Note: Display all, Display none, and Display reverse act globally (on all entities) if you have
not selected any of the entities in the Model browser. If a folder is selected (highlighted),
HyperMesh will perform the action only on the entities within that folder. If an individual
entity is selected, HyperMesh will perform the action only on that entity.
6. Left-click in the white space of the browser. HyperMesh deselects all of the entities in the browser.
7. Click
(Display reverse). HyperMesh reverses the display and only shows the components,
instead of everything but the components.
Altair Engineering

38
8. Click
(Component View). HyperMesh displays only the component collectors in the browser.
9. At the top of the browser, click
next to
(Elements and Geometry Filter), and select
(Elements).
Note: Display all, Display none, and Display reverse will no longer affect the display of the
geometry in the components.
10. Click
(Display none). HyperMesh only displays the components geometry.
11. Set the elements and geometry filter to

12. Click
(Elements and Geometry).
(Display reverse). HyperMesh only displays the component's elements.
Step 9: Control the visibility of individual components using the Model

browser.
A component collector has two compartments: one for elements and the other for geometry. From the
Model browser, you can control the element and geometry display of individual components using
these compartments.
1. Next to the mid2, end, and rigid components, click
elements in the center and mid1 components.
(elements). HyperMesh displays the
2. On your keyboard, press F. HyperMesh fits the displayed components to the graphics area.
3. Next to the components mid2 and end, click
the mid2 and end components.
(geometry). HyperMesh displays the geometry in
4. Press F. HyperMesh fits the displayed components to the graphics area.
39

Altair Engineering
Step 10: Control the display of entities using the Mask panel.
1. To open the Mask panel, click
(Mask) on the Display toolbar.
2. Go to the mask subpanel.

3. Set the entity selector to elems.
5. Select the component, mid1.
6. To complete your selection of components, click select.
7. From the graphics area, manually select a few elements in the center (blue) component.
8. To mask the elements, click mask. The elements in the mid1 component and the elements you
selected from the graphics area are no longer displayed.
Note: In the Model browser, notice that the elements ( ) for the components center and mid1
are still displayed. Their display icons indicate that they are activated even though some or
all of the elements in these components are masked (hidden).
9. In the Mask panel, click unmask all, or on the Display toolbar click
(unmask all). HyperMesh
displays all of the elements in the components, center and mid1, again.
Note: The elements in the other components are not displayed. This is because these components
are not active in the Display panel.
Step 11: Control the display of entities using the Find panel.
1. To open the Find panel, click
(Find) on the Display toolbar.
2. Go to the find entities subpanel.

4. Select the component, end.
5. Click select.
Altair Engineering

40
6. To find the elements, click find. HyperMesh displays the elements in the component, end.
In the Model browser, notice that the elements for the component, end, are now shown as active
( ). This is because the collector containing the entities that are to be displayed (found) must be
active.
7. Go to the find attached subpanel.

8. Click attached to: elems >> displayed.
9. To find the elements, click find. HyperMesh displays some of the elements in the components,
mid2 and rigid. These elements are immediately adjacent and connected to the selected elements.
Note: The elements for these components are now shown as active (
made active so that the elements could be displayed.
). The components were

11. On the Display toolbar, click
(Unmask All). HyperMesh displays all of the model's elements.
Note: This is because the Find panel finds the entities it is supposed to find, activates (displays)
the corresponding collectors, and then masks the other entities in the collectors it activated.
In this case, the last find command displayed on the components, mid2 and rigid, in the
Model browser.
Step 12: Change the display of entities using the Mask tab.
1. In the Model browser, click on any of the white space to make sure nothing is selected.
2. Click
41
(Display none).

Altair Engineering
3. Click
(Display all).
Note: Performing these two steps makes sure that everything is displayed in the model.
4. Click the Mask tab.
5. In the Isolate column of Components, click . HyperMesh displays only the components in the
model (elements, geometry, and connectors), and masks everything else.
6. Expand the Components branch to expose the connectors, elements, and geometry.
7. In the Hide column of Elements, click
displays the surfaces.
. HyperMesh masks the elements in the model, and only
8. Expand the LoadCollectors branch to expose loads and equations.

9. Expand the Loads branch to expose constraints, forces, moments, and so on.
10. In the Show column of Constraints, click
surfaces.
. HyperMesh adds constraints to the display of the
11. Expand the Elements branch to expose 0D/rigids, springs/gaps, 1D, 2D, and 3D.
12. In the Isolate column of 0D/Rigids, click . HyperMesh adds rigid elements to the display, and
masks the surfaces. The constraints remain displayed.
Note: When you use Isolate below the top level of the list, HyperMesh will not mask anything
outside of the top level that the entity being isolated belongs to. Rigids belong to
components at the top level, therefore Hypermesh will not mask any entities in the other top
levels.
13. In the Isolate column of Components, click
components, and masks the constraints.
. HyperMesh displays all of the entities in the
Note: When you use Isolate at the top level of the list (components, groups, loadcollectors,
morphing, multibodies, and systemcollectors), HyperMesh will mask everything outside of
the entity type being isolated.
Step 13: Change the color of components using the Model browser.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, click the Color icon next to mid1.
2. From the color pop-up, select a different color.
3. Observe the change in color of the elements in mid1.
Altair Engineering

42
Geometry
HM-2080: Modifying Models using solidThinking
43

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial, you will:
Delete untrimmed surfaces
Close missing surfaces
Set the cleanup tolerance
Equivalence free edges
Delete duplicate surfaces
The benefits of importing and repairing CAD are:

Correcting any errors in the geometry from import
Creating the simplified part needed for the analysis
Meshing a part all at once
Ensuring proper connectivity of mesh
Obtaining a desirable mesh pattern and quality
Exercise: Importing and Repairing CAD Geometry Data

This exercise uses the model file, clip_repair.hm.
Step 1: Open and view the model file, clip_repair.hm.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the clip_repair.hm model file.
Step 2: View the model in topology display toolbar and shaded mode to
evaluate its integrity.
1. Observe where the model has incorrect connectivity and missing or duplicate surfaces.
2. To open the Auto Geometry Cleanup panel, click Geometry > Autocleanup from the menu bar.
The surface edges are now colored according to their topology status.
Note: This occurs because Geometry Color is set to
Altair Engineering
.
44
3. To display the model's geometry in wire frame mode, click
on the Visualization toolbar.
Note: The Visualization toolbar contains icons that control the display of the surfaces and surface
edges. Surfaces can be shaded with or without edges or wireframe. Right-click the icons to
access the drop-down menu for additional options. Place your mouse over the cursor to view
a description of the buttons functionality.
4. To open the Visualization browser and access the Topology options, click
Note: The Topology options control the display of the surfaces and surface edges. Surfaces can be
shaded or wireframe. The check boxes within the Visualization browser turn the display of
the different edge types and fixed points (surface vertices) on or off.
5. Select only the Free check box. The graphics area displays only the free edges.
6. Observe the free (red) edges and make note of where they are. Free edges show where there is
incorrect connectivity or gaps.
7. Observe the locations where there are closed loops of free edges. These are locations that probably
have missing surfaces.
Free edges indicating surface discontinuities of the clip geometry
8. Select only the Non-manifold check box.

9. Observe the non-manifold edges and make note of where they are. Non-manifold edges show
where there are more than two surfaces sharing an edge, which might indicate incorrect
connectivity. For this part, there are yellow edges completely surrounding two areas. This indicates
that there are probably duplicate surfaces in these locations.
10. Select all of the check boxes.
11. Close the Visualization browser.
13. To shade the model's geometry and surface edges, click
14. To locate any errors in the geometry, rotate, zoom, and pan.
15. Note the areas to be worked on:
45
A surface that overhangs a round corner
A missing surface

Altair Engineering
Surface overhanging an edge and a missing surface
Step 3: Delete the surface that overhangs the round corner.

1. To open the Delete panel, click Geometry > Delete > Surfaces from the menu bar, or press F2.
2. Optional: If you opened the Delete panel by pressing F2, set the entity selector to surfs.
3. Select the overhanging surface shown in the previous image.
4. Click delete entity. HyperMesh deletes the selected entities.
Step 4: Create surfaces to fill large gaps in the model.

1. To open the panel from which you can create a surface, click Geometry > Create > Surfaces >
Spline/Filler from the menu bar.
2. Clear the Keep tangency check box.
4. Verify the Auto create (free edges only) check box is selected. The Auto create option
simplifies the selection of the lines bounding the missing surface. Once a line is selected,
HyperMesh selects the remaining free edges that form a closed loop, and then creates the filler
surface.
5. Zoom into the area indicated in the following image.
Area of missing surfaces
Altair Engineering

46
6. Select one of the red lines bounding one of the gaps (missing surfaces) shown in the previous
image. HyperMesh creates a filler surface to close the hole.
7. Repeat step 4.6 to create a filler surface in the other gap.
Step 5: Set the global geometry cleanup tolerance to .01.

1. Press O. The Options panel opens.
2. Go to the geometry subpanel.
3. In the cleanup tol = field, type 0.01 to stitch the surfaces with a gap less than 0.01
Step 6: Combine multiple free edge pairs at one time with the equivalence
tool.
1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Edit > Surface Edges > Equivalence.
2. Select the equiv free edges only check box.
3. Select surfs >> all.
4. Verify that the cleanup tol= is set to 0.01. This is the global cleanup tolerance that you specified
in the Options panel.
5. Click equivalence. HyperMesh combines any free edge pairs within the specified cleanup tolerance.
Most of the red free edges are combined into green shared edges. The few remaining are caused by
gaps larger than the cleanup tolerance.
Step 7: Combine free edge pairs, one pair at a time, using the toggle.
1. Go to the toggle subpanel.
2. In the cleanup tol = field, type 0.1.
3. Click one of the free edges shown in the following image. When you select the edge, it will change
from red to green, indicating that the free edge pair has been equivalenced.
Area where free edges need to be toggled
4. Use toggle to equivalence the other edges shown in the previous image.
47

Altair Engineering
Step 8: Combine the remaining free edge pair using replace.

1. Go to the replace subpanel.
2. In the Model browser, View folder, right-click on View2 and select Show from the context menu.
The graphics area displays two edges to retain and remove for replacement.
3. With the moved edge line selector active, click the leftmost free edge.
4. With the retained edge line selector now active, select the rightmost red edge.
5. In the cleanup tol = field, enter 0.1.
6. Click replace. HyperMesh posts a message similar to, "Gap = (.200018). Do you still wish to
replace?".
7. To close the gap, click Yes.
8. To exit the replace subpanel, click return.
Step 9: Find and delete all duplicate surfaces.

1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Defeature > Duplicates.
2. Click surfs >> displayed.
Altair Engineering

48
3. In the cleanup tol = field, type 0.01.

4. Click find. The status bar displays the following message, "2 duplicated surfaces were found."
5. To remove duplicate surfaces, click delete.
Step 10: Observe the model again to identify any remaining free edges, or
missing or duplicate surfaces.
1. On the Visualization toolbar, change the geometry color mode to
shade the model's geometry and surface edges.
and click
to
2. Observe the model again to identify the remaining free edges and missing or duplicate surfaces.
Note: All of the edges in the model should be displayed as green shared edges, indicating that you
have a completely enclosed thin solid part.
3. To exit the return panel, click return.

With the cleanup operations completed, now is a good time to save your work.
49

Altair Engineering

Create a midsurface
Visualize the midsurface by using shading options and transparency
This exercise uses CAD geometry data for a thin solid clip. Because of the small thickness of the part, it
is assumed that it will be modeled for FEA as shell elements. The elements will be created on the midplane of the part.
Exercise: Generating a Midsurface

The surfaces in this model have no connectivity errors. This could be because the file was imported
without errors or because the errors were corrected using HyperMesh. In this case, errors in the
topology were repaired in the previous exercise (missing surfaces are re-created, duplicate surfaces
are deleted, gaps are closed, and so on). For this tutorial, you can continue using the model you
created in tutorial HM-2000, or you can open the new, clip_midsurface.hm, file. Either way, the
geometry is at the point where you can use the Midsurface panel to generate a midsurface.
Step 1: Retrieve and view the model file.

This exercise uses the model, clip_midsurface.hm.
to shade the model's geometry and surface edges, and click
to change the geometry color mode to mixed. The surfaces displayed in the
graphics area represent a solid part.
Note: These visualization techniques will be necessary for viewing the newly created midsurface.
Step 2: Generate a midsurface from midsurface panel.

1. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Midsurfaces > Auto.
2. Verify that the closed solid option is selected, and the entity selector is active and set to surfs.
3. Select one surface.
4. To start the midsurface generation, click extract. HyperMesh creates the midsurface, and
organizes the surfaces into a new Middle Surface component. When HyperMesh creates the
midsurface, transparency is turned on for all of the other components in the model except the new
Middle Surface component.
Step 3: Review the parts midsurface.

1. In the Model browser, only display the Middle Surface component. The graphics area displays the
midsurfaces generated for the solid sections of the model using the auto-midsurface panel.
Altair Engineering

50
Midsurface generated from a volume of surfaces
2. In the Model browser, turn the geometry for the lvl10 component back on.
3. To open the Transparency panel, click
4. With the comps selector active, select a line or surface of the lvl10 component. HyperMesh selects
the entire component because the entity selector is set to comps.
Tip:
You may need to zoom in on the model to select a valid entity.
5. Under transparency, click

and more transparent.
several times. The surfaces in the lvl10 component become more
6. Optional: Drag the transparency slider back and forth to control the level of transparency.
7. To visualize the midsurface, rotate, zoom, and pan.
Close-up of the midsurface with the lvl10 component set to full transparency

Now that the midsurface has been created, it is a good time to save the model.
Summary
You have now created surfaces on the mid-plane of the part. These surfaces can now be meshed or
further modifications can be made to their topology, depending on the requirements of the analysis.
51

Altair Engineering

Use the offset+planes+sweeps option when midsurfacing.
Manually correct gaps in an auto-generated midsurface using the plates edit function.
In this tutorial, you will be using CAD geometry data for a box with thin ribs inside of it. Because the
geometry consists of thin planar sections, it is assumed that it will be modeled for FEA as shell
elements. The elements will be created on the mid-planes of each section.
Exercise: Generating a Midsurface

Step 1: Retrieve and View the Model File
3. In the Open Model dialog, open the Insert_planes.hm model file.
4. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Midsurfaces > Auto.
5. In the Auto Midsurface panel, click the toggle and select closed solid.
6. Select any surface.

7. Click extraction options.
8. From the drop-down menu, select offset+planes+sweeps.
9. Go to the auto extraction subpanel.

Altair Engineering

52
10. Click extract.

11. Shade the model's geometry and surface edges by clicking
12. Review the generated midsurface by hiding the Body.1 component in the Model browser. Some of
the plates do not properly cross.
Step 2: Use Plates Edit to Resolve Midsurface Gaps

1. In Model browser, display the component Body.1.
2. On the Visualization toolbar, set the geometry display mode to
3. From the panel area, select the interim edit tools from the drop-down.
4. From the edit plates subpanel, click show/edit all. HyperMesh populates the Model browser with
plates that were detected by the tool.
Note: If you have not yet extracted the middle surface using either the offset+planes or
offset+planes+sweeps options, then the model will not have any plate information yet.
Plate components will not be populated in this situation.
53

Altair Engineering
5. In the Model browser, hide the components Body.1 and Middle Surface.
6. Verify that the full plate surfs selector is active.
7. Select the green face. HyperMesh selects all of the plates in the ^Planar plate #0 component.
8. Hide all of the plates in the ^Planar plate #0 component by right-clicking on the green face.
9. Hide the three remaining exterior sides. HyperMesh hides the components ^Planar plate #2,
^Planar plate #3, and ^Planar plate #4.
10. Select any face from the long interior rib, as shown in the following image. This rib was split into
three groups by the algorithm, and needs to be reunited into one component.
11. Select the two remaining plates from the long interior rib.
12. Merge the three plates into a single planar plate by setting the plate type to planar.
13. Click merge plates or middle-click in the graphics area. HyperMesh combines the three plates into
a single component and displays them in the same color.
14. Merge the two remaining internal ribs.
Altair Engineering

54
15. Click update.

16. Click return.
17. Review the generated misdurface by hiding the Body.1 component in the Model browser. The
plates are closer together, but they are still not the full length of the rib due to the holes that trim
the plates.
Step 3: Use Plates Edit a Second Time to Resolve Remaining Gaps

In this step, you will need to tell the auto-midsurface algorithm not to trim the plates where the holes
are.
1. In the interim edit tools panel, edit plates subpanel, click show/edit all. HyperMesh populates
less plate components in the Model browser because some plates were merged in the previous
steps.
2. Hide all of the components except ^Plate edge.

3. Using the single surface surfs selector, select all four internal surfaces of the two holes.
Note: Each hole has two internal surfaces.
55

Altair Engineering
4. Click not a trim surface. HyperMesh organizes the selected surfaces into a new component
labeled ^Not a trim surface.
5. Click update.
6. Click return.
7. Review the generated misdurface by hiding the Body.1 component in the Model browser. There is
now a yellow edge where the plates meet, which indicates that the plates are intersected correctly.
It would have been possible to reorganize the plates and create the Not a trim surface component
at the same time.
Altair Engineering

56
Step 4 (Optional): Save Your Work

Summary
The model now contains surfaces on the mid-plane of the part. You used insert planes and plates
edit to ensure that there were no erroneous gaps in the generated midsurfaces. You can now mesh
these surfaces, or further modify their topology, depending on the requirements of the analysis.
57

Altair Engineering

Mesh the clip, review the mesh quality, and determine the features to be simplified
Remove surface fillets
Remove edge fillets
Remove pinholes
This exercise involves changing the shape of a part in order to simplify the geometry. Certain details of
the shape, such as small holes or blends, may simply not be necessary for the analysis being
performed. When these details are removed, the analysis can run more efficiently. Additionally, mesh
quality is often improved as well. Changing the geometry to match the desired shape can also allow a
mesh to be created more quickly.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, clip_defeature.hm. This model file contains geometry that has been
midsurfaced. Surfaces have been created on the mid-plane of the part. In this exercise, you will mesh
this model using an element size of 2.5. You can assume a simple structural analysis will be run on the
part, and thus does not require much detail. There are unnecessary features in this model that can also
be removed.
Step 1: Open and view the model file, clip_defeature.hm.

2. In the Open Model dialog, open the clip_defeature.hm model file.
Step 2: To easily work with the midsurface, turn off the display of the lvl10
component.
If the lvl10 component is displayed, it needs to be turned off so that you can easily work on the
midsurface geometry.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, click
Altair Engineering
next to lvl10 to turn off its geometry display.

58
Step 3: Mesh the clip to view mesh quality before defeaturing.

2. To open the AutoMesh panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh from the menu bar, or press
F12.
3. Set the entity selector to surfs.
4. In the element size = field, type 2.5.
5. From the mesh type list, select mixed.
6. Toggle the meshing mode from interactive to automatic.
7. Verify that the elems to surf comp toggle is set.
8. To select all of the displayed surfaces, click surfs >> displayed.
9. Click mesh. HyperMesh generates the mesh preview.
Initial mesh on the clip model
Step 4 (Optional): Review the quality of the mesh.

In this step, you will review the quality of the mesh that was created. Pay attention to the areas that
have an irregular, poor quality mesh. An irregular, poor quality mesh generally contains rows and
columns of quads that are not neat. You will use the Check Elements panel to evaluate the minimum
length check of the elements.
1. To open the Check Elements panel, click Mesh > Check > Elements > Check Elements from
the menu bar, or press F10.
2. Go to the 2-d subpanel.
3. In the length < field, enter 1.
4. To evaluate the minimum length, click length. Many of the elements that failed the length test are
located around the fillets of this model.
Tip:
59
For better visualization of element quality, you may need to display the geometry in wire
frame mode by clicking

Altair Engineering
Elements failing the length check
Step 5: Remove the four small pinholes.

Pinholes are closed free edge loops within a surface. Pinholes do not need to be circular.
1. To open the Defeature panel, click Geometry > Defeature > Pinholes from the menu bar.
2. In the diameter < field, enter 3.0.
4. Click find. HyperMesh identifies all of the pinholes that have a diameter of 3 or less in the model,
and places a white xP symbol in their centers.
Pinholes identified using a 3 mm diameter
5. Click delete. HyperMesh removes the selected pinholes in the model and replaces them with fixed
points located at the center of the original pinholes. The mesh also updates according to the
changes in the geometry.
Altair Engineering

60
Step 6: Remove all surface fillets in the clip.

1. Go to the surf fillets subpanel.
2. If the model's geometry and surface edges are not shaded, click
3. Under find fillets in selected, click surfs >> displayed.

4. In the min radius field, type 2.0.
5. Click find. HyperMesh identifies all of the surface fillets with a radius of 2 or greater in the model.
Surface fillets identified for removal
6. Click remove.
Step 7: Automatically identify and remove rounded corners of surfaces.

You should still be in the Defeature panel.
1. Go to the edge fillets subpanel.
3. In the min radius field, type 1.0.
4. To find all of the fillets in the model, set the bottom switch to all.
5. Click find. HyperMesh identifies all of the edge fillets that meet the filter criteria, and displays a F
symbol where they are located in the model along with radial lines.
Edge fillets identified for removal
61

Altair Engineering
6. With the fillets entity selector active, right-click on one of the F fillet markers on the screen to
deselect the fillet.
7. Click remove. HyperMesh deletes all of the selected edge fillets except for the one which was
deselected in step 6.

Now that the model has been simplified, it is a good time to save the model.
Summary
The model is now represented in a much simpler form that suits the analysis that will be performed.
Holes, surface fillets, and edge fillets were removed that were considered too small to be captured by
the desired element size of 2.5.
Altair Engineering

62

Mesh the part to determine poor element quality
Suppress small edges
Split surfaces
Remove interior fixed points
Replace closely placed fixed points
Create final mesh
Topological details of the geometry may affect the quality of the mesh created from the surfaces.
Some of these details may not reflect any major feature of the parts shape, and can be removed
without concern. When modifying the topology affects the shape of the surfaces, a compromise must
be made between the part shape and the element quality necessary for the analysis. Other times,
adding topological features that do not change the shape of the part may actually help create a better
quality mesh.
Exercise: Refining Topology to Achieve a Quality Mesh

Step 1: Open the model file, clip_refine.hm.
2. In the Open Model dialog, open the clip_refine.hm model file.
3. Take a few moments to observe the model using the different visual options available in HyperMesh
(rotation, zooming, etc.).
Step 2: Create a preliminary mesh.

1. To open the Automesh panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh from the menu bar, or press
F12.
3. Go to the size and bias subpanel.
4. In the element size = field, type 2.5.
5. From the mesh type list, select mixed.
6. Switch the meshing mode from interactive to automatic.
8. Click mesh. HyperMesh meshes the surfaces.
63

Altair Engineering
Initial mesh on the defeatured clip model
Step 3: Review the mesh quality.

1. Take a minute to rotate, zoom, and pan the model to review the mesh that was created. Pay
attention to the locations where the mesh was not created in rows and columns of quads.
5. To evaluate the minimum length, click length. HyperMesh highlights the elements that failed the
check.
of it's elements.
next to Middle Surface to turn off the display
Step 4: Remove short edges by combining fixed points.

1. To open the Replace panel, click Geometry > Edit > Fixed Points > Replace from the menu
bar.
2. Verify that the moved points selector is active.
3. Select the lower fixed point as indicated in the following image.
Tip:
If there are no visible fixed points on your model, verify that

toolbar.
is selected on the Display
4. Activate the retained point selector.

5. Select the upper fixed point as indicated in the following image.
6. Click replace.
Altair Engineering

64
Selecting fixed points to be combined
Step 5: Remove the fixed points interior to all surfaces.

You should still be in the Points panel.
1. Go to the suppress subpanel
2. Under at cursor, verify that the point selector is active.
3. Select the four fixed points as illustrated in the following image. HyperMesh deletes each fixed point
when you select it.
These fixed points are left over from a defeaturing operation where small holes (pinholes) were
removed. They could remain without greatly sacrificing the element quality, given the element size
used for the mesh, but the mesh would be better without them.
Fixed points to be removed
Step 6: Add edges to the surfaces to control the mesh pattern.

1. To open the Trim with Nodes panel, click Geometry > Edit > Surfaces > Trim with Nodes
from the menu bar.
2. Under node normal to edge, click node.
3. Zoom into the area illustrated in the following image and select the indicated fixed point.
4. With the lines selector now active, select the line shown in the image below. HyperMesh creates an
edge from the location of the fixed point perpendicular to the line.
65

Altair Engineering
Select fixed point and line to split the surface.
5. Repeat steps 6.2 through 6.4 for the point and line illustrated in the following image.
Altair Engineering

66
Select fixed point and line to split the surface
Step 7: Add edges to the surfaces to control the mesh pattern.

1. Go to the trim with surfs/planes subpanel.
2. In the with plane column, verify that the surfs selector is active.
3. Select the five surfaces indicated in the following image.
Surfaces to be selected for splitting
4. Verify that the direction selector is set to N1, N2, N3.

5. Click N1 to make the selector active.
6. Press and hold your left mouse button, move it over the edge as indicated in the following figure,
and then release it when the cursor changes to a square with a dot in the center
7. Click two points anywhere along the edge. Do not click a third. Hypermesh places nodes on the line
for N1 and N2.
8. To open the Distance panel, press F4.
9. Go to the three nodes subpanel.
67

Altair Engineering
10. Press and hold your left mouse button, move it over the edge of the hole as indicated in the
following image, and then release it when the cursor changes to a square with a dot in the center
.
Select fixed point and line to split the surface
11. Click three points anywhere along the edge. HyperMesh places temporary nodes on the line
representing N1, N2, and N3.
Note: The technique you used to create nodes to select where none existed before can be used in
any place where nodes need to be selected but do not exist in the model. You can create
nodes in this manner on lines, surfaces and elements. For more details, see the HyperMesh
online help. Pick the index and type, Picking Nodes on Geometry or Elements.
12. Click circle center. HyperMesh creates a node at the center of the hold.
13. To exit the Surface Edit panel, click return.
14. Activate the B selector.
15. Select the node that was just created at the center of the hole.
16. Click trim. HyperMesh trims the surfaces through the center of the hole.
Step 8:
Suppress shared edges causing a small edge.
1. To go to the (Un)suppress panel, click Geometry > Edit > Surface Edges > (Un)Suppress
from the menu bar.
2. Select the five lines illustrated in the following image.
Altair Engineering

68
Surface edges to suppress by toggling
3. Click suppress. HyperMesh suppresses each line, which in indicated by a blue, dashed line.
Step 9: Remesh the part.

In this step, you will remesh the surfaces of the part, using the automatic mode, a size of 2.5, and
the mixed mesh type.
next to Middle Surface to display it's elements.
F12.
3. Verify that elem size = is set to 2.5 and the mesh type is set to mixed.
4. To select all of the displayed surfaces, click surfs >> displayed.
5. Click mesh.
Step 10: Review the mesh quality.

1. Take a minute to rotate, zoom, and pan the model to review the mesh that was created. The mesh
consists completely of rows and columns of quads.
5. To evaluate the minimum length, click length. HyperMesh highlights only two elements that failed
the check. Both of these elements failed the check because of the shape of the part. These
elements are not too small compared to the global element size, therefore you can leave them as
is.
F12.
7. Go to the QI optimize subpanel.
8. Verify that elem size = is set to 2.5 and the mesh type is set to mixed.
69

Altair Engineering
9. Click edit criteria.

10. In the Criteria File Editor dialog, enter 2.500 in the Target element size field.
11. Click Apply.
12. Click OK.
13. To select all of the displayed surfaces, select surfs >> displayed.
14. Click mesh. HyperMesh replaces the old mesh with a new mesh.
15. If there is a message saying, "There is a conflict between the user requested element size and
quality criteria ideal element size," click the Recompute quality criteria button using a size of
2.5.
16. To access the Quality Index panel, click Mesh > Check > Elements > Quality Index from the
menu bar.
17. Go to page 1.
18. Verify that the comp. QI is 0.01. This low value indicates that the mesh is good quality. The higher
the number, the lower the mesh quality.

The part is now meshed and ready to be set up for an analysis. Save the model, if desired.
Altair Engineering

70

Create circle, arc, line, and tangent lines
Duplicate and translate lines
Edit lines by splitting and displaying their IDs
Delete redundant arcs and lines
Duplicate and reflect an arc
Create a surface square and two parallel lines on an X-Y plane
Create a fillet between two lines
Exporting geometry in IGES format
Sometimes CAE users need to create models from sketches where there is no pre-existing geometry.
The tools in this tutorial will help you accomplish that task.
Exercise: Creating and Editing Line Data

In this exercise, you will learn how to create lines and surfaces.
Step 1: Create a component collector to geometry.

1. To create a component, right-click in the Model browser and select Create > Component from
the context menu, or click Collectors > Create > Components from the menu bar.
2. In the Create Component dialog, enter geometry in the Name field.
3. Click the Color swatch and select yellow from the box of colors.
4. Click Create.
Step 2: Create nodes.

1. On the standard toolbar, click
2. To open the Create Nodes panel in the XYZ subpanel, click Geometry > Create > Nodes > XYZ
from the menu bar.5
3. Enter the following X, Y, and Z coordinates listed in the table below to create five nodes. Click
create for each of the nodes.
Node
25
37
25
-2
4. Click return.
5. To fit the size of the model to the graphics area, press f.
71

Altair Engineering
Step 3: Display the node IDs.

1. To open the Numbers panel, click
on the Display toolbar.
2. Verify that the entity selector is set to nodes.

3. To select all of the nodes in the model, click nodes >> all.
4. Select the display check box.
5. Click on. HyperMesh displays the node IDs.
6. Click return.
Step 4: Create a circle.

1. To open the Circle Center and Radius panel, click Geometry > Create > Lines > Circle Center
and Radius from the menu bar.
2. Verify that the node list selector is active.
3. Select Node 2. This will be the location of the circles center.
4. Set the orientation vector to x-axis.
5. In the radius field, enter 5.
6. Click create. HyperMesh creates the circles's center.
Altair Engineering

72
Step 5: Create an arc.

1. To open the Arc Center and Radius subpanel, click
2. Verify that the node list entity selector is active.

3. Select node 2. This node will be the center of the arc as well as the base for the axis of rotation.
4. Verify that the orientation vector is set to x-axis.
5. In the Radius field, enter 2.5.
6. In the Offset field, enter 90.
7. In the Angle field, enter 180.
8. Click create. HyperMesh creates an arc.
9. On the Standard toolbar, click
Step 6: Create a line.

1. To open the Linear Nodes subpanel, click
2. Select Node 4 and Node 5.

3. Click create. HyperMesh creates a line between nodes 4 and 5.
4. Click return.
73

Altair Engineering
Step 7: Duplicate and translate lines.

1. To open the Translate panel, click Geometry > Translate > Lines from the menu bar.
2. Verify that the entity selector is set to lines.
3. Select the line that was created between nodes 4 and 5.
4. Click lines >> duplicate >> current comp. Hypermesh copies the new line into the current
component, Geometry.
5. Set the orientation vector to y-axis.
6. In the magnitude = field, enter 10.0.
7. Click translate-.
8. Click return.
Step 8: Edit lines by splitting at a line.

1. To open the Line Edit panel, click Geometry > Edit > Lines > Split at Line from the menu bar.
2. Verify that the lines selector is active.
3. Select the top, right curved line of the circle indicated in the following image.
Altair Engineering

74
4. Click cut line.

5. Select the line between nodes 4 and 5.
6. Click split. The circle has one quarter of it's radius split off from the rest.
7. Repeat steps 8.2 through 8.6 to select the top, left curved line of the circle and the other line that
was translated in step 7.
8. Click return.
Step 9: Display the line IDs.

1. Go to the Numbers panel.
3. Click lines >> all. HyperMesh selects all of the lines in the model.
4. Verify that the display check box is selected.
5. To display all of the line IDs, click on.
6. Click return.
Step 10: Delete a redundant arc.

1. To open the Delete panel, click
on the Collectors toolbar, or press F2.

3. Select the bottom right curved line of the circle indicated in the following image.
4. Click delete entity. HyperMesh deletes the redundant arc.

5. Select the bottom left curve and then click delete entity.
6. Click return.
Step 11: Duplicate and reflect an arc.

1. To open the Reflect panel, click Geometry > Reflect > Lines from the menu bar.
3. Select the arc (line ID 2).
75

Altair Engineering
4. Set the orientation vector to z-axis.

5. Select Node 2 as the base node.
6. Click lines >> duplicate >> original comp to copy the new line into the current component,
Geometry.
7. Click reflect. HyperMesh creates the lower arc.
8. Click return.
Step 12: Create two tangent lines.

1. To go to the Tangents panel, click Geometry > Create > Lines > Tangent from the menu bar.
2. Set the entity selector to node list.
3. Select Node 3.
4. Activate the line selector.
5. Select the semi-circular line (line ID 5).
Note: Your line IDs may be different, depending on whether you needed to perform the
split/delete/duplicate tasks more than once.
6. Click create. HyperMesh creates two tangent lines.
7. Select one of the tangent lines.
8. Repeat steps 12.3 through 12.7.
9. Select the other tangent line.
Altair Engineering

76
Step 13: Redisplay the line IDs.

1. Go to the Numbers panel.
3. Click lines >> all.
4. Verify that the display check box is selected.
5. Click on. HyperMesh displays all of the line IDs.
Step 14: Split curves by tangent line and delete redundant line.
1. Go to the Split at Line subpanel.
3. Select the semi-circular line (ID 5).
Note: The line IDs may be different.
4. Click cut line.
5. Select the left tangent line (ID 9).
6. Click split. HyperMesh splits the semi-circular line (ID 5) with the selected tangent line (ID 9).
7. Repeat steps 14.2 through 14.6 to cut the semi-circular line (ID 5) with the right tangent line (ID
8).
8. Go to the Delete panel.
9. Verify that entity selector is active and set to lines.
10. Select the semi-circular line between the two tangent lines indicated in the following image.
77

Altair Engineering
11. Click delete entity. HyperMesh deletes the semi-circular line.

12. To exit the panels, click return twice.
Step 15: Create a component collector for surfaces.

2. In the Create component dialog, enter surfaces in the Name field.
3. Click the Color icon, and select purple.
4. Click Create.
Altair Engineering

78
Step 16: Create a surface square on an X-Y plane.

1. From the main menu, go to the 2D page and select Planes.
2. Go to the Square subpanel.
4. Select Node 1 as the base reference node.
5. Switch mesh, keep surf to surface only.
6. In the size= field, enter 30.
7. Click create. HyperMesh creates a square surface.
Step 17: Create a line that connects two parallel lines on an X-Y plane.
1. To open the Intersect panel, click Geometry > Create > Lines > Intersect.
2. To create a line on the X-Y plane, set the orientation vector to z-axis.
4. Activate the line list selector.
5. Select the two straight lines that are perpendicular to the X-Y plane indicated in the following
image. HyperMesh displays a bold, white line in the graphics area to represent the results.
79

Altair Engineering
6. Click create. HyperMesh creates the line.

Step 18: Switch the current working component surfaces to geometry.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on geometry and select Make Current from
the context menu.
Note: From this point on, when you create any new elements or geometry, HyperMesh will place
them in the geometry component collector.
Step 19: Extend a line to a surface edge.

2. To open the Extend panel, click Geometry > Edit > Lines > Extend from the menu bar.
3. Toggle from distance = to to:.
4. Set the entity selector to line.
Altair Engineering

80
5. Activate the top line selector.

6. Select the line that you created in step 17 (the line that passes through Node 1) as the line to be
extended. HyperMesh places a red V at the beginning of the line to be extended.
7. Activate the lower line selector.
8. Select the lower-right edge of the purple plane indicated in the following image.
9. Click extend-. HyperMesh extends the line to reach one surface edge.
10. To exit the panel, click return. Your model should resemble the following image.
Step 20: Create a fillet between two lines.

1. To open the Fillet subpanel, click Geometry > Create > Lines > Fillet from the menu bar.
2. Select the Trim original lines check box.
3. In the Radius= field, enter 5.
4. Activate the 1st line selector.
81

Altair Engineering
5. Select the vertical line through which the extended line passes indicated in the following image.
6. Activate the 2nd line selector.

7. Select the extended line that you created in step 19. The status bar reads, "Please select fillet
quadrant", which indicates that HyperMesh wants you to select a reference location for the fillet.
8. Select the top, right X for the fillet quadrant indicated in the following image. HyperMesh creates a
fillet.
9. To return to the Lines panel, click return.
Altair Engineering

82
Step 21: Trim a line by plane and delete a redundant line segment.
1. To open the Split at Plane panel, click Geometry > Edit > Lines > Split at Plane from the
menu bar.
3. Select the vertical line that does not have a fillet indicated in the following image.

6. Click split. HyperMesh splits the line by the X-Y plane.
83

Altair Engineering
7. Go to the Delete panel.

9. Select the small line segment under the X-Y plane.
10. Click delete entity. HyperMesh removes the line segment.

11. To exit the panels, click return twice.
Step 22: Remove all temp nodes.

1. To go to the Temp Nodes panel, click Mesh > Delete > Nodes from the menu bar, or press Shift
+ F2.
2. Click clear all. HyperMesh removes all of the temp nodes.
Step 23: Change the rendering mode.

plane (purple) becomes shaded instead of wire frame.
on the Visualization toolbar. The
Step 24: Export all geometry as an IGES file.

Altair Engineering

84
1. To open the Export Geometry tab, click File > Export > Geometry from the menu bar.
2. From the File type list, select Iges.
3. From the File field, navigate to the location of your working directory and save the file.
4. From the Units field, select an export unit system.
5. Click Export. HyperMesh generates the IGES file.
Note: This file can be shared with other CAD packages such as UG, Catia, and ProE.
85

Altair Engineering

Generate surfaces from existing elements
Plot elements
Control what surfaces are created
The surfaces created in this process are regular surfaces that can be used for geometry editing (for
changes to a design) and meshing, and to export geometry information (in reverse engineering
applications, for example). This is particularly useful if you are trying to obtain geometry information
(surfaces) from a model containing elements only.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, fe_to_surf.hm. The model is the tetrahedral mesh of a bracket. It is
organized into a single component, and does not contain any entities besides the solid elements.
Step 1: Open the model fe_to_surf.hm.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the fe_to_surf.hm model file.
4. Review the shape of the bracket.
Note: This solid mesh was obtained by running the HyperMesh tetramesher on a tria mesh of the
surfaces defining the initial part.
In this tutorial, you will reverse this process by obtaining the shell elements and then the surfaces. You
can then, for example, remesh the surfaces with a different element size, or export them as an IGES
file.
Altair Engineering

86
Step 2: Use the faces panel to generate shell elements on the outside of the
solid mesh
1. To open the Faces panel, select faces from the Tool page.
2. Verify that the entity selector is set to comps.
3. Select any element. HyperMesh temporarily highlights the element, which signifies that the
component has been selected.
4. You do not have to change the tolerance field, as it does not influence the creation of face
elements.
5. Click find faces. HyperMesh creates shell elements on the free faces of the solid elements (faces
that are not shared with any other element), and places them into the ^faces component collector.
6. In the Model browser, turn off the element display of the tetras component.
Faces (shell) elements
Step 3: Obtain surfaces from elements.

In this step, you will use the Surfaces panel and the From FE subpanel on the tria (faces) elements to
obtain surfaces and understand the behavior of the panel.
1. To open the From FE subpanel, click Geometry > Create > Surfaces > From FE from the menu
bar.
2. To select all of the displayed elements, click elems >> displayed.
3. Use the toggles to select Auto Detect Features and Mesh Based Auto Tol.
Note: Auto Detect Features automatically creates 1D plot elements at feature lines. Features are
created where the normals of adjacent elements vary more than the feature angle
specified in the Options panel. Once the feature lines are created, it also combines openended features to form closed loops. These features are used as delineations for the new
surfaces being created.
Mesh-Based Auto Tol determines the tolerance as a factor of the average element size.
The new surfaces created are allowed to deviate from the existing mesh no more than the
specified/calculated tolerance value.
4. Set the Surface Complexity to 5 using the slider bar.
5. Click create. It may take HyperMesh up to 40 seconds to create surfaces.
6. In the Model browser, turn off the display of all the elements to review the surfaces that were
created.
87

Altair Engineering
7. Click return.
9. Review the surface by rotating and zooming in and out of the model. The delineation of the
surfaces may or may not correspond to what you may expect or wish to obtain. For example, you
may want to have three separate surfaces in some areas of the model and fewer surfaces in other
areas.
10. To go to the Delete panel, press F2.
11. Verify that the entity selector is to set surfs.
12. Click surfs >> all.
13. Click delete entity.
14. In the Model browser, turn on the element display of the ^faces component.
15. Click return.
In this step, you have learned how to use the FE surf panel to generate some surfaces that can later
be meshed. You have also seen that when the surface generation engine (From FE tool) is asked to
create surface delineation automatically, the surfaces obtained may not necessarily have the specific
delineation you wish to obtain. In order to obtain specific delineation, plot elements can be used to
define the boundaries of the various surfaces, and can be supplied to the engine (From FE tool).
Step 4: Capture features with plot elements.

Delineating the surfaces to be created is an essential step in obtaining the desired surfaces. This level
of control is achieved by supplying the surface generator with some plot elements, which will indicate
what the boundaries of the various surfaces should be. This function works well only when the selected
plot elements form closed loops.
The new surfaces should have boundaries that respect the features of the tria mesh. The tria mesh
captures, to some extent, the features of the initial geometry.
Generate plot elements that correspond to the features of the mesh. You can use the edges,
features, and edit element panels to create plot elements. Using the Features panel is one of the
most automated ways of generating plot elements, although it does not always create the features as
desired. Some manual methods will be used to modify the results of automatic feature creation.
In this step, you will use the features panel to automatically generate plot elements capturing the
features of the tria mesh (^faces component). Use a break angle of 30 degrees.
1. To open the Features panel, click features from Tool page.
3. Click elems >> displayed.
4. In the feature angle= field, enter 30.
5. Change the analysis option from simple to advanced.
Note: This option performs further analysis on the features created based on the angle and
combines and extends them to create closed loops.
6. Click features. HyperMesh generates plot elements representing the features of the mesh. These
plots elements are automatically created in a component collector named ^feature.
7. Zoom into the areas indicated in the following image to see how many plot elements were created
to define the boundary area.
Note: In the following steps you will remove the unnecessary plot elements.
Altair Engineering

88
Plot elements representing features
8. Go to the edit subpanel.

9. Activate the element features to remove: elem selector.
10. Select one of the plot elements indicated in the following image. HyperMesh selects the entire row
of elements to the next intersection as you select the plot elements.
11. Click remove.
Features to be removed
12. Repeat steps 4.10 and 4.11 to remove the remaining plot elements.
Step 5: Add a new delineation feature

1. Activate the nodes to add features: node list selector.
2. Click nodelist >> by path.
3. Select the nodes indicated in following image. HyperMesh selects all of the nodes in the path
between these two nodes.
4. Click add. HyperMesh creates a new feature line.
89

Altair Engineering
Nodes to create a new feature
5. Rotate, zoom, and pan the model to locate the features created with a zigzag pattern, as indicated
in the following image.
Note: In the following steps, you will delete these features and create new smooth ones.
6. Activate the element features to remove: elem selector.

7. Select one of the plot elements as indicated in the following image. HyperMesh selects the entire
row of elements to the next intersection as you select plot elements.
8. Click remove.
Plot elements to be removed
Altair Engineering

90
9. Repeat steps 5.7 and 5.8 to remove the remaining plot features.
10. Activate the nodes to add features: node path selector.
11. Select the nodes indicated in following image. HyperMesh selects all of the nodes in the path
between these two nodes.
12. Click add. HyperMesh creates a new feature line.
New features added
13. Repeat steps 5.11 and 5.12 to select the nodes indicated in the previous image, and create a new
feature line.
14. Repeat the previous cleanup operations to create features to your needs. The following image
shows an example of the final features. Notice that many of the features in the cylindrical holes
have been removed.
Model with corrected features
You created plot elements that will be used in the surfaces panel to indicate the boundaries of the
surfaces to generate. These plot elements were generated in an attempt to capture the features of
the tria mesh. The number and location of plot elements generated using this approach is directly
dependent on the value that is chosen for the feature angle. In most situations, a lower feature
angle will generate more plot elements while a higher one will yield fewer plot elements.
It is often useful to experiment with different values for the feature angle as one value may bring
you much closer to the desired set of plot elements than another, significantly limiting the amount
of subsequent editing required.
In this section, you learned how to create and edit plot elements using the features panel. The
creation process was straightforward, but required some editing in order to obtain a set of plot
91

Altair Engineering
elements forming closed loops only. Various tools are available to make the editing process as easy
as possible and you used the ones that would allow you to get to your goal the most effectively.
Now that both the shell elements and the plot elements delineating the surfaces are available, you
will generate surfaces on the entire model.
Step 6: Generate surfaces using the Surfaces panel's from FE subpanel

1. Open the From FE subpanel.
3. Select the ^faces check box.
4. Click select.
5. Use the first toggle to select the feature edges selector.
6. Click feature edges >> by collector.
7. Select the ^feature check box.
8. Click select.
9. Leave all other options unchanged.
10. Click create.
11. In the Model browser, turn off the display of all the elements to review the surfaces that were
generated.
12. Click return.
Surfaces generated
The surfaces generated could now be exported or used for any surface editing or meshing operation.
This concludes this tutorial. You may discard this model or save it to your working directory for your
own reference. As this tutorial showed, this is a powerful tool in generating surface data where none is
available, but needed. It also provides you with a great deal of control over the surfaces that are
generated through the use of plot elements. Automated and semi-automated ways let you create and
edit plot elements quickly and easily.
Altair Engineering

92

In this tutorial, you will learn what solid geometry and topology is, and what 3D topology looks like.
Solids are geometric entities that define a three-dimensional volume. Geometric entities are defined as
follows:
Point: 0 dimensional; has only x, y, and z coordinates
Line: one-dimensional; has length, can be curved through three-dimensional space
Surface: two-dimensional; has an area
Solid: three-dimensional; has a volume
The use of solid geometry is helpful when dividing a part into multiple volumes, for example, to divide
a part into simple, mappable regions for hex meshing.
Exercise: Creating and editing solid geometry

This exercise uses the model file, solid_geom.hm.
Step 1: Retrieve model file, solid_geom.hm.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the solid_geom.hm model file.
Step 2: Create solid geometry from the bounding surfaces.

1. To open the Bounding Surfaces, click Geometry > Create > Solids > Bounding Surfaces from
the menu bar.
2. Verify that the Auto select solid surfaces check box is selected.
3. Select one surface on the part. HyperMesh automatically selects all of the surfaces.
4. Click create. HyperMesh creates the solid, and the status bar displays message that says one
solid has been created.
Note: The solids are identified by thicker lines than surfaces.
93

Altair Engineering
Step 3: Create a solid geometry cylinder using primitives.

1. To open the Cylinder Full panel, click Geometry > Create > Solids > Cylinder Full from the
menu bar.
2. Click bottom center and then select one of the temporary nodes as illustrated in the following
image. The cursor advances to the normal vector selector.
3. Select the remaining temporary node shown in the previous image.

4. In the Base radius=, enter 1.5.
5. In the Height= field, enter 25.
6. Click create. HyperMesh creates solid cylinder in the middle of the first solid that was created.
Step 4: Subtract the cylinders volume from the rest of the part.
1. To open the Boolean subpanel, click Geometry > Edit > Solids > Boolean from the menu bar.
2. Verify that operation type: is set to simple (combine all).
3. Set operation: to A-B (remove B from A).
4. Verify that the A: solids selector is active, and then select the original solid.
5. Activate the B: solids selector, and then select the solid cylinder created in step 3.
6. Click calculate.
7. Click return.
8. To confirm the material has been removed, click
model to inspect the part.
Altair Engineering
on the Visualization toolbar and rotate the

94
Step 5: Split the solid geometry using bounding lines.

1. To go to the trim with lines subpanel, click Geometry > Edit > Solids > Trim with Lines
subpanel.
2. Activate the with bounding lines selector and set it to solids.
3. Click anywhere on the model to select it.
4. Under the with bounding lines selector, activate the lines selector.
5. Select the four lines indicated in the following image.
6. Click trim. HyperMesh trims a plane.

Note: The two solids now intersect.
95

Altair Engineering
Step 6: Split the solid geometry using a cut line.

In this step, you should still be in the Solid Edit panel, trim with lines subpanel.
1. Activate the with cut lines selector and set it to solids.
2. Select the small, tetrahedral shaped solid created in step 5.
4. Click drag a cut line.
5. To define the end points of a line that roughly divides the tetrahedral solid in half, select the two
locations indicated in the following image.
6. To split the solid, middle-mouse click.
Altair Engineering

96
7. Select the half of the original tetrahedral solid indicated in the following image.
8. To split the solid indicated in the following image, repeat steps 6.4 through 6.6.
9. Select the solid indicated in the following image.
97

Altair Engineering
11. To split the solid indicated in the following image, repeat steps 6.4 through 6.6.
Step 7: Merge solids together.

In this step, you should still be in the Solid Edit panel.
1. Go to the merge subpanel.
2. Activate the to be merged: solids selector.
3. Select the three solids indicated in the following image.
4. Click merge. HyperMesh merges the solids.

Note: The resulting solids in the tetrahedral area should resemble the following image. There
should be two solid entities, with one of them being hexahedral in shape in the corner.
Altair Engineering

98
Step 8: Split the solid geometry with a user-defined plane.

1. Go to the trim with plane/surf subpanel.
2. From the Model browser, View folder, right-click on View3 and select Show from the context
menu.
3. Activate the with plane selector and set to solids.
4. Select the large solid representing the majority of the part.
5. Set the orientation vector to N1, N2, N3.

6. With N1 active, press and hold your left mouse button, and move the mouse cursor over one of the
edges indicated in the following image. HyperMesh highlights the edge.
7. Release the mouse button, and left-click in the middle of the edge. A green temp node appears at
the location to indicate the selection for N1.
Note: The plane selector advances to the N2 selection.
8. In the same manner, highlight the other line shown in the previous image.
9. Release the mouse button, and select two nodes along its length.
Note: Your selection should look similar to the following image.
10. Click trim. HyperMesh trims the solid.

99

Altair Engineering
Step 9: Split the solid geometry with a swept line.

1. Go to the trim with lines subpanel.
2. Activate the with sweep lines selector and set it to solids.
3. Select the solid with the cylinder removed.
4. Activate the lines selector.

5. Select the edges indicated in the following image.
6. Under sweep to:, set the orientation vector to x-axis.

7. Under the orientation vector, verify that sweep all is selected.
Altair Engineering

100
Step 10: Split the solid geometry with a principal plane.

1. Go to the trim with plane/surf subpanel.
2. Activate the with plane selector and set it to solids.
5. Press and hold your left mouse button, and move the mouse cursor over the edge indicated in the
following image. HyperMesh highlights the edge.
6. Release the mouse button, and left-click anywhere along the edge. A purple temp node appears at
the location to indicate the selection for the base node.
101

Altair Engineering
Step 11: Split the solid geometry by creating surfaces inside the solids.
1. To open the Spline/Filler subpanel, click Geometry > Create > Surfaces > Spline/Filler from
the menu bar.
2. Clear the Auto create (free edges only) and keep tangency check boxes.
3. Select the five lines indicated in the following image.
4. Click create. HyperMesh creates a surface.

6. To go to the Trim with Plane/Surface subpanel, click Geometry > Edit > Solids > Trim with
Plane/Surfaces from the menu bar.
7. Activate the with surfs selector and set to solids.
9. Activate the surfs selector.
10. Select the surface that you created in step 11.4.
11. Click trim.
13. Go to the Spline/Filler subpanel.
15. Select the four lines indicated in the following image.
16. Click create. HyperMesh creates a surface.

Altair Engineering

102
18. Go to the Trim with Plane/Surface subpanel.

19. Activate the with surfs selector and set it to solids.
20. Select the solid you created a surface for in step 11.16.
21. Activate the surfs selector.
22. Select the surface that you created in step 11.16.
23. Clear the extend trimmer check box.
24. Click trim.
Step 12: Suppress extraneous edges on the part.

1. To open the (Un)Suppress subpanel, click Geometry > Edit > Surface Edge > (Un)Suppress
from the menu bar.
2. Click lines >> by geoms.
3. Verify that the solids selector is active.
4. Select the three solids indicated in the following image.
Tip:
To view a more efficient graphical representation of the solids, set the surface display mode
to
5. Click add to selection.

6. In the breakangle = field, enter 45.
7. Click suppress. HyperMesh suppresses the edges.
103

Altair Engineering
This tutorial will explore the geometry and mesh editing functions available in the Quick Edit panel.
The Quick Edit panel provides easy access to a number of geometry editing mesh editing tools. More
than a dozen functions are presented in this single panel. Many of the functions can be found in other
HyperMesh panels. These tools may be used before creating the surface mesh to simplify geometry,
correct geometry errors, or add additional geometric features to control the mesh generation.
Additionally, if a mesh already exists on the geometry, you have the option of automatically remeshing
the geometry as you modify it.
This tutorial uses the model called base_bracket.hm.
Exercise
Step 1: Retrieve model file, base_bracket.hm.
3. In the Open Model dialog, open the base_bracket.hm model file.
Step 2: Create a baseline mesh.

1. To open the Automesh panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D Automesh from the menu bar, or press
F12.
2. Verify that you are in the size and bias subpanel.
3. In the element size = field, enter 0.1.
4. Set the mesh type: to mixed.
5. Verify that first toggle is set to elements to surf comp.
6. Verify that entity selector is set to surfs.
7. Click surfs >> displayed. HyperMesh selects all of the displayed surfaces.
8. Click mesh.
In the next step, you will start refining the geometry and improving the mesh quality. HyperMesh has
the ability to automatically remesh a surface if any topology changes are made to the geometry. This
Altair Engineering

104
function is controlled by a setting in the Preferences > Meshing Options panel under topology
revision. The default option is to remesh the surface; however, you can opt to keep or delete the
mesh instead.
For the base component, your focus will be to improve the mesh quality around the large holes in the
side surface and the mounting holes on the flanges. You will remove the oblong holes, and improve the
mesh quality around the five small holes on the top surface by trimming in a "washer" surface around
the holes.
Step 3: Simplify the geometry by removing unnecessary holes.

1. To open the Quick Edit panel, click Mesh > Quick Edit from the menu bar, or press F11.
2. Activate the unsplit surf: line(s) selector.
3. Select the six oblong holes under the large circular holes. HyperMesh removes them and regenerates the mesh.
Step 4: Modify geometry around remaining small holes.

1. Adjust your view to zoom in to the notched area of the top surface indicated in the following image.
2. Activate the split surf-line: node selector and select the node indicated in the following image.
3. With the split surf-line: line selector now active, select the line indicated in the following image.
HyperMesh trims the surface.
4. Repeat steps 4.2 through 4.3 to create four more trim lines in the locations indicated in the
following image. At the end, each of the four small holes is isolated in its own rectangular surface
patch.
105
Altair Engineering
Surface trim lines isolating small holes onto individual surfaces. Note that element display has been turned off for clarity.
Step 5: Trim a washer layer into the surface around each of the four holes.
1. In the offset value field, enter 0.05.
2. Activate the washer split: line(s) selector.
3. Select the free surface edges (red edges) around the four small holes. HyperMesh creates a washer
around each hole.
4. Activate the adjust/set density left line(s) selector.

5. Left-click, twice, on one of the hole's inner surface edges indicated in the following image.
HyperMesh adjusts the element density from 2 to 4.
Tip:
Left-click a surface edge to increase the element density by one, or right-click to

decrease the element' density by one.
Altair Engineering

106
6. Activate the adjust/set density right line(s) selector.

7. Left-click on the inner surface edge that you just adjusted. HyperMesh sets the target density.
8. Right-click on the hole's other inner surface edge, indicated in the following image, to apply the
target density. HyperMesh adjusts the element density from 2 to 4.
9. Repeat steps 5.4 through 5.8 to set a target density and apply it to the remaining inner surface
edge's of the other three holes. All of the hole's should have a total inner element density of 8, with
each inner surface edge having an element density of 4.
11. Left-click on one of the hole's outer surface edges indicated in the following image. HyperMesh
adjusts the element density from 3 to 4.
107

Altair Engineering

13. Left-click on the outer surface edge that you just adjusted. HyperMesh sets the target density.
14. Right-click on the hole's other outer surface edge, indicated in the following image, to apply the
target density. HyperMesh adjusts the element density from 3 to 4.
15. Repeat steps 5.10 through 5.14 to set a target density and apply it to the remaining outer surface
edge's of the other three holes. All of the hole's should have a total outer element density of 8, with
each outer surface edge having an element density of 4.
Note: You may not have to adjust the density for every hole's outer surface edge, as some may
already have an element density of 4.
17. Left-click on one of the hole's surface trim lines as indicated in the following image. HyperMesh
adjusts the trim line's element density from 3 to 4.
Altair Engineering

108

19. Left-click on the surface trim line that you just adjusted. HyperMesh sets the target density.
20. Right-click on the surface trim line, indicated in the following image, to apply the target density.
HyperMesh adjusts the trim line's element density from 3 to 4.
Note: You do not have to adjust the element density for the other trim lines that surround the
hole, as they already have an element density of 4.
21. Repeat steps 5.16 through 5.20 to set a target density and apply it to the remaining surface trim
lines that surround the other three holes. Each trim line should an element density of 4.
Step 6: Adjust the mesh around the large holes on the side surfaces.
In this step, you should still be in the Quick Edit panel.
1. Adjust your view to zoom into the three large holes on one side of the model.
2. Use the split-line function that you learned in step 4, to trim 12 surfaces patches around the large
holes as indicated in the following image.
109

Altair Engineering
Note that element display has been turned off for clarity.
Step 7: Remesh the newly trimmed surfaces.

In this step, you will use the trim surfaces that you just created around the larges holes to apply a
mapped meshing algorithm to. The mapped meshing algorithms applies a mesh pattern template to a
surface, and then maps that pattern to the specific surface size and shape. In order for this method to
be applied, a certain criteria must be met, including element type (quads only mesh), surface shape
(three, four, or five edges), and specific mesh density settings. In step 5, you trimmed the surfaces
around the large holes into faces that can be meshed with the map as pentagon algorithm, provided
the mesh type and density settings are correct.
1. To open the Automesh panel, press F12.
2. Verify that the entity selector is set to surfs.
3. Select the 12 surface patches around the three holes that you just created.
4. Verify that you are in the size and bias subpanel.
5. Verify that the meshing mode is set to interactive.
6. Set the mesh type: to quads.
7. Click mesh. The interactive meshing module opens.
8. In the density subpanel, verify that the selector is active.
9. Adjust the density on the six edges across the center of the holes from 1 to 2.
10. Go to the mesh style subpanel.

Altair Engineering

110
11. Set the mesh method to map as pentagon, and then click set all.
12. Click mesh. HyperMesh regenerates the mesh.
13. To accept the mesh and go back to the Automesh panel, click return.
This completes this tutorial. For more practice using these methods, use the other components in the
model.
111

Altair Engineering
HM-2080: Modifying Models using solidThinking Inspire

Open geometry in HyperMesh Desktop
Export your geometry
Import geometry in solidThinking Inspire
Modify geometry inside solidThinking Inspire
Export modified geometry
Import geometry back into HyperMesh Desktop
The benefit of using solidThinking is that you can apply quick geometry fixes without going back to the
CAD software.
Exercise: Modify model using solidThinking

This exercise uses the model file, rail_extrusion.hm.
Step 1: Open and view the model file, rail_extrusion.hm.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the rail_extrusion.hm model file.
Step 2: Export model file.

1. From the menu bar, click File > Export > Geometry.
2. From the File type list, select STEP.
3. In the File field, navigate to your working directory and save the file as rail_extrusion.step.
4. Click Export.
5. Close HyperMesh.
Step 3: Open and view the model file in solidThinking Inspire.

1. Launch solidThinking Inspire.
2. From the menu bar, click File > Open.
3. In the Open File dialog, navigate to your working directory and open the rail_extrusion.step
file.
Step 4: Edit the Geometry

1. Select the Push/Pull tool.
Altair Engineering

112
2. To reduce the length of the model, click on one end of the rail and push.
3. To increase the height of the model, click on the bottom of the rail and pull it.
4. Your modified geometry might look something like the example below. It is now ready to be
transferred into HyperMesh Desktop.
Step 5: Export geometry from solidThinking Inspire.

1. From the menu bar, click File > Save As.
2. From the Save as type list, select STEP (*.stp).
3. From the File name field, navigate to your working directing and save the file.
4. Exit solidThinking Inspire.
Step 6: Import geometry in HyperMesh Desktop.

1. Open HyperMesh.
2. From the menu bar, click File > Import > Geometry.
3. From the Import tab, click
113

Altair Engineering
4. In the Select Auto Detect file dialog, navigate to your working directory and open the
rail_extrusion.stp file.
5. Click Import. The graphics area displays your modified geometry.
Step 7 (Optional): Save your model as a HyperMesh binary file.

1. From the menu bar, click File > Save As > Model.
2. In the Save Model As dialog, navigate to your working directory and save the file as a HyperMesh
binary file.
Altair Engineering

114
In this tutorial you will learn how to create and edit dimensions on geometry using the Dimensioning
panel. The Dimensioning panel is used to change one or more dimensions of existing geometry, thus
changing the basic shape of solids and other enclosed volumes. With the dimensioning tool, you can
select dimensions of or between surfaces, and modify those dimensions as required with the use of
dimension manipulators.
Exercise
Step 1: Open the model 2_holes.hm.
3. In the Open Model dialog, open the 2_holes.hm model file.
Step 2: Create a dimension for the thickness of the part.

1. To open the Dimensioning panel, click Geometry > Edit > Surfaces > Dimensioning from the
menu bar.
2. Verify that the point1 selector is active.
3. Select point1 indicated in the following image.
Tip:
If there are no visible fixed points on your model, verify that

toolbar.
is selected on the Display
4. With the point2 selector now active, select point 2 indicated in the previous image. HyperMesh
creates a dimension manipulator with a value of 0.375 between the two points, which represents
the thickness of the part.
Step 3: Change the dimension value.

115

Altair Engineering
1. Click the dimension value (0.375) of the dimension manipulator created in the previous step.
2. In the editable field, enter 0.25 and then press ENTER. The part's thickness decreases.
3. Change the dimension value again from 0.25 to 0.5. The part's thickness increases.
Step 4: Modify the dimension manipulator direction.

1. To open the Extract on Lines panel, click Geometry > Create > Nodes > Extract on Line from
the menu bar.
3. Select the line indicated in the following image.
4. In the Number of nodes field, enter 2.

Altair Engineering

116
5. Click create. HyperMesh creates two nodes that will be used to show the starting position of the
thickness during future modifications.

7. Open the Dimensioning panel.
8. Change the dimension value again from 0.5 to 1.0. The part's thickness increases equally about the
midpoint between the original locations.
9. To reject the change, click reject.

10. Select the handle at the bottom of the dimension manipulator as indicated in the following image.
The bottom arrow changes to a line, which indicates that the bottom end will remain fixed.
11. Change the dimension value again from 0.5 to 1.0. The bottom end stays fixed.
117

Altair Engineering

13. Select the handle at the top of the dimension manipulator as indicated in the following image. The
top arrow changes to a line, which indicates that the top end will remain fixed. The bottom end
changes to an arrow, as only one end can remain fixed.
14. Change the dimension value again from 0.5 to 1.0. The top end stays fixed.
Altair Engineering

118
Step 5: Create and modify the diameter dimensions on the holes.

1. Verify that the point1 selector is active.
2. Select point1 indicated in the following image.
3. With the point2 selector now active, select point 2 indicated in the previous image. HyperMesh
creates a dimension manipulator with a value of 0.25 between the two points, which represents the
diameter of the hole.
4. Change the dimension value from 0.875 to .25. The hole's diameter decreases.
5. Change the dimension value again from 0.25 to .5. The hole's diameter increases.
6. Create a dimension manipulator with a dimension value of 0.75 on the other hole as indicated in
the following image.
7. Change the dimension value from 0.75 to 1.0. The hole's diameter increases.
119

Altair Engineering
Step 6: Delete a manipulator.

1. Select the hole with a diameter of 0.75.
2. Clear the value from the dimension manipulator and press Enter. HyperMesh removes the
dimension manipulator from the hole.
Step 7: Mesh the part.

1. To open the 2D AutoMesh panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh from the menu bar, or
press F12.
2. In the element size field, enter 0.1
4. Set the toggle from interactive to automatic.
5. Click mesh. HyperMesh meshes the part.
Altair Engineering

120
Step 8: Modify the dimensions with automatic remeshing enabled.

1. To open the Options panel, press o.
2. Go to the mesh subpanel.
3. From the topology revision list, select advanced remesh.
5. Open the Dimensioning panel.
6. Change the part's thickness value from 0.5 to 1.0. HyperMesh remeshes the part for the dimension
change.
7. Change the hole's diameter value from 0.5 to 0.25. HyperMesh remeshes the part for the change in
the hole's diameter.
121

Altair Engineering
Meshing
1-D Elements
2-D Elements
3-D Elements
Altair Engineering

122
1-D Elements
123

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial, you will learn how to build 1D elements.
Exercise: Creating 1-D Elements

This exercise uses the model file, 1d_elements.hm.
Step 1: Retrieve the model file.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the 1d_elements.hm model file.
Step 2: Create 1-D bar elements.

1. Open the Bars panel by clicking Mesh > Create > 1D Elements > Bars from the menu bar.
2. Go to the bar2 subpanel.
3. In the ax, ay, and az fields, enter 0. These are the values for the bar offset.
4. Click property = and select property1. HyperMesh assigns a property to the element.
5. In the pins a and pins b fields, enter 0. These are the values for the degrees of freedom.
6. Click the orientation switch and select components.
7. In the x comp, y comp, and z comp fields, enter 1. These values define the local y-axis.
Altair Engineering

124
8. Activate the node A selector, and select the lower node indicated in the following image.
9. With the node B selector now active, select the upper node indicated in the previous image.
HyperMesh creates the two-noded bar element.
10. Exit the panel by clicking return.
Step 3: Create 1-D elements along a line.

1. Open the Line Mesh panel by clicking Mesh > Create > Line Mesh from the menu bar.
4. Verify that the toggle is set to segment is whole line.

5. From the element config list, select rigid.
6. Click mesh. The Density panel opens.
125
Altair Engineering
7. Activate the set segment selector.

8. In the elem density = field, enter 20.
9. Click set all. HyperMesh creates rigids on the selected line.
10. Go back to the main menu by clicking return twice.
Step 4: Create 1-D elements from the feature in the model.

1. In the Model browser, turn off the display of all of the geometry in the model.
2. Turn off the display of all of the elements in the model except for the elements in the
feature_elements component.
3. Open the Features panel by clicking Mesh > Check > Components > Features from the menu
bar.
5. Click comps >> feature_elements.
6. Click select.
7. In the feature angle = field, enter 30.
8. Select the ignore normals check box.
9. Verify that the create toggle is set to plot elements.
10. Click features. HyperMesh creates the plot elements as green edge lines.
Altair Engineering

126
2-D Elements
127

Altair Engineering
Learn how to mesh all of the surfaces at once, specifying different element sizes and element
types
Practice changing the element density along surface edges
Practice checking element quality and changing the mesh pattern by changing the mesh
algorithm
Learn how to preview the mesh on all the unmeshed surfaces
Practice changing the element type and node spacing (biasing) along surface edges
Learn how to remesh surfaces
The optimal starting point for creating a shell mesh for a part is to have geometry surfaces defining the
part. The most efficient method for creating a mesh representing the part includes using the
Automesh panel and creating a mesh directly on the parts surfaces.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, channel.hm.
Step 1: Open and view the model file, channel.hm.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the channel.hm model file.
4. Observe the model using the different visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation, zooming,
etc.).
Step 2: Mesh all the parts surfaces at once using an element size of 5 and
the mixed element type (quads and trias).
1. To open the AutoMesh panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh from the menu bar, or press
F12.
Altair Engineering

128

5. In the element size= field, enter 5.
6. Set the mesh type: to mixed.
7. Set the active mesh model to interactive.
8. Set the first toggle to elems to current comp.
9. Click mesh. HyperMesh opens the density subpanel in the meshing module. The model displays
node node seeding and a number on each surface edge.
Note: The number displayed in the graphics area is the number of elements that were created
along the edge.
10. To accept the mesh as the final mesh, click return.
At this point, you could be done using the Mesh panel to mesh the part. The mesh quality is very
good. However, you will remain in the meshing module to perform the next steps, which demonstrate
how to use various subpanels to interactively control the creation of the mesh.
Step 3: Delete the mesh.

1. To open the Delete panel, click
on the Collectors toolbar, or press F2.

3. Click elems >> all.
5. To go back to the AutoMesh panel, click return.
Step 4: Mesh the surface having three fixed points interior to its surface.
In this step, you should be in the AutoMesh panel, size and bias subpanel.
1. Leave all options in the subpanel as they are.
2. Select the surface that has three fixed points interior to its surface indicated in the following image.
3. Click mesh. HyperMesh opens the meshing module.

4. Preview the generated mesh.
Step 5: Fit only the surface being meshed to the graphics area.
1. To fit the surface to the graphics area, click f or click local view >> fill in the density subpanel.
Step 6: From the graphics area, specify a new element density along surface
edges.
129

Altair Engineering
1. From the density subpanel, activate the adjust: edge selector.

2. To change the element density number of the edge indicated in the following image from 24 to 48:
Left-click on the edges element density number to increase it by one, or right-click on the
element's density number to decrease it by one.
or
Click and hold the mouse pointer on the edges element density number and drag your mouse
up to increase the number or down to decrease the number.
3. Click mesh. HyperMesh updates the preview mesh based on the change.
Step 7: From the density subpanel, specify a new element density along
surface edges.
In this step, you should still be in the density subpanel.
1. In the elem density= field, enter 10.
2. Activate the set: edge selector.
3. Select the element density number of the edge indicated in the following image to change its value
to 10.
Altair Engineering

130
5. Click set all to. HyperMesh changes all of the edge's densities to 10.
Step 8: From the density subpanel, specify a new element size to adjust
element densities along surface edges.
1. In this step, you should still be in the density subpanel.
2. In the elem size= field, enter 7.
3. Activate the calculate: edge selector.
4. Select the element density number of the edge indicated in the following image to calculate it based
on an element size of 7. HyperMesh calculates the new number to create elements as close as
possible to 7.
131

Altair Engineering
6. Click recalc all. HyperMesh calculates and changes all of the edge's densities based on an element
size of 7.
Step 9: Change all edge element densities to reflect the initial element size
of 5.
2. Click recalc all.
4. To accept the mesh and go back to the size and bias subpanel, click return.
Step 10: Preview a mesh of the channels rib.

In this step, you should still be in the Mesh panel, size and bias subpanel.
1. With the entity selector active and set to surfs, select the rib surface in the middle of the part as
indicated in the following image.
Altair Engineering

132
2. Leave all options in the menu panel set as they are.

3. Click mesh. HyperMesh opens the meshing module and generates the preview mesh.
4. To fit the rib's surface to the graphics area, click local view >> rear.
Step 11: Check the quality of the ribs preview mesh.

1. Go to the checks subpanel.
2. To identify all of the elements that have an aspect ratio greater than 5, click aspect. None of the
elements fail the check, and the status bar reads, "Maximum aspect ratio found is equal to 1.75".
3. In the jacobian < field, enter 0.8.
4. To identify all of the elements that have a jacobian less than 0.8, click jacobian. HyperMesh
identifies several elements that fail the check and outlines them in red. The status bar reads,
"Minimum jacobian found is equal to 0.75."
5. Verify that none of the elements have a jacobian less than 0.7.
6. Under quads, enter 45 in the min. angle < field.
7. Click min angle. The minimum interior angle found among all of the quad elements is 46.46.
8. Under quads, enter 135 in the max. angle > field.
9. Click max angle. The maximum interior angle found among all of the quad elements is 136.58.
Step 12: Change the ribs mesh pattern by changing the mesh method used
for its surface.
1. Go to the mesh style subpanel. The edge's element density numbers have disappeared, and there
is now a small icon interior to the rib's surface. This icon indicates that HyperMesh is currently using
the free (unmapped) mesh method to mesh the surface.
133

Altair Engineering
2. Under mesh method, use the switch to select map as rectangle.

3. Under mesh method, click set all. The icon changes to reflect the new mesh method.
Step 13: Check the quality of the ribs preview mesh again.
1. Go the checks subpanel.
2. Check for elements having an aspect ratio greater than 5.
Highest value reported is _____.
3. Check for elements having a jacobian less than 0.7.
Lowest value reported is _____. In this case, the free (unmapped) mesh has a better jacobian than
the map as rectangle mesh.
4. Check for quad elements having a min angle less than 45.
Smallest value reported is _____.
5. Check for quad elements having a max angle greater than 135.
Highest value reported is _____.
Step 14: Change the ribs mesh method back to free (unmapped).
2. Under mesh method, use the switch to select free (unmapped).
3. Under mesh method, click set all.
5. To accept the mesh as final and go back to the Mesh panel, click return.
Altair Engineering

134
Step 15: Preview a mesh of all displayed, unmeshed surfaces.

In this step, you should still be in the Mesh panel, size and bias subpanel.
1. On the standard toolbar, click
2. Accept all the default values.

3. Click failed. The status bar reads "There are no surfaces with meshing errors".
Note: This is correct; all of the surfaces you selected to mesh so far have a mesh on them.
4. To identify and select all of the displayed, unmeshed surfaces, click unmeshed.
5. Click mesh. HyperMesh opens the meshing module and generates the preview mesh.
Step 16: Change the element type for some surfaces to trias.
2. Under elem type, click toggle surf. HyperMesh displays
interior to each surface, which
indicates that the mixed element type (quads and trias) is currently being used to mesh the
surface.
3. Under elem type, use the switch to change the mesh type to trias.
4. Under elem type, activate the set surf selector.
5. On the two surfaces indicated in the following image, left-click on
trias ( ).
135

, to set their element type to
Altair Engineering
Preview of mesh with tria element type for two surfaces
Step 17: Adjust the node spacing on surface edge (biasing).

1. Go to the biasing subpanel. The bias intensity number on each surface edge is 0.000, which is the
default number.
2. Leave the bias style set to linear.
Note: This style corresponds to the positive slope of a straight line over the interval [0,1] of the
real line. For a positive bias intensity, smaller elements are at the start of the edge.
3. Verify that the adjust: edge selector is active.
4. To change the biasing intensity number of the edge indicated in the following image from 0.0 to
3.0:
Left-click on the edges biasing intensity number to increase it by 0.1, or right-click on the
edge's biasing intensity number to decrease it by 0.1.
or
Click and hold the mouse pointer on the edges biasing intensity number and drag your mouse
up to increase the number or down to decrease the number.
Altair Engineering

136
6. In the intensity= field, enter 10.

7. Activate the calculate: edge selector.
8. Click the same edges biasing intensity number to change it to 10.
10. Set the bias style to bellcurve. This bias style distributes nodes along the edge in a pattern that
is symmetric across the midpoint of the edge.
Note: For a positive biasing intensity, the smaller elements are at the start and end of the edge.
11. Activate the set: edge selector.
12. On the same edge, click
to change it from the linear bias style to the bellcurve ( ) bias style.
14. To accept the final mesh and go back to the Mesh panel, click return.
Step 18: Remesh the channels bottom two surfaces.

In this step, should still be in the Mesh panel, size and bias subpanel.
1. Switch the mesh mode from interactive to automatic.
Note: This mode is not interactive, therefore it does not take you to the meshing module. Rather,
it meshes surfaces using only the basic parameters of the AutoMesh panel. Use Interactive
mode to remesh the surfaces if you require the different options to control the created mesh.
2. Verify that the entity selector is active and set to surfs.
3. Select the two surfaces indicated in the following image.
137

Altair Engineering
4. In the element size = field, enter 10.

5. Click mesh. HyperMesh deletes the existing mesh on the selected surfaces and creates a new
mesh.
6. Observe the resulting quad mesh on the remeshed surfaces.
Note: Connectivity was maintained with the surrounding, smaller mesh. This is because the break
connectivity option was not used.

Meshing of the channel part is complete. Now is a good time to save the model.
Altair Engineering

138

In this tutorial, you will learn about:
The basic concepts of surfaceless meshing and how to mesh a bracket.
Scale (Uniform scaling)
2D mesh by using spline, line drag, and skin
Ruled mesh
Surfaceless meshing is defined as the creation of mesh using points, lines, and nodes rather than
surfaces. Some parts may have missing surfaces and some parts may not have any surfaces at all and
are instead defined by line data. Either way, a mesh still must be created. HyperMesh has a number of
panels that you can use to create a mesh based on geometry rather than surfaces.
Exercise: Meshing a Bracket

This exercise uses the model file, bracket.hm. The model consists of only line data; no surfaces are
present.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the bracket.hm model file.
etc.).
139

Altair Engineering
Step 2: Create a concentric circle around a hole on the top face using the
scale panel.
There are three circles on the upper region of the bracket, which represent three holes in the bracket.
Two of the holes have concentric circles around them. This configuration allows you to create a radial
mesh pattern around the holes. The following steps will show you how to create a concentric circle
around the third hole.
1. To open the Scale panel, click Geometry > Scale > Lines from the menu bar, or select Scale
from the Tool page.
2. Click uniform and enter 2.0 in the scale= field.
3. To open the Distance panel, press F4.
5. Verify that the N1 node selector is active.
6. Press and hold your left mouse button, move it over the circle representing the hole as indicated in
the following image, and then release it when the cursor changes to a square with a dot in the
center
HyperMesh highlights the circle.
7. Left-click on the highlighted circle. HyperMesh creates a node for N1.

8. Left-click twice more at different locations on the circle to create nodes N2 and N3.
9. Click circle center. Hypermesh creates a node at the circle's center.
Note: This node will be selected as the origin node when the circle is duplicated and scaled.
10. To go back to the Scale panel, click return.

12. Select the circle with the node in its center.
Altair Engineering

140
13. Click lines >> duplicate >> original comp.

14. Activate the origin: node selector.
15. Select the temporary node you created in the circles center.
16. Click scale +. HyperMesh creates a new circle, which is concentric with the original.
Step 3: Create a radial mesh between each of the concentric circles using
the spline panel.
1. To open the Spline panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D Elements > Spline from the menu bar, or
select Spline from the 2D page.
3. Select all six circular lines.
4. Switch from mesh, keep surf to mesh, dele surf.

Note: This option creates surfaces based on the selected entities, uses the surfaces to create a
mesh, and then deletes the surfaces.
5. Clear the keep tangency check box.
6. Click create. The meshing module opens, and element edge density numbers appear on the
selected lines.
Note: The numbers on a pair of concentric circular lines must be identical in order to achieve a
radial mesh.
7. In the density subpanel, enter 8 in the elem density= field.
8. Click set all to. HyperMesh changes all of the circular line's element edge densities to 8.
141

Altair Engineering
10. To accept the mesh and go back to the Spline panel, click return.
Step 4: Mesh the rest of the top face using the spline panel.
1. With the entity type set to lines, select the four lines defining the perimeter of the top face and
the three circular lines defining the outside perimeter of the three radial meshes.
2. Click create. The meshing module opens.
3. To accept the mesh and go back to the main menu, click return twice.
Final mesh on the top face of the bracket
Step 5: Mesh the back face of the bracket using the line drag panel.
1. To open the Line Drag panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D Elements > Line Drag from the menu
bar, or click Line Drag from the 2D page.
2. Go to the drag geoms subpanel.
3. Set the drag selector to line list.
4. Select the line that is on the perimeter of the existing mesh and adjacent to the brackets back face
as indicated in the following image.
5. Activate the along: line list selector.
Altair Engineering

142
6. Select one of the two lines defining the back face that are perpendicular to the selected line to drag
7. Leave the toggle set to use default vector.

8. Leave the creation method set to mesh, w/o surf.
9. Click drag. The meshing module opens.
10. To accept the mesh and return to the main menu, click return twice.
Mesh of top and back faces
Step 6: Mesh the bottom face of the bracket using the ruled panel.
1. To open the Ruled panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D Elements > Ruled from the menu bar, or
select Ruled from the 2D page.
2. Verify that the top entity selector is set to node list.
3. Click node list >> by path. The entity selector changes to node path.
4. Select the end nodes located on the back face edge that borders the bottom face, as indicated in
the following image. HyperMesh selects all of the nodes between the two selected nodes.
5. Click node path >> show node order. HyperMesh highlights and numbers the nodes to show the
order in which they have been selected.
143

Altair Engineering
6. Set the bottom entity selector to line list.

7. Select the line defining the opposite edge of the bottom face as indicated in the following image.
8. Switch the creation method from mesh, keep surf to mesh, w/o surf.
9. Select the auto reverse check box.
Note: When elements are generated, the edges used to create them can be ordered in different
directions. The order of the edges is determined by the order in which the nodes are selected
or the direction of the selected line(s). If the direction is different for each selection, then a
mesh that crosses itself, similar to a bow tie, will be created. To prevent this, the auto
reverse option ensures elements are generated with a similar order on each side of the
mesh.
Mesh of top, back, and bottom faces of bracket
Step 7: Mesh the rib using the skin panel.

1. To open the Skin panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D Elements > Skin from the menu bar, or
select Skin from the 2D page.
2. With the line list selector active, select any two of the three lines defining the rib.
3. Switch the creation method from mesh, keep surf to mesh, dele surf.
4. Leave the toggle set to auto reverse.
Altair Engineering

144
Mesh of rib
145

Altair Engineering

Create a mesh based only on element size
Mesh a set of surfaces using the maximum deviation parameter
Reduce the maximum angle perimeter
Increase the maximum element size parameter
Chordal deviation is a meshing algorithm that allows HyperMesh to automatically vary node densities
and biasing along curved surface edges to gain a more accurate representation of the surface being
meshed.
Exercise: Controlling the 2-D Mesh Concentration in Curved Areas

This exercise uses the model file, chordal_dev.hm.
Step 1: Open the model file, chordal_dev.hm.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the chordal_dev.hm model file.
etc.).
Step 2: Set the mesh parameters and create the mesh.

In this step, you will create a mesh using only element size, not the chordal deviation meshing
parameters.
1. To open the Mesh panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh from the menu bar, or select
automesh from the 2D page.
2. Toggle the mesh mode from interactive to automatic.
4. Set the mesh type to quads.
Altair Engineering
146
5. Set the toggle to elems to surf comp.

6. Select surfs >> by collector >> use size.
7. Click select.
8. Click mesh. HyperMesh creates the mesh.
View of the completed mesh for this step.
Step 3: Set the chordal deviation parameters and create the mesh.
In this step, you will mesh a set of surfaces using the maximum deviation parameter to control the
element densities and biasing.
1. Go to the edge deviation subpanel.
2. In the min elem size = field, enter 1.000.
Tip:
To cycle through the parameter settings, press TAB after typing in a value.
3. In the max elem size = field, enter 15.000.

4. In the max deviation = field, enter 0.500.
5. In the max angle = field, enter 90.000 for the maximum angle parameter to be neglected.
7. Select surfs >> by collector >> deviation ctrl.
8. Click select.
9. Click mesh. HyperMesh create the mesh.
147

Altair Engineering
In this step, you will use the same chordal deviation settings from the previous step, but reduce the
maximum angle parameter to compare the effects.
1. In the max angle = field, enter 20.000.
2. Select surfs >> by collector >> angle ctrl.
3. Click select.
4. Click mesh. HyperMesh creates the mesh on the surfaces.
In this step, you will use the same chordal deviation parameters from the previous step except for the
maximum element size parameter. The maximum element size parameter is increased to allow the
algorithm to create larger and fewer elements along planer and less curved surface edges.
1. In the max elem size = field, enter 30.000.
2. Select surfs >> by collector >> max size ctrl.
3. Click select.
Altair Engineering

148
4. Click mesh. HyperMesh creates the mesh.
View of the completed mesh for this exercise.
149

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial, you will learn how to create and optimize a 2D mesh based on user-defined quality
criteria.
HyperMesh has a set of features designed to help you achieve good element quality more efficiently.
These features use settings from the qualityindex panel to generate or modify a mesh. This allows
HyperMesh to give results that account for your preferences for which element quality checks are more
or less important than others. The quality index (Q.I.) optimization features are found in the
Automesh, Smooth, and Qualityindex panels. You can use these functions separately or in unison.
Exercise 1: Creating and Optimizing a 2D Mesh Based on User-Defined

Quality Criteria
This exercise uses the model file, planar.hm.
Step 1: Open the model file, planar.hm.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the planar.hm model file.
and so on).
Step 2: Working with node and element quality optimization.

Within the qualityindex panel, there are tools you can use to select individual nodes or elements, and
then alter the position or shape of the node/element to optimize the element quality for the
surrounding elements. The element qualities are optimized according to the settings in the
qualityindex panel. These features are very useful for improving element qualities in local areas of
the mesh.
1. Open the qualityindex panel by clicking Mesh > Check > Elements > Quality Index from the
menu bar, or selecting qualityindex from the 2D page.
Altair Engineering

150
2. On the right-hand side of the panel, note the value for comp. Q.I.=. It should read 85.09.
Tip:
Keep this number in mind so that you can judge how much progress you make in improving
the element quality.
3. Click cleanup tools. The QI criteria is replaced by a series of yellow buttons, each representing a
tool for element cleanup.
4. Experiment with the modify hole and washers tool.
Use these options on the hole in the mesh to reposition nodes on the hole's edges, change the
radius of the holes, and link holes with their washers so that the washers rotate or resize along
with changes made to the holes.
radial
Use this option to alter the radius of a hole (and, optionally, the washer).
To alter the radius of the hole, click and drag a node in the graphics
area. The element orientation remains constant, but the hole may
become larger or smaller based on the input. There are additional
controls to enable or disable automatic remeshing when altering the hole
dimensions.
radius: (and edit This field displays the current radius of the hole that the selected node
check box)
belongs to. By default it is a display-only field.
If you do not want to click and drag a node in the graphics area, you can
select the edit check box and specify a desired radius. Once you click a
node in the desired hole, the radius will change to the specified value.
angular
151
Use this option to move the nodes around the edges of the hole without
changing the hole diameter or the spacing between nodes.

Altair Engineering
angle: (and edit

check box)
This field displays the current angle of the hole that the selected node
belongs to, relative to its original (unmodified) starting position. By
default it is a a display-only field.
select the edit check box and specify a desired angle. Once you click a
node in the desired hole, the angle will change to the specified value.
radial & angular
Use this option to simultaneously change the hole's radius and the
orientation of nodes around its edge. Like the angular option, the node
spacing remains proportionally consistent, though actual spacing will be
scaled in accordance with changes in the hole radius.
radial and
angular: (and
edit check
boxes)
These fields display the current angle and radius of the hole that the
selected node belongs to. By default they are both a display-only field.
circumferential
Used primarily on openings like slots, this option rotates the nodes along
the circumference of the slot without altering the hole's size or
shape/orientation. The capability works on enclosed slots or holes, it is
not designed to work on slots with an opening.
Altair Engineering
select both edit check boxes and specify a desired angle and radius.
Once you click a node in the desired hole, the angle and radius will
simultaneously change to the specified values.

152
circumferential
(and edit check
box)
This field displays the current arc length of the hole that the selected
node belongs to. By default it is a display-only field.
link washers
To change the radial or angular position of nodes, as well as drag and

scale the washer nodes along with them, select this check box. In order
for the link washers option to work, you must select the allow to move
fixed and shared nodes check box in page 3 of the quality index
panel.
select the edit check box and specify a desired arc length. Once you click
a node in the desired hole, the arc length will change to the specified
value.
Starting point (no changes Link Washers option

made yet)
turned off.
remesh number
of layers:
Link Washers option

turned on.
To specify the number of washer layers to automatically remesh after

you alter the node position, select this check box.
5. Experiment with the place node tool.
Use the following place node options to reposition some of the nodes in the mesh and change
the shape of the surrounding elements. To reposition a node in the mesh, click and drag it.
The affected elements will change color as you reposition the node to indicate their quality
grade at the node's current position. Observe how the comp. Q.I. changes.
along surface / Use this toggle to determine which direction the node will move. To move
normal to
the node along the plane or curvature of the surface, select along
surface
surface. To move the node directly away from the surface in a normal
direction, select normal to surface.
153

Altair Engineering
Movement along surface; note that the node cannot normally exceed the edge of the mesh.
Movement normal to surface
With the place node tool highlighted, click-and-drag a node in the

graphics area to relocate it. The elements that depend on that node will
dynamically adjust as you drag, resulting in a QI change.
allow
movement out
of boundary
To move the nodes past the edges of a mesh boundary, select this check
box. This option is only available when along surface is selected.
Movement along surface, allowing movement out of boundary.
move
midnodes
Altair Engineering
To move the midnodes associated with the node you are moving, select
this check box. This option is useful when you are working with second
order elements.
154
6. Experiment with the swap edge tool.

Use the Swap Edge tool to consider the elements to which the edge belongs, and find alternative
orientations for it.
Each time you click an edge in the graphics area, it switches to the next valid configuration. If
an edge swap will not improve element quality, a message to that effect displays in the status
bar. To force the swap anyways, click the edge a second time. Additional clicks will cycle
through the possible edge positions. The number of possible edge positions depends on the
types of elements involved.
For a pair of trias, there are two possible positions for their shared edge. For a pair of quads,
there are three possible positions. For a quad and a tria, there are six possible positions.
7. Experiment with the node optimize tool.
Use the Node Optimize tool to automatically move a selected node to optimize the overall
quality of its surrounding elements. The options along surface, normal to surface, and along
and normal to surface work exactly as described for the place node tool. The only difference
is that node optimize moves the node automatically, while place node requires you to choose
the location manually.
To move the midnodes attached to the node you are optimizing, select the with attached
midnodes check box. This option is useful when you are working with second order elements.
Try selecting some of the nodes on the mesh. In particular, select nodes of elements that are
highlighted red, since these have the worst quality. You should see each node move as it is
selected, improving the surrounding mesh quality. Notice what happens to the value of the
comp. Q.I., it should improve as you select more nodes.
8. Experiment with the element optimize tool.
Use the Element Optimize tool to automatically optimize the shape of the selected element and
the elements surrounding it. It is similar to Node Optimize, except that its effects are widerspread.
To move the midnodes attached to the element you are optimizing, select the with attached
midnodes check box. This option is useful when you are working with second order elements.
Try selecting some of the elements on the mesh. In particular, select elements that are
highlighted red, since these have the worst quality. You should usually see the shape of the
element change as it is selected, improving the surrounding mesh quality. Notice what happens
to the value of the comp. Q.I. , it should improve as you select more elements.
Step 3: Resetting the part by remeshing.

In this step, you will use the AutoMesh panel to regenerate the original mesh so you can try to fix the
element quality using a different method.
1. To open the Automesh panel, click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh from the menu bar, or select
Automesh from the 2D page.
3. Verify that the entity selector is active and set to surfs.
155

Altair Engineering

7. Set the meshing mode to automatic.
8. Switch the connectivity option from keep connectivity to previous settings.

Step 4: Using QI optimization smoothing.

The Smooth panel also has quality index optimization features. In this step, you will use these
features to adjust the element quality according to the settings in the qualityindex panel for an entire
group of selected elements. Once you have adjusted the element quality, you will compare the smooth
function to the node and element optimization used in the step 2.
1. To open the Smooth panel, click Mesh > Cleanup Elements > Smooth from the menu bar, or
select smooth from the 2D page.
2. Go to the plates subpanel.
3. Select smooth: elems >> displayed.
4. Switch the mesh algorithm from autodecide to QI optimization.
5. There are several optional controls that are enabled when you select QI optimization, that you
should understand, but are not needed for this tutorial:
Controls
Function
target quality
index=
The target value you would like the quality index to be after the
smoothing operation. This value is not guaranteed from smoothing.
The smooth operation will attempt to hit this target.
time limit
If you are working with large models, select this check box to ensure
the smoothing routine does not take more time than you want to
allow.
feature angle
The Smooth panel evaluates the angle between the normals of two
adjacent elements. If this angle is equal to or greater than the value
specified in this field, HyperMesh will not allow the nodes shared by
the elements to move.
use current criteria

/ criteria file
If use current criteria file is selected, HyperMesh will use the current
criteria file for your Q.I. settings.
If criteria file is selected, you can select and use a different criteria
file for your Q.I. settings. If a criteria file is specified, leave this option
blank.
recursive
optimization
procedure / single
optimization step
Altair Engineering
If recursive optimization procedure is selected, the automesher

takes more than one pass in generating the best quality mesh it can.
This option make take longer than single optimization step.
If single optimization step is selected, the automesher will only take
one pass in generating the best quality mesh it can. It is suggested
156
that you use this option for larger models.

6. Click smooth. The status bar displays a message that says result selection approximate quality
index = 0.11
7. Compare this value to 85.10, which is the quality index value you had after creating the original
mesh. In this case you should see that it is significantly lower, which indicates that the element
quality is much better.
Step 5: Using the QI settings in the Mesh panel.

The AutoMesh panel is capable of using the quality index settings to automatically decide what
pattern of mesh it should generate.
1. Open the AutoMesh panel.
2. Go to the batchmesh/QI optimize subpanel.
3. Set the toggle to QI optimize.
8. The QI optimize subpanel has several controls that you should understand, but are not needed for
this tutorial
Controls
Function
use current criteria If use current criteria file is selected, HyperMesh will
in QI panel
use the current criteria file for your Q.I. settings.
If criteria file is selected, you can select and use a
different criteria file for your Q.I. settings. If a criteria file
is specified, leave this option blank.
Smooth across
common edges
Select this check box if you would like the nodes

generated on a surface edge to be moved off the surface
edge when the algorithm smoothes the mesh.
feature angle
The QI optimize subpanel evaluates the angle between

the normals of two adjacent elements. If this angle is
equal to or greater than the value specified in this field,
HyperMesh will not allow the nodes shared by the
elements to move.
Keep/ Redo /
Break connectivity
Keep Connectivity creates a new mesh with node

seeding at its edges to match any existing adjacent
meshes.
Redo Connectivity redoes existing adjacent meshes at
the same time as it meshes the current selection, to
ensure that each surface's mesh matches up along the
shared edges.
Break connectivity allows the Mesher to mesh without
affecting surrounding mesh.

157

Altair Engineering
11. Use the qualityindex panel to check the quality index of this mesh, and compare it to the previous
mesh.
12. Look at the value for the comp. Q.I.= field. It should be 0.12, which is much lower that the 85.10
value of the mesh you originally generated.
Altair Engineering

158

Define a configuration for the batch mesh
Edit the criteria and parameter files
Setup a simple user procedure for a post-batch mesh run
Batch Mesher is a tool that can perform geometry cleanup and automeshing (in batch mode) for given
CAD files. Batch Mesher performs a variety of geometry cleanup operations to improve the quality of
the mesh created for the selected element size and type. Cleanup operations include: equivalencing of
"red" free edges, fixing small surfaces (relative to the element size), and detecting features.
Batch Mesher also performs specified surface editing/defeaturing operations such as: removal of
pinholes (less than specified size), removal of edge fillets, and addition of a layer of washer elements
around holes.
All user-defined criteria determines the quality index (QI) of a model. The QI value is used to assess
the potential of each geometry cleanup and meshing tool, and apply them accordingly. QI optimized
meshing and node placement optimization are performed to obtain the best quality meshing. Final
results are stored in a HyperMesh database file.
Tools
To start Batch Mesher on Windows:
Click on the Start menu > All Programs > Altair HyperWorks > BatchMesher.
Or
Type hw_batchmesh with the full path (~altairhome\hm\batchmesh\hw_batchmesh).
To start Batch Mesher on UNIX:

Type the hw_batchmesh command to invoke the user interface or hw_batchmesh -nogui to
perform the batch mesh without a user interface.
Exercise
Step 1: Open BatchMesher.
1. Start BatchMesher as described above.
2. In the Input model directory field, click
and navigate to your working directory.
Note: In this exercise, you will use files located in the <installation_directory>\tutorials\hm
directory.
3. In the Output directory, click
Input model directory.
and navigate to the appropriate directory if different from the
4. Optional: Move all of the .hm output files to the corresponding directory of the input model by
selecting the Relocate .hm files to input model directory checkbox.
5. On the right-hand side of BatchMesher, click
159
. The Select Model Files dialog appears.

Altair Engineering
6. From the Type of Geometry list, select the appropriate CAD data type. For this tutorial, use the
geometry already loaded in HyperMesh, therefore select HyperMesh.
Note: A filter will help select applicable HyperMesh models for batch meshing.
7. Select the following model files: part1.hm, part2.hm and bm_housing.hm.
Tip:
Select multiple files by pressing CTRL while selecting files.
8. Click Select.
Step 2: Define a configuration for the batch mesh run.

1. Click the Configurations tab. BatchMesh displays several common configurations already
available.

configurations.
. BatchMesher adds a new entry to the table of
3. Double-click the Mesh Type field, and then enter a name for the mesh type.
4. Double-click the Criteria File field, and then click
Altair Engineering
.
160
5. In the Select Criteria File dialog, select the bm_housing.criteria file.

Note: If necessary, browse to and locate the file in the <installation_directory>\tutorials\hm
directory.
6. Double-click the Parameter File field, and then click
7. In the Select Parameter File field, select the bm_housing.param file.

directory.
8. Click the Run Setup tab.
9. Click the Mesh Type field. The new mesh type you created is now available for selection.
Step 3: On the User Procedures tab, set up a simple script to perform a

tetramesh on the housing.
1. Click the User Procedures tab.
procedures.
3. Double-click the TCL File field, and then click
. BatchMesher adds a new entry to the table of user

.
4. In the Select Tcl File dialog, select the bm_housing.tcl file.

directory.
5. Click the TCL Procedure field, and then select tet_all from the list of procedures.
6. Double-click the Name field, and then enter a name for the procedure. For example, tetmesh.
7. Click the Run Setup tab.

8. Click the Post-Mesh field. The new post-batch meshing script you created in now available for
selection.
161

Altair Engineering
Step 4: On the Run Setup tab, begin defining a configuration for the batch
mesh run.
1. For each geometry file, click the Mesh Type field and select the predefined mesh types as follows:
bm_housing.hm: use the mesh type you defined in Step 2.
part1.hm: use Crash 5mm.
part2.hm: use Crash 5mm.
2. For the Geometry file bm_housing.hm, click the Post-Mesh field and select the procedure you
created in Step 3.
Note: This will run the tetramesher on all available shell elements after batch meshing.
3. Click Submit to initiate the run, or click Submit At to submit the job at a specified time.
BatchMesher switches to the Run Status tab. As the three jobs run, the Status changes from
Working to Pending to Done.
4. Obtain more details on a single job when its status is Working by selecting the job and then
clicking Show Details. A detailed summary appears with a table containing information about the
model during each step of the batch meshing process, such as the number of failed elements and
the quality index.
5. Once a job's status is Done, click Load Mesh. BatchMesher loads the mesh into HyperMesh for
model interrogation.
6. Obtain an overall run status of all the jobs by clicking Run Details once all of the jobs have been
meshed.
7. While the jobs are running, you can pause or cancel them. If you pause a job, it can be resumed
immediately or you can have it resume at a specific time.
8. Once the BatchMesher session has been setup with file directories and mesh types, you can save it
as a config file and load it at a future time.
9. It is also possible to load an entire set of models that have already been batch meshed in order to
take advantage of the Load Mesh option in the Run Status tab.
Altair Engineering
162
10. If you make modifications to your criteria or parameter files, you can submit a run again.
BatchMesher will place the new files in a separate sub-directory.
Step 5 (Optional): Edit the criteria and parameter files.

1. Click the Configurations tab.
2. Right-click on the Criteria File or Parameter File field that you wish to edit and select Edit File
from the context menu. The Criteria and Parameters Files Editor dialog appears.
163
From the Criteria tab, you can set the target element size, element criteria, and the method
that is used to calculate the values. You can also select the Advanced Criteria Table check
box to enabled additional options that give you more control over the intermediate QI values,
however, it is usually not necessary to edit these options in order to obtain a good quality mesh.
The Use min length from timestep calculator check box is also available for explicit solver
models. If you select this check box, the overall minimum element size will be set by this option
and the top element checks will be disabled.
From the Parameters tab, you can set all of the meshing controls over various geometric
features. Parameters are grouped into sections; you can click the small downward-arrows next
to each section to show and hide that section. The number of parameters is extensive; for more
details, see the Parameters Editor topic in the BatchMesher help.

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial you will learn how to mesh a component using the:
loose shell shrink wrap.
tight shell shrink wrap.
tight solid shrink wrap.
You can use the Shrink Wrap tool to generate an enclosed volume or solid mesh. This tools is
typically used to approximate and simplify an existing model.
Exercise: Meshing a Model Using Shrink Wrap

In HyperMesh, you can shrink wrap elements, components, surfaces, or solids. The shrink wrap allows
for wrapping of multiple components if they are selected. The selection provides the option to wrap all
nodes, elements, components, surfaces, points, or solids, or only a certain portion of the model if
desired. The input to the shrink wrap (that is, the model parts that you wish to wrap) can consist of 2D
or 3D elements along with surfaces or solids.
The shrink wrap is able to stitch over very bad geometry to generate an enclosed volume mesh for
tetra-meshing. The shrink wrap tool can work from elements (whether 2D or 3D) or geometry. Thus, in
the case of an "unclean" geometry model with many released (free) edges, you can either generate
any arbitrary mesh on the unclean geometry using the automesh functionality beforehand and then
create shrink wrap or you can simply select the surface or solid without meshing the geometry first;
either of these steps will yield good output mesh. The key in such cases is to ensure that the element
size used for the shrink wrap is large enough to stitch over the unclean surface edge splits so that an
enclosed volume can be created.
The element size affects the ability of the shrink wrap to follow the geometry of the model. The larger
the element size, the more simplified the model will appear. With a smaller element size, the shrink
wrap will more closely follow the model. The jacobian value for the solid mesh follows the same type of
pattern. As the jacobian value gets smaller, the shrink wrap more closely follows the profile of the
model. The smaller the jacobian value, the longer it takes to generate the mesh.
Shrink wrap mesh can be generated as a surface mesh, or as a full-volume hex mesh, by use of the
Shrink Wrap panel. The distinction between surface or volume mesh is a check box labeled generate
solid mesh.
This tutorial uses the model called shrinkwrap.hm in the <installation_directory>\tutorials\hm

folder.
Step 1: Open the model shrinkwrap.hm.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the shrinkwrap.hm model file.
Altair Engineering

164
Step 2: Create a loose shell shrink wrap mesh in the loose_gap component.
1. If the model's geometry and surface edges are not shaded, click
2. From the graphics area, review the surface geometry.
3. Open the Shrink Wrap panel by clicking Mesh > Create > Shrink Wrap Mesh from the menu
bar.
4. Switch the tight wrap toggle to loose wrap.
5. Verify that the entity selector is active and set to comps.
6. From the graphics area, select the component. HyperMesh highlights the entire component.
8. Click mesh. HyperMesh generates the shrinkwrap.
9. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on surfaces and select Hide from the
context menu.
Step 3: Review the solid geometry.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on loose_gap and select Hide from the
context menu.
2. Right-click on the block component and select Show from the context menu.
165

Altair Engineering
3. From the graphics area, review the model to see the features.
4. Right-click on the block component and select Hide from the context menu.
Step 4: Create a loose shell shrink wrap mesh in the loose component.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on loose and select Make Current from the
context menu.
2. Click comps >> block.
Note: Deselect any other components, if necessary.
3. Click select.
6. Reject the mesh by clicking reject.


Altair Engineering

166
The shrink wrap mesh with the geometry hidden
Step 5: Create a tight shell shrink wrap in the tight_shell component.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on loose and select Hide from the context
menu.
2. Right-click on the tight_shell component and select Make Current from the context menu.
3. Switch the loose wrap toggle to tight wrap.
5. Click select.
Note: The tight mesh conforms much more closely to the model's geometry than the loose mesh
did, even at the same element size.
Step 6: Create a tight solid shrink wrap in the tight_solid component

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on tight_shell and select Hide from the
context menu.
2. Right-click on the tight_solid component and select Make Current from the context menu.
3. Select the generate solid mesh checkbox.
5. Click select.
6. In the minimum jacobian= field, enter 1.
167

Altair Engineering

Note: The resulting mesh is very blocky, due to the high jacobian value.

9. In the minimum jacobian= field, enter 0.7.
Note: This mesh is smoother than it was when the minimum jacobian was set at 1.0.
11. Open the Mask panel by pressing F5.

13. Select a group of elements by pressing SHIFT while left-clicking to draw a box.
14. Click mask. HyperMesh masks the elements.
15. Rotate the model to verify that the mesh generation was a solid mesh, with 3D elements
throughout the model.
The 3D mesh fills the model's volume, rather than only covering its outer surfaces.
Altair Engineering

168
Step 7 (Optional): Change the minimum jacobian to 0.3 for optimized mesh.
In this step, you should still be in the mask panel.
1. Click unmask all.
2. Open the Delete panel by pressing F2.
5. Open the Shrink Wrap panel.
7. Click select.
8. In the minimum jacobian field, enter 0.3.
Note: This mesh is smoother than it was when the minimum jacobian had higher values.
169

Altair Engineering
3-D Elements
Altair Engineering

170
In this tutorial, you will learn about:
Volume tetra mesher
Standard tetra mesher
Checking tetra element quality
Remeshing tetra elements
HyperMesh provides two methods for generating a tetrahedral element mesh. The volume tetra
mesher works directly with surface or solid geometry to automatically generate a tetrahedral mesh
without further interaction with you. Even with complex geometry, this method can often generate a
high quality tetra mesh quickly and easily.
The standard tetra mesher requires a surface mesh of tria or quad elements as input, and then
provides you with a number of options to control the resulting tetrahedral mesh. This offers a great
deal of control over the tetrahedral mesh, and provides the means to generate a tetrahedral mesh for
even the most complex models.
You can use the Tetramesh panel to fill an enclosed volume with first or second order tetrahedral
elements. A region is considered enclosed if it is entirely bounded by a shell mesh (tria or quad
elements), where each element has material on one side and open space on the other.
Exercise
This tutorial uses the model called housing.hm in the <installation_directory>\tutorials\hm
folder.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the housing.hm model file.
and so on). Only the geometry in the component cover is currently displayed. The file contains two
parts defined by a volume of surfaces. The geometry has been cleaned such that surface
connectivity is proper and surface edges that would cause sliver elements are suppressed.
Step 2: Use the volume tetra mesher and equilateral triangles to create a
tetra mesh for the cover.
1. Open the Tetramesh panel by clicking Mesh > Create > Tetra Mesh from the menu bar.
2. Go to the Volume tetra subpanel.
3. Set the Enclosed volume selector to surfs .
4. Select one of the surfaces in the model.
5. Verify that the 2D type is set to trias and the 3D type is set to tetras.
These options control the type of elements that HyperMesh creates for the surface mesh and solid
mesh of the part.
6. Verify that the toggle is set to Elems to Current Comp.
This option allows HyperMesh to place the newly created elements in the current component
collector.
7. Verify that the Use curvature and Use proximity checkboxes are clear.
171

Altair Engineering
8. In the Element size field, enter 10.

9. Click mesh. HyperMesh creates the tetra mesh.
10. If the model's mesh lines and elements are not shaded, click
11. Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created.
Tetra mesh created in the volume tetra subpanel using equilateral triangles (2D: trias)
Step 3: Use the volume tetra mesher and right triangles to create a tetra
mesh for the cover.
In this step, you should still be in the Volume tetra subpanel.
2. Set the 2D type to R-trias.
4. Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created and compare it to the first mesh
that you created.
Note: The 2D type: R-trias setting tends to create tetra elements with triangular faces that are
right triangles (90-45-45 angles), while the 2D type: trias setting tends to create
equilateral triangles (60-60-60 angles).
Tetra mesh from the volume tetra subpanel and right triangles (2D type: R-trias)
Altair Engineering

172
Step 4: Use the volume tetra mesher to create a tetra mesh with more
elements along curved surfaces.
2. Select the Use curvature checkbox.
The option causes more elements to be created along areas of high surface curvature. Thus, curved
areas such as fillets will have more and smaller elements, which capture those features with higher
resolution.
3. In the Min elem size field, enter 1.0.
4. Verify that the Feature angle is set to 30.
6. Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created and compare it to the previous
meshes you created. You can see that more small elements are created around the fillets.
Tetra mesh from the volume tetra subpanel with the use curvature check box selected
Step 5: Use the volume tetra mesher to create a tetra mesh with more
elements around small features.
2. Select the Use proximity checkbox.
This option causes the mesh to be refined in areas where surfaces are smaller, which results in a
nice transition from small elements on small surfaces to larger elements on larger, adjacent
surfaces.
4. Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created and compare it to the previous
meshes you created. You can see that more elements are created around the surfaces with small
angles.
173

Altair Engineering
Tetra mesh from the volume tetra subpanel with the Use curvature and Use proximity check boxes selected.
Step 6: Prepare the display to tetra mesh the hub component using the
standard tetra mesher.
1. In the Model browser, turn off the display of every component's geometry except for hub.
2. Turn off the display of every component's elements except for hub and tetras.
Note: There are tria shell elements in the hub component, and no elements in the tetras
component.
3. Return to the main menu by clicking return.
Step 7 (Optional): Review the connectivity and quality of the tria mesh to
validate its integrity for the standard tetra mesher.
In this step you will use the Edges and Check Elems panels to make sure that there are no free
edges or very small angles in the tria shell mesh.
1. Open the Edges panel by clicking Mesh > Check > Components > Edges from the menu bar.
3. Select a tria element on the hub component. HyperMesh highlights the entire component.
4. Click find edges. The status bar displays a message that reads, "No edges were found. Selected
elements may enclose a volume."
Note: The tetra mesher requires a closed volume of shell elements.
6. Open the Check Elements panel by clicking Mesh > Check > Elements > Check Elements from
the menu bar.
7. Verify that you are in the 2-d subpanel.
8. Identify the elements that have an aspect ratio greater than 5.
Aspect ratio is the ratio of the longest edge of an element to its shortest edge. This check helps you
to identify sliver elements. All of the hubs shell elements pass the check; all of the elements have
an aspect ratio less than 5.
9. Identify the tria elements that have an angle less than 20.
This check helps identify sliver elements. All of the hubs shell elements pass the check; all the
elements have angles greater than 20. The surface mesh is suitable for creating a tetra mesh.
Step 8: Create a tetra mesh for the hub using the standard tetra mesher.
Altair Engineering

174
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on tetras and select Make Current from the
context menu.
2. Open the Tetra Mesh panel.
3. Go to the Tetra mesh subpanel.
4. Verify that the Float trias/quads to tetra mesh entity selector is set to comps.
Note: By using this entity selector, HyperMesh will swap the diagonal for any pair of surface trias,
which will result in a better tetra mesh quality. If you would rather keep the diagonal, see
step 8.6.
5. Select a shell element on the hub component. HyperMesh highlights the entire component.
6. Optional: Keep the diagonal as is by activating the Fixed trias/quads to tetra mesh entity
selector and setting it to comps.
7. Click mesh. HyperMesh generates the tetrahedral elements.
Cut-away view of tetrahedral elements using the Masks panel
Step 9: Check the quality of the hubs tetra elements.

1. In the Model browser, only display the tetras component elements.
2. Open the Check Elements panel.
4. Identify the smallest element length among the displayed elements. If the minimum length is
acceptable for a target element size of 5.0, then no further action is necessary.
5. Identify the smallest angle (tria faces: min angle) among the displayed elements. If the minimum
tria face angle is no less than 10, then the mesh quality should be acceptable.
6. Identify elements that have a tet collapse smaller than 0.3. The status bar indicates that three
elements have a tetra collapse smaller than 0.3.
Note: The tet collapse criteria is a normalized volume check for tetrahedral elements. A value of
1 indicates a perfectly formed element with maximum possible volume. A value of 0
indicates a completely collapsed element with no volume.
Step 10: Isolate the element with the tetra collapse smaller than 0.2 and
find the elements surrounding it.
175

Altair Engineering
In this step, you should still be in the Check Elements panel.

1. With 0.3 still specified in the tet collapse< field, click tet collapse.
2. Click save failed. HyperMesh saves the elements that failed the tetra collapse check in the user
mark.
Note: You can retrieve the saved elements that failed the check from any panel by selecting
retrieve in the extended selection menu.
6. Click elems >> retrieve. HyperMesh retrieves the elements that were saved in the Check
Elements panel.
7. Click elems >> reverse.
8. Click mask. HyperMesh masks the elements and displays the three tetra element that failed the
tetra collapse check.
10. On the Display toolbar, click
. HyperMesh identifies and displays the layer of elements that are
attached to the three displayed element.
11. Click
two more times. HyperMesh identifies and displays the layers of elements that are
attached to the displayed elements.
Note: You can duplicate the functionality of unmask adjacent using the Find panel, find
attached subpanel in the Tool page.
12. In the Model browser, turn off the display of the hub elements that were unmasked.
Step 11: Remesh the hubs displayed tetra elements to improve their tetra
collapse.
1. Open the Tetra Mesh panel.
2. Go to the Tetra remesh subpanel.
3. Click 3D elements: elems >> displayed.
4. Click remesh. HyperMesh regenerates this area of the mesh.
6. Open the Check Elements panel.
7. Find out if the tetra collapse has improved for the displayed elements by clicking tet collapse. The
status bar indicates that the minimum tetra collapse is larger than the value reported before the
tetra elements were remeshed.

Now that the tetra mesh is complete, it is a good time to save the model.
Summary
Altair Engineering

176
You have created a tetra mesh for both parts in the model using different tetra meshing procedures.
Either method can be used to mesh parts, depending on the needs of the analysis. The tetra remesh
function was used in this tutorial to show how to quickly fix the quality of tetra elements.
177

Altair Engineering

Create solids using different functions
Check and fix improper model connectivity
For some analyses, it is desirable to use a mesh of hexahedral and pentahedral elements. This is
especially true for parts which have a large thickness compared to the element size being used, or for
parts that have many features and/or changes in thickness. Castings or forgings are good examples.
Exercise: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces

This exercise uses the model file, arm_bracket.hm. The objective of this exercise is to introduce you to
a number of HyperMesh functions that are used to create hexa-penta meshes. The arm_bracket.hm
model is organized into four IGES layers, consisting of 1) the base, 2) the first section of the arm, with
a constant cross section and curvature, 3) the second section of the arm, with a tapered cross section,
and 4) the boss.
Step 1: Retrieve and review model file.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the arm_bracket.hm model file.
Step 2: Mesh the top surface of the base, including the L-shaped surface.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on base and select Make Current from the
context menu.
2. Right-click on base again and select Isolate from the from the context menu. HyperMesh hides all
of the components except for base.
3. Open the AutoMesh panel by clicking Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh from the menu bar.

Altair Engineering

178
7. Select the surfaces on the top of the base, including the L-shaped surface at the intersection of the
base and the arm.

9. In the element size field, enter 10.
10. Set the mesh type to quads only.
11. Click mesh. HyperMesh meshes the selected surface.
Resulting quad mesh on base surfaces
Step 3: Create layers of hex elements for the base.

1. Open the Elem Offset panel by clicking Mesh > Create > 3D Elements > Element Offset from
the menu bar.
2. Go to the solid layers subpanel.
3. Click elems to offset: elems >> displayed. HyperMesh selects the elements on the base.
4. In the number of layers = field, enter 5.
5. In the total thickness = field, enter 25.
179

Altair Engineering
6. Click offset+. HyperMesh creates the hexa mesh.
Hex mesh on base
Step 4: Prepare the display for meshing the arms curved segment.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on arm_curve and select Show from the
context menu.
3. Click elems >> by config.
4. Click config= and select the hex8 configuration.
5. Click select entities. HyperMesh selects all of the elements with a configuration of hex8 in the
model.
6. Click mask. HyperMesh masks the elements.
Step 5: Create a node at the center of the arm radius.

The first segment of the arm can be meshed using the Spin panel. This requires a node to be selected
as the center point of rotation. In this step, you will use the distance panel, 3 nodes subpanel to
create a node that will be used as the center point of rotation.
1. Open the Distance panel by pressing F4.
3. Verify that the N1 node selector is active.
4. While pressing the left mouse button, move it over the curved line as indicated in the following
image, and then release it when the cursor changes to
Altair Engineering
HyperMesh highlights the line.

180
5. Click three locations along the selected line. The active selector advances from N1 to N2 to N3,
and HyperMesh create the temporary nodes on the selected curved line of the arm.
6. Click circle center . HyperMesh creates the node at the center.
Note: You will use this node in the next step when you mesh the arm.
Step 6: Create hexa elements in the curved portion of the arm using spin.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on arm_curve and select Make Current
from the context menu.
2. Open the Spin panel by clicking Mesh > Create > 3D Elements > Spin from the menu bar.
3. Go to the spin elems subpanel.
4. Click 2d elems: elems >> by window.
5. Select the plate elements within the L-shaped cross section of the arm as indicated in the following
image.

7. In the angle = field, enter 90 degrees.
8. Set the orientation vector to x-axis (Y-Z plane).
181
Altair Engineering
9. Select the center node you created in step 5 for the base node (B).
10. In the on spin = field, enter 24.
Note: This option determines how many layers of hex elements HyperMesh creates when the plate
elements are spun.
11. Click spin -.
spin panel results
Step 7: Create faces on the hex elements.

1. Open the Faces panel by clicking Mesh > Check > Components > Faces from the menu bar.
3. Click comps >> arm_curve.
4. Click select.
5. Click find faces. HyperMesh creates 2D shell elements on the free faces of every 3D solid element
in the component, and places them in a new component named ^faces.
Note: The ^faces component is created with its visualization set to wireframe, therefore you will
not be able to see the new elements right away if the arm_curve component is displayed
and in shaded mode.
6. Shade the model's elements and mesh lines by clicking
on the Visualization toolbar. The
graphics area now displays the elements in the ^faces component.
Step 8: Prepare the display for meshing the second arm segment.
1. From the Model browser, turn on the display of the arm_straight and ^faces components.
Step 9: Mesh the L-shaped set of surfaces between the arm_straight and
boss components.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on arm_straight and select Make Current
2. Open the Automesh panel.
Altair Engineering

182
3. Select the three surfaces lying on the intersection between the arm_straight and boss
components as indicated in the following image.
Note: These surfaces are all in the arm_straight component.
4. Set the meshing mode to interactive.

5. Click mesh. The meshing module opens.
6. Go to the density subpanel.
7. Adjust the density of each edge to obtain a mesh that matches the following image.
Note: This mesh pattern matches the mesh pattern at the intersection of the two arm segments.
This is necessary for the next step.
Densities to correspond to the mesh on the end face
8. Click mesh. HyperMesh updates the mesh density.

183

Altair Engineering
9. Create the elements and go back to the main menu by clicking return twice.
Step 10: Use linear solid to build the mesh between the two sets of shell
elements.
1. Open the Linear Solid panel by clicking Mesh > Create > 3D Elements > Linear 3D from the
menu bar.
2. Activate the from: elems selector.
3. Select the ^faces elements lying on the intersection between the first and second arm segments
Tip:
Quickly select all of the necessary elements by selecting one of the elements and then
clicking from: elems >> by face.
4. Activate the to: elems selector.

5. Select the shell elements, between the arm and boss, that you created using the Automesh panel
in step 9.
6. Activate the from: alignment: N1 selector.
7. Select three nodes on one of the "from elements" that you selected in step 10.3 as indicated in the
following image.
8. Activate the to: alignment: N1 selector.
9. Select three nodes on the "to element" that corresponds to the "from element" with the three "from
nodes" as indicated in the following image.
Example selection for alignment nodes
10. In the density = field, enter 12.

11. Click solids. HyperMesh creates the mesh.
Altair Engineering

184
Linear solid mesh
Step 11: Prepare the display for meshing the boss.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on boss and select Show from the context
menu.
Step 12: Create a shell mesh on the bottom of the boss.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on boss and select Make Current from the
context menu.
2. Open the Automesh panel.
3. Select the five surfaces on the bottom face of the boss as indicated in the following image.
185

Altair Engineering
5. Adjust the density of each edge to obtain a mesh that matches the following image.
Mesh densities on the bottom of the boss
6. Click mesh. HyperMesh updates the mesh density.

7. Return to the main menu by clicking return twice.
Step 13: Project a node to the bottom face of the boss.

1. Open the Project panel by clicking Mesh > Project > Nodes from the menu bar.
2. Go to the to line subpanel.
3. Select the node on the rightmost top vertex as indicated in the following image.
4. Click nodes >> duplicate.
5. Activate the to line: line list selector.
6. Select the line on the boss top face as indicated in the following image.
Projecting a node to a line
7. Set the along vector to x- axis.

8. Click project. The node projects to the line.
Step 14: Generate hexas for the boss using the Solid Map panel.
1. Open the Solid Map panel by clicking Mesh > Create > Solid Map Mesh from the menu bar.
2. Go to the general subpanel.
3. Click the source geom switch and select none.
4. Activate the dest geom: surf selector.
Altair Engineering

186
5. Select the top surface of the boss as indicated in the following image.
6. Click the along geom switch and select mixed.

7. Activate the along geom: mixed lines selector.
9. Activate the along geom: mixed node path selector.
10. Select the 13 nodes as indicated in the following image, to define the exact location of the solid
element layers.
Note: A total of 13 nodes should be selected, starting at the boss mesh, and then using all of the
nodes along the edge of the arm_straight component, ending with the node projected to
the top of the boss.
Along nodes for solid map
11. Click elems to drag: elems >> by collector >> boss.

187

Altair Engineering
12. Click select.

13. Click mesh. HyperMesh creates the elements and completes the mesh on this part.
Completed mesh of the arm bracket
Step 15 (optional): Check the connectivity of the model.

1. Go to the Faces panel.
2. Click comps. HyperMesh displays a list of components.
3. Select every component from the list, or select comps >> all.
4. Click select.
5. Click find faces.
6. From the Model browser, turn off the geometry display of all components.
7. Turn off the element display of all components except ^faces.
8. Exit the the panel by clicking return.
9. From the Post page, select hidden line.
10. Select the xz plane and trim plane checkboxes.
11. Click show plot. HyperMesh displays the faces with a plane cutting the model in half.
Note: This allows you to review the interior of the model.
12. Click near the cutting plane, hold the left mouse button down, and move your mouse back and
forth. The cutting plane moves through the model, allowing you to see if any face elements exist on
the interior of the model.
Note: You should see that there are face elements interior to the model, between the boss and
arm. You need to perform some corrections on the connectivity.
Hidden line view of faces

Altair Engineering
188
Step 16 (Optional): Correct the connectivity of the model.

1. In the Model browser, display the elements for all of the components except for ^faces.
2. Display the model's elements as transparent by clicking
3. Go to the Faces panel.

6. Click preview equiv. HyperMesh highlights coincident nodes on the intersection between the arm
and the boss.
7. Specify a slightly larger value in the tolerance = field, and then click preview equiv. Hypermesh
identifies more coincident nodes on the intersection.
8. Repeat step 16.7 until all 60 coincident nodes have been found.
9. Click equivalence. HyperMesh replaces the nodes to the location of the lowest node ID.
10. Switch all the components to the shaded visual mode.
Step 17 (Optional): Recheck the connectivity of the model.

Repeat Step 15 to make sure the model is now equivalenced. If you find errors, repeat Step 16.

Now that the 3D solid mesh has been completed, it is a good time to save your model.
189

Altair Engineering
HM-3220: Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map

Function
In this tutorial, you will learn how to create a hexahedral mesh using the Solid map function by one
volume and multisolid method.
Solids are geometric entities that define a three-dimensional volume. The use of solid geometry is
helpful when dividing a part into multiple volumes. For example, divide a part into simple, mappable
regions to hex mesh the part. Use the Solid Map panel to create a mesh of solid elements in a solid
geometric volume.
Exercise: Hex-meshing Solid Geometry

This exercise uses the model file, solid_map.hm.
Step 1: Retrieve model file, solid_map.hm.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the solid_map.hm model file.
Step 2: Mesh the 1/8th sphere-shaped region.

2. Open the Solid Map Mesh panel by clicking Mesh > Create > Solid Map Mesh from the menu
bar.
3. Go to the one volume subpanel.
4. Under along parameters, enter 1 in the elem size= field.
5. Activate the volume to mesh: solid entity selector.
6. Select the small cube-shaped solid, as indicated in the following image.
Altair Engineering

190
7. Click mesh.
8. Shade the model's elements and mesh lines by clicking
9. Select the solid as indicated in the following image.
10. Click mesh.

Step 3: Create a shell mesh with the Automesh panel to control a mesh
pattern.
1. Open the Automesh panel by clicking Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh from the menu bar.
3. Select the surface as indicated in the following image.
4. Set the meshing mode to interactive.

6. Set the mesh type to mixed.
8. Verify that you are in the density subpanel.
9. In the elem density = field, enter 4.
10. Click set all to. HyperMesh sets all the edge densities to 4.
191

Altair Engineering
11. Click mesh.

12. Return to the main menu by clicking return twice.
Step 4: Mesh the solid volume on which the surface mesh was created in
Step 3.
1. Open the Solid Map Mesh panel.
2. Go to the one volume subpanel.
3. Select the volume shown in the following image.
4. Under along parameters, toggle elem size= to density= .

5. In the density= field, enter 10.
6. Click mesh.
7. Rotate the part and note how the mesh pattern created with the Automesh panel has been used
for the solid elements.
Step 5: Mesh the remaining solid volumes.

In this step, you should still be in the Solid Map Mesh panel, one volume subpanel.
1. Select one of the remaining unmeshed solid volumes.
Note: Make sure to select a solid adjacent to one that has already been meshed so that
connectivity is maintained.
Altair Engineering

192
2. Set the source shells to mixed.

3. Under along parameters, toggle density= to elem size=
4. In the elem size= field, enter 1.5.
5. Click mesh.
6. Repeat until all solid volumes are meshed.

With this section of the exercise completed, it is a good time to save the model.
Automated Solid Map Meshing

The capability to automate the solid map meshing process is now available. Using the Mappable
visualization mode in conjunction with the multi-solids feature will inform you that the solid(s) are
ready for solid meshing. Using the multi-solids feature will allow for all solids within the model to be
meshed in one step, provided that they are mappable.
In this section of the tutorial, you will delete all of the elements from the previous section. You will
then use the Mappable visualization mode with multi-solids to solid mesh the part.
Step 7: Delete the elements within the model.

1. Open the Delete panel by pressing F2.
Step 8: Use the mappable visualization mode.

2. From the Geometry Visualization list, select
represent its mappable state.

. HyperMesh color codes each solid to
Note: The goal is to ensure that each solid is either 1-directional or 3-directional mappable.
3. From the menu bar, click Preferences > Colors.
4. In the Color dialog click the Geometry tab.
5. Optional: Under By mappable display mode (solids), click the color swatches to adjust the
display color of the following:
193
1dir. map: Visualization for solids that can be mapped, for 3D meshing, in one direction.
3dir. map: Visualization for solids that can be mapped, for 3D meshing, in three directions.
ignored map: Default visualization for solids that require partitioning to become mappable.
not mappable: Visualization for solids that have been edited, but still require further
partitioning to create mappable solids.

Altair Engineering
Once in the mappable visualization mode, it is clear that there is one 3-directional mappable solid and
the rest are 1-directional mappable.
Altair Engineering

194
Step 9: Use the multi-solid feature to mesh the part.

1. Open the Solid Map Mesh panel.
2. Go to the multi solids subpanel.
3. Click solids >> all. HyperMesh selects all of the solids in the model.
4. Set the source shells to mixed.
5. In the elem size field, enter 1.
6. Click mesh. HyperMesh opens the interactive mesh mode.
7. Accept the shell elements and create solid elements by clicking mesh.
Note: The solids will be sequentially solid meshed.
8. Inspect the model and note that the mesh within all of the solids is correctly equivalenced.
9. Accept the solid element mesh and return to the Solid Map Mesh panel by clicking return.

With this exercise completed, you can save the model if desired.
195

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial, you will learn how to use the TetraMesh Process Manager to:
Import geometry or a HyperMesh File
Clean up geometry
Organize the model (holes and features)
Establish mesh size and pattern for the organized geometry
Create a 2D Mesh
Clean up the 2D mesh
Create a 3D TetraMesh
The Process Manager contains a step-by-step checklist of procedures that allow you to quickly organize
and tetramesh a geometric model. Each step is formatted in a hierarchical list that provides the order
in which the process must be performed. Specialized tools are also provided at each step to simplify
the process. You can perform these steps manually, but it is generally faster to perform them in the
Tetramesh Process Manager.
Exercise
Step 1: Initiate the Process Manager.
1. Start a new session in the TetraMesh Process Manager by clicking Mesh > Create >
TetraMesh Process > Create New from the menu bar.
2. In the Create New Session dialog, enter a name for the session in the New Session Name field.
Note: Creating a session name and saving the session allows you to stop the process before
completion and then load it again at a later time, picking up the process at the point it was
left off.
3. In the Working Folder field, navigate to the location of your working directory.
4. Click Create. The Process Manager opens in the tab area.
Step 2: Import geometry.

At this point, the TetraMesh Process Manger automatically assembles the TetraMesh process flow. The
first step, Geometry Import, is highlighted in the tab area, and the panel area has been configured
with specific panels for aiding the Tetramesh Process Manager template. If you need to access
standard HyperMesh panels, undock the Process Manager panels to a separate dialog by clicking
the panel area. To re-dock the Process Manager panels, click
in
in the Process Manager dialog.
1. In the panel area, set Import Type to HM Model.

2. In the Import Filename field, open the file tetmesh_pm.hm from
<installation_directory>\tutorials\hm\.
3. Click Import. Hypermesh imports the model.
Note: A green checkmark appears next to the Geometry Import step in the Process Manager
tab, which indicates that the step is complete.
Altair Engineering

196
Step 3: Clean up the geometry.

1. On the Visualization toolbar, select
from the list of geometry color modes, and
click to shade the model's geometry and surface edges.
2. In the panel area, select the Edge Tools tab.
3. Click Isolate. HyperMesh isolates the surfaces with free edges on them.
Isolated Surfaces with free edges.
4. Select the Free Edges tab.

5. Click Equivalence. HyperMesh fixes all of the free edges.
Tip:
If this did not correct all of the free edges, increase the Tolerance value until all of the free
edges are equivalenced.
6. Select the Edge Tools tab.

7. Click Isolate. A dialog appears with a message that reads, "No edges found..."
Note: This confirms that all of the edges have been fixed.
8. Click Display All. HyperMesh displays the entire model.
9. Click ACCEPT.
Step 4: Organize and Clean up holes.

In the Organize and Cleanup Holes step, you will organize the surfaces that form holes in the model.
The TetraMesh Process Manager can automatically sort and organize holes into separate component
collectors based upon their diameter. This will allow you to specify a mesh type, circumference element
count, and longitudinal element size for different hole groups.
1. In the Hole Parameters Table, D< column, enter 5 in the first row and 10 in the second row.
Note: This will organize the holes into two collectors that will include holes ranging from 0 - 5 units
and 5 - 10 units collectively.
2. Click Auto Organize. HyperMesh organizes all of the holes in the model less than 10 units into two
component collectors, each with a different color.
197

Altair Engineering
3. From the Model browser, expand the Components folder.

Note: Two new component collectors, with the name solidholes followed by the numerical
average of the diameter range of the holes, are created.
Transparent view of model showing all holes and bores organized
4. In the Hole Parameters Table, Num Circumference Elems column, enter 12 in each row.
Note: The Num Circumference Elems field governs the number of elements that will be meshed
around the hole.
5. In the Longitudinal Elem Size column, enter 1 in each row.
Note: The Longitudinal Elem Size field dictates the unit size of the elements through the length
of the hole.
6. Click Auto Organize.
7. Click ACCEPT.
Step 5: Mesh holes.

1. In the Hole Parameters Table, Mesh Type column, select R-tria regular in each row.
2. Click Mesh All. HyperMesh creates a perfectly straight tria mesh down the length of the holes with
no twisting.
3.
Click ACCEPT.
Altair Engineering

198
Step 6: Organize and clean up features.

In the Organize and Cleanup Features step, you will highlight and organize features that require
specific mesh controls beyond the overall mesh pattern that will be applied to the remainder of the part
in a later step. You will use the organizational tool to place the required surfaces into their own
collector or collectors, and set a mesh size and pattern requirements for each.
1. In the panel area, click
2. In the Define New dialog, enter Faces in the text field.

3. Click OK.
4. Select all five of the flat faces around the circumference of the part as indicated in the following
image.
Isolated view of the five flat faces
5. Click proceed. The Organize panel opens with the surfaces pre-selected and ready to move into a
new component called grp_Faces.
6. Click move.
7. Click return.
8. Click
9. In the Define New dialog, enter TopHole in the text field.

10. Click OK.
11. Rotate the model so you are looking at it from underneath into the center.
12. Select the five surfaces that are shaded gray, as indicated the following image.
Note: You only need to select one of the two surfaces that make up a cylinder; when you click
proceed HyperMesh automatically selects the other surfaces.
13. Click proceed.

199

Altair Engineering
14. In the Organize panel, click move.

15. Click return.
Note: Your model should look similar to the following image, with the faces in one collector and the
top hole in another. Your colors may vary slightly.
16. Click ACCEPT.
Step 7: Organize and clean up filets.

Often a better mesh can be achieved if your fillets are split down the center. In the Organize and
Cleanup Fillets step, you will split your fillets based on a minimum and maximum radius criteria.
1. Click Components.
2. Select the part in an area that has not been organized into a new component so that the large
purple part is selected.
3. Click proceed.
4. Verify that the Min Radius is 0, and the Max Radius is 5.
5. Select the Suppress fillet tangent edges checkbox.
6. Click Cleanup.
Note: Many of the fillets now have an edge running down the center and the original edges are
suppressed.
7. Click ACCEPT.
Step 8: Mesh features.

In the Mesh Features step, you will mesh the features that you organized in step 6. The panel area will
contain a table with your organized features. In the table, you will be able to select a mesh type and
specify an element size for each feature.
1. In the Feature Parameters Table, set the Mesh Type for Faces to trias.
2. For TopHole, set the Mesh Type to R-tria union jack.
3. For both features, enter 0.5 in the Elem Size field.
4. Click Mesh All.
Altair Engineering

200
Note: Notice the distinctive Union Jack mesh pattern (

) in the top hole area and the
connectivity of the mesh to the previously meshed holes.
5. Click ACCEPT.
Step 9: Organize and clean up.

In the Organize and Cleanup step, you will organize and clean up the remaining portion of the model
that will then fall under the global meshing parameters. As the remaining surfaces are already in the
component you wish them to be in, there is no need for further organization.
1. Click ACCEPT.
Step 10: Mesh/remesh.

In the Mesh/Remesh step, you will globally mesh the remaining model. You can select a mesh type and
specify an element size for all of the components that remain unmeshed.
1. In the panel area, enter 1 in the Element Size field.
2. Set Mesh Type to trias.
3. Click Mesh.
4. Click ACCEPT.
Step 11: Clean up elements.

At this point the model should be entirely surface meshed. Proper adherence to the previous steps
ensures a surface mesh that is properly connected and controlled by the previously entered values. In
the Element Cleanup step, you will verify a proper mesh and clean up any issues that are found.
1. In the panel area, click Components.
2. Click comps.
3. Select all of the components.
4. Click select.
5. Click proceed.
6. Leave all of the values at their default (Min Size = 0.25, Max FeatureAngle = 60.0, and
Normals Angle = 150.0).
201

Altair Engineering
7. Click AutoCleanup. A dialog appears with a message that reads, "Cleanup process performed on
32 failed elements. No failed elements remain."
Note: This confirms that all failed edges have been fixed and there are no further errors in the
model.
8. Optional: Use the Manual tab to manually check the model for free edges and t-junctions, and fix
any that are found. There is also an option to display normals. Use these options to find and fix any
errors.
9. Click ACCEPT.
Note: The Tetramesh Process Manager automatically places any elements that fail the AutoCleanup
procedure in the user mark. This allows for easy retrieval of problem elements. You can
employ the tools from the standard HyperMesh panels to fix these remaining elements.
Step 12: Tetra mesh.

Tetra Meshing is the final step in the TetraMesh Process Manager Template. During this step, the
model will be Tetra meshed. The Process Manager automatically opens the TetraMesh panel and preselects all of the float and fixed elements.
1. Under Float trias/quads to tetra mesh, click elems. HyperMesh selects the surface elements
under the general mesh selection option.
Note: This option defines the selected elements as floatable, meaning that the diagonals of the
underlying tetra elements can be flipped from the generated shell elements if HyperMesh
determines a better element quality will result.
2. Under Fixed trias/quads to tetra mesh, click elems. HyperMesh selects the elements that
represent the interior of holes and bores.
Note: The option defines the selected elements as fixed, meaning HyperMesh will always adhere
to the shell mesh pattern when generating the tetra elements.
3. Click mesh.
4. From the Model browser, expand the Components folder.
5. Right-click on tetmesh, and select Isolate Only from the context menu. Hypermesh displays the
tetra mesh.
6. Open the Mask panel by clicking
on the Display toolbar.
7. Press Shift + left-click, and then drag a box to include roughly half of the model.
8. Click mask.
Note: Your tetra mesh should look similar to the following image.

Altair Engineering

202
You can now save your model if you wish.

203

Altair Engineering
Quality
Altair Engineering

204

Identify shell element connectivity problems
Correct shell element connectivity problems
Review the models shell elements to ensure connectivity problems were corrected
Remesh the elements along the rib
Use element quality Cleanup tools
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, cover.hm.
Step 1: Retrieve and view the HyperMesh model file.

3. In the Open Model dialog, open the file cover.hm located in the <installation
folder>\tutorials\hm directory.
Step 2: Review the models free edges to identify shell element connectivity
problems.
1. To open the Edges panel, do one of the following:
From the menu bar, click Mesh > Check > Components > Edges.
On the Checks toolbar, click
From the main menu, go to the Tool page and click edges.
Press SHIFT + F3.
(Edges).

3. In the graphics area, select any element. HyperMesh selects the component containing the element
you selected.
205

Altair Engineering
4. Click find edges. HyperMesh creates a red 1D element along each shell element edge that is free
(one or more of the nodes on the element's edges are not shared by the adjacent elements), and
organizes them into a new component named ^edges.
Note: If the first character of a component's name is ^, the component and its contents will not be
written to the input file when the model is exported.
5. Observe the red, 1D elements (free edges), and try to identify gaps in the continuity of the mesh.
Tip:
Look closely at the free edges interior to the model.
next to shells to turn off its element display.
7. Continue to identify which red, free edges do not belong in the model.
All of the red, free edges in the model
Red, free edges that belong in the model
8. Turn the element display back on for the shells component.
Step 3: Correct the shell element connectivity problems using the Edges
panel.
1. In the tolerance= field, enter 0.01.
you selected.
Altair Engineering

206
3. Click preview equiv. HyperMesh creates a sphere (

) on the nodes that have a distance between
each other that is equal to or less than the specified tolerance.
Note: The Status bar reads, "81 nodes were found." A sphere was not created on every node
along all of the red, free edges. To identify the rest of the nodes, you must specify a larger
tolerance.
4. In the tolerance = field, increase the value until you have identified all 96 nodes.
Note: Do not increase the tolerance too much. Although you will identify the 96 nodes, an
excessively large tolerance value may collapse elements when the identified nodes are
equivalenced.
Tip:
Find the maximum tolerance value that you can safely use without collapsing the elements
by pressing F10 to go to the Check Elems panel, 2d subpanel, and clicking length. The
Status bar reads " The min length is 1.49." This message indicates that you can safely use
a tolerance value < 1.49, without causing any elements to collapse when identified nodes
are equivalenced. Return to the Edges panel by clicking return.
The nodes identified with preview equivalence
5. Click equivalence. HyperMesh equivalenced 96 coincident nodes.

6. Rotate and observe the model to see that the mesh still looks as it should, and that none of the
elements are collapsed.
7. Click delete edges. HyperMesh deletes the red, free edges and their component, ^edges.
Step 4: Review the models free edges again to confirm that all of the shell
element connectivity problems have been corrected.
In this step, you should still be in the Edges panel.
1. Click find edges. HyperMesh creates a red, 1D element along each shell element edge that is free.
2. Observe the red, 1D elements (free edges). Are there any red, free edges that should not belong if
the mesh was continuous, or if all of the elements were connected?
Note: Red, free edges should only exist on the perimeter of the part and on the periphery of the
internal holes.
3. In the Model browser, turn off the element display of the shells component.
207

Altair Engineering
4. Verify that all of the free, red edges belong in the model.
Red, free edges that belong in the model
5. Click delete edges.

6. Turn the element display back on for the shells component.
7. Click return.
Step 5: Display the element normals and adjust them to point in the same
direction.
1. To open the Normals panel, do one of the following:
From the menu bar, click Mesh > Check > Elements > Normals.
From the main menu, go to the Tool page, then click normals.
Press SHIFT + F10.
(Normals).
2. Go to the elements subpanel.

3. Set the toggle to vector display.
4. Set the top switch to comps.
you selected.
Altair Engineering

208
6. Click display. HyperMesh draws vectors from the element centroids, which indicate the direction of
the element normals.
Note: The arrows do not all point from the same side of the part. For some analyses, the element
normals should point from the same side.
7. In the size = field, enter the size which the normal should be in model units.
Note: When size = is set to 0, the vector will be 10% of the screen.
8. Click display.
9. Toggle vector display to color display.
10. Click display. HyperMesh displays, on each side of the part, the element normals using the colors
red and blue.
Note: The red side of the elements is the positive normal direction, while the blue side is the
negative normal direction.
11. Under orientation, set the switch to elem.
209

Altair Engineering
12. In the graphics area, select an element as indicated in the following image.
13. Click adjust. All of the elements on both sides of the part are the same color, red or blue.
Note: The Status bar reads: "[X] elements have been adjusted."
14. Optional: If after adjusting the normals there are still elements on one side of the part which are of
different color, set the switch to elem under Orientation, select the elements that are of a
different color, and then click reverse.
15. Click return.
Step 6: Review the quality of the elements using the check elems panel.
1. To open the Check Elems panel, do one of the following:
From the menu bar, click Mesh > Check > Elements > Check Elements.
From the main menu, go to the Tool page, then click check elems.
Press F10.
(Check Elements).

Altair Engineering

210
3. Verify that the jacobian < field is set to 0.7.

4. Click jacobian. HyperMesh highlights the elements that have a jacobian of less than 0.7, and the
Status bar displays a message indicating how many elements failed this check.
Note: There are several elements on the triangular rib and around the smaller of the two holes that
have a jacobian of less than 0.7.
5. In the graphics area, click an element. A window appears that lists each quality check result for the
element.
6. Close the pop-up window by right-clicking.

7. On the right side of the panel, switch from standard to assign plot.
8. Click jacobian. A legend for jacobian values appears and each element is colored accordingly.
Note: The red elements have a jacobian less than the threshold, 0.7.
211

Altair Engineering
9. Under quads, verify that the min angle < is set to 45.
10. Click min angle to determine if any quad elements have an angle of less than 45.
Note: A couple of the elements on the rib have an angle of less than 45.
11. Under quads, verify that the max angle > field is set to 135.
12. Click max angle.
Note: Several elements on the rib have an angle greater than 135.
13. Click return.
Step 7: Remesh the elements on the rib using the Automesh panel.
1. To open the Automesh panel, do one of the following:
From the menu bar, click Mesh > Create > 2D AutoMesh.
From the main menu, go to the 2D page and click automesh.
Press F12.

4. At the bottom of the panel, set the toggle to interactive.
Altair Engineering

212
5. In the element size= field, enter 3.5.

6. In the graphics area, select one rib element as indicated in the following image.
7. Select one element on the plane of elements perpendicular to the rib and in the same plane as the
ribs shortest edge as indicated in the following image.
Example of elements to select
8. Complete your selection of elements by clicking elems >> by face.
Elements selected using by face
10. In the density subpanel, left-click on the ribs hypotenuse edge density number to increase it to 9
213

Altair Engineering
11. Left-click on the ribs shortest edge density number to increase it to 5 as indicated in the following
image.
12. Keep all of the other element edge densities the same.
14. Under mesh method, set the last option to free (unmapped).
15. Under mesh method, click set all.
16. Preview the mesh by clicking mesh.
17. Go to the checks subpanel.

18. Check the jacobian, quads: min angle, and quads: max angle.
Altair Engineering

214
Note: None of the elements failed the minimum and maximum angle checks, and only a couple of
the elements have a jacobian of less than 0.7. The smallest jacobian is 0.68, which can still
be considered good quality.
19. Accept the mesh and return to the main menu by clicking return.
Step 8: Use the Smooth panel to adjust the node placement on the
rectangular plane of the remeshed elements.
1. Open the Smooth panel by clicking Mesh > Cleanup Elements > Smooth.
2. Go to the plates subpanel.
3. Activate the smooth: elems selector.
4. Select an element on the rectangular plane of the remeshed elements.
5. Click elems >> by face.
6. In the iterations= field, enter 10.

7. Switch the smoothing algorithm from autodecide to shape corrected.
8. Click smooth.
215

Altair Engineering
9. Click return.
Step 9: Remove tria elements from another area of the model using the edit
element panel, split and combine subpanels.
1. Go to the 2D page.
2. Click edit element.
3. Go to the split subpanel.
4. Verify that the splitting line: points selector is active.
5. Click the four screen points as indicated in the following image. HyperMesh draws temporary line
segments to connect the points.
Tip:
Right-click to undo the last line segment drawn, or click delete line to start over and
reselect points.
6. Click split. HyperMesh splits the elements that have a line passing through them.
Note: The resulting mesh should look like the mesh in the following image, with two pairs of
adjacent tria elements.
7. Go to the combine subpanel.

8. Set the toggle to combine to quad.
Altair Engineering
216
9. Select the two adjacent tria elements as indicated in the following image.
10. Click combine. HyperMesh combines the two tria elements into one quad element.
11. Repeat 11.9 and 11.10 to combine the other two tria elements into one quad element.
12. Click return.
Step 10: Modify washer radius and optimize element quality by using
Cleanup tools.
1. From the 2D page, click qualityindex.
217

Altair Engineering
2. Click cleanup tools.

3. Click modify hole & washers.
4. Clear the edit checkbox.
5. Select a node on the washer as indicated in the following image. The radius field displays a value
of 5.98.
6. Select the edit check box.

7. In the radius field, enter 7.
8. Select the link washers checkbox.
9. Select the remesh number of layers checkbox, and then enter 3 in the editable field.
10. Select a node on the washer as indicated in the previous image. HyperMesh changes the washer's
radius to 7.
Note: Because you selected the link washers checkbox, the hole's radius will change accordingly
(approx. 4.68). Due to the change in the hole's and washer's dimensions, elements around
the washer will be distorted and will fail in quality. You can correct all of the failed elements
in the model using the node optimize and element optimize cleanup tools.
11. Click node optimize.

12. Select a few nodes on the elements that you modified in step 9. When you select a node,
HyperMesh repositions it so that the elements attached to the node will have the best possible
quality based on the criteria specified in the Quality Index panel.
13. Click element optimize.
Altair Engineering

218
14. Select the red and yellow elements in the model. When you select an element, HyperMesh adjusts
it to have the best quality possible based on the criteria specified in the Quality Index panel.
Note: If you select a red element, it may turn yellow or it may no longer have a color assigned. If
you select a yellow element, it may no longer have a color assigned.
15. Click drag tria element.

Note: Use the drag tria element tool to drag a tria element toward a different location in the
model, or out of the model completely.
16. Left-click on a tria element and drag it toward the bottom edge of the model until it is out of the
model completely. HyperMesh highlights the selected tria element in pink.
17. Click return.
Step 11: Add a ring of radial elements around the smaller of the two holes.
1. Open the Utility tab by clicking View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Utility from the menu bar.
2. Click Geom/Mesh.
3. Click Add Washer.
4. In the Add Washer along Circular Holes dialog, double-click Nodes.
5. Select one of the nodes on the edge of the smaller hole as indicated in the following image.
219

Altair Engineering
6. Click proceed. HyperMesh selects nodes around the hole.
7. Under Selection, set the toggle to Width.

8. Under Value, enter 3.0.
9. Select the Minimum number of nodes around the hole checkbox.
10. In the Density field, enter 12.
Settings in the Add Washer along Circular Holes dialog
11. Click Add. HyperMesh creates a washer around the hole.
Altair Engineering

220
12. Click Close.
Step 12: Imprint Mesh to different destinations.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on IMPRINT1 and select Show from the
context menu.
2. Go to the 2D page.
3. Click mesh edit.
4. Go to the imprint subpanel.
Note: Use the imprint subpanel to sync or line up different, overlapping component's meshes in
order to facilitate a better connection modeling between the components.
5. Verify that the source selector is set to comps, and then select the IMPRINT1 component.
6. Verify that the destination selector is set to comps, and then select the shells component.
7. From the remain drop-down list, select destination.
Note: This option takes existing elements/components that can be imprinted into destination
elements/components, and changes their direction and destination.
Original: Violet elements are offset from yellow.
8. Clear the elems to destination comp checkbox.

221

Altair Engineering
9. Click create.
Violet source elements are imprinted in destination (yellow).
10. Click reject.

11. Repeat steps 12.5 and 12.6 to select the IMPRINT1 component as the source and the shells
component as the destination.
12. From the remain drop-down list, select destination.
13. Select the elems to destination comp check box.
Violet source elements are imprinted in destination (yellow), element organized into yellow component.
14. Click reject.

15. Repeat steps 12.5 and 12.6 to select the IMPRINT1 component as the source and the shells
component as the destination.
16. From the remain drop-down list, select source.
17. Select the elems to destination comp checkbox.
Altair Engineering

222
18. Click create.
Yellow destination elements are imprinted to Violet elements, and elements are organized into the yellow component.
19. Click reject

20. Click return.
Step 13: Extend Mesh to different destinations.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on IMPRINT1 and select Hide from the
context menu.
2. Right-click on the EXTEND component and select Show from the context menu.
3. From the 2D page, click mesh edit.
4. Go to the extend subpanel.
Note: Use the extend subpanel to create smoothly-meshed connections between different
components that do not quite touch, but are meant to. Mesh can be imprinted such that both
components are remeshed to match, or the source component is remeshed to match the
destination component, and vice-versa. In addition, you can merge the elements of the
source component into the destination component.
5. Click source: nodes >> by path.
6. On the EXTEND component, select the source nodes indicated in the following image.
7. Verify that the destination selector is set to comps, and then select the shells component.
8. From the projection list, select along vector.
9. Activate the N1 selector.
10. Select N1 and N2, as indicated in the following image, to define the direction.
223

Altair Engineering
11. Clear the remesh extension checkbox.

12. Click create. HyperMesh connects the two parts with one element along the projection, because
the remesh extension checkbox was clear.
13. Click reject.

14. Repeat step 13.5 and 13.11, but select the remesh extension checkbox.
15. Click create. HyperMesh connects the two parts with remeshed elements along the projection,
because the remesh extension option was selected.

With this exercise completed, you can save the model if desired.
Altair Engineering

224
Run the penetration check
Review the intersection results
Fix the intersection results
Interrogate the penetration results
Fix the penetration results
Tools
To access the Penetration panel:
From the menu bar, click Mesh > Check > Components > Penetration.
From the Tool page, select penetration.
Use the Penetration panel to check the integrity of your model, visualize problem areas, and fix
problem areas. You can check elements, components and groups. Typically you would use the group
check to check contact definitions (for example, Abaqus/LS-DYNA).
You can also use this panel to check components for element penetration and intersection. Penetration
and intersection can be used individually or collectively. Penetration is defined as the overlap of the
material thickness of shell elements, while intersection is defined as elements passing completely
through one another.
Example of intersection
Example of penetration
225

Altair Engineering
Strategy
Use the following guidelines for conducting checks:
Checks can be run on both 2D and 3D elements, 2D elements only, or 3D elements only.
Select include self interference to include components that bend and pass through
themselves. This occurs rarely and is expensive when running the check. By default, this
checkbox is cleared.
By default the check is set to all interferences, meaning both intersection and penetration. The
intersections only option and the penetrations only option are also available.
Select allowable interference depth to ignore penetrations and intersections that are less than
the value specified. By default, this checkbox is cleared.
Select uniform thickness to assign a global thickness to all components.
Select thickness multiplier to multiply the existing thicknesses in the model.
When the penetration check is invoked, a new penetration tab opens in the browser area.
The results are split into intersections and penetrations with the number of components that are
clashing in brackets. In the example below, two components are intersecting and eleven components
have material penetration. Expand each section for more detail as to which components have failed.
The ID, Elems, Depth, and Comps columns provide information on which components' IDs are
involved, the number of failed elements, the depth of penetration (not applicable for intersections),
and the number of components affected in the penetration/intersection. Each of the columns can be
sorted by clicking the column header. At the bottom of the tab area there is a message bar which will
detail the status of the check, the number of failed elements, and any warnings and errors as the
checks are invoked.
Altair Engineering

226
Access additional options and tools within the penetration and intersection check by right-clicking in
the Penetration tab. A context menu will appear and provide additional options to fix either
penetrations or intersections, depending on whether the penetration parent/child folder or intersection
folder has been highlighted.
Click Options to configure the display of the tab, fix intersections and penetrations, and change the
display of depenetration vector.
227

Altair Engineering
The fixing of penetrations and intersections falls into two categories: automatic and manual. These
capabilities will be discussed in more detail in the tutorial.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, penetration_check.hm.
Altair Engineering

228
Step 1: Retrieve the model file, penetration_check.hm.

2. In the User Profile dialog, select LsDyna.
Note: This model is a LS-DYNA model, therefore, it is important to select the appropriate user
profile so that HyperMesh can access the actual thickness values of the shell components.
The thickness values are required for material penetration check.
3. Click OK.
5. In the Open Model dialog, open the penetration_check.hm file. A model appears in the graphics
area.
to shade the model's elements and mesh lines.
7. Observe the model using various visualization options available in HyperMesh (rotation, zooming,
and so on).
Step 2: Run the penetration check.

1. Open the Penetration panel by clicking Mesh > Check > Components > Penetration from the
menu bar.
2. Click comps.
3. Select all of the components listed.
4. Click select.
5. Click check. Once the check is complete, the Penetration tab populates with two intersections and
11 penetrations.
The tab is populated by a parent/child or master/slave relationship. As an example, looking at the
intersections, the top line shows the component Rocker Fwd Top Panel RH (parent), and then
below is component Rocker Inner Panel RH (child). It is important to understand that there is
always a reciprocal relationship; the second entry is Rocker Inner Panel RH (parent) and then
the component Rocker Fwd Top Panel RH (child). In this case there is a one-to-one relationship.
It is especially important to understand this when there is a one-to-many relationship (for example,
Rocker Inner Panel RH under penetrations). Clicking the parent component will always show that
component plus all the components below (children). Clicking a child component will show that
component with the parent component only.
229

Altair Engineering
Step 3: Review the intersection results.

1. View all of the intersections by expanding Intersections in the Penetration tab.
Note: Based on which mode is chosen, certain components are displayed on the screen.
Mod
e
Description
Fit View to Failed Elements

Display All Elements
Display Components with Failed
Elements
Display Only Failed Elements
2. Select
(Display Components with Failed Elements) and
(Fit View to Failed Elements).
3. Under Intersections, in the Rocker Fwd Top Panel RH folder, select the Rocker Inner Panel
RH component. HyperMesh automatically fits the screen to the failed intersecting elements.
4. Review other visualization modes by clicking

(Review Failed Elements). The contour and
vector displays are only applicable to intersections. The intersecting elements display as follows:
Altair Engineering
230
Step 4: Fix the intersection results.

HyperMesh includes two methods for fixing intersections: manual and automatic.
To fix intersections manually:
1. Under Intersections, in the Rocker Inner Panel RH folder, select the Rocker Fwd Top Panel
RH component.
2. Ensure that the intersecting entities can be fixed by clicking
(Manual Fix Tools).
Note: Additional tools display for intersection fixing.
3. Click
(Elements from Tree Selection).
Note: You will not pick any additional elements.

4. Click
(Move in Normal Direction) for the direction of movement.
5. For distance value, enter 2.

231

Altair Engineering
6. Click
twice. HyperMesh moves the selected elements in the chosen direction.
Note: After the elements have been moved by a value of 4, they no longer intersect.
7. Click
(Recheck).
8. In the dialog that appears, which reads "Current intersection/penetration results will be lost by
rechecking the model. Would you like to continue?", click Yes.
Note: There are no intersections, and only 11 penetrations remain.
Alternatively, you can use the automatic fixing tools:

1. Reload the file, penetration_check.hm, again.
2. Go to the Penetration panel.
3. Click comps.
4. Select all of the components listed.
5. Click select.
6. Click check. Once the check is complete, the Penetration tab populates with two intersections and
11 penetrations.
7. In the Penetration tab, right-click on the Intersections and select Automatic Recursive
Intersection Fix from the context menu.
8. In the dialog that appears asking if you would like to continue, click Yes.
Note: Automatic Recursive Intersection Fix automatically runs through all of the passes, whereas
the Automatic Intersection Fix runs through one pass at a time. Most fixes require multiple
passes.
Altair Engineering

232
Step 5: Interrogate the penetration results.

1. Expand Penetrations.
2. Select the component, C-Pillar Bot Inner Panel RH. The penetration results will look as follows:
3. View different types of display results for penetration by clicking the following visualization options:
.
contour
233

Altair Engineering
vectors
Remember that the columns can be sorted. For example, if you were only interested in the worst
offending penetrations then sorting by the depth column will reorganize the tree structure, while
still retaining the parent/child relationship.
In this particular example, for component C-Pillar Bot Inner Panel RH, there are 18 elements
that have failed (parent and child), the maximum penetration depth is 0.159, and there is only one
component penetrating.
Step 6: Fix the penetration results.

Within the checking tool there is an automatic penetration fix that will remove the penetrations within
the model. This works by physically moving the failed nodes to new locations to remove the material
penetration. There are two options: automatic penetration fix and automatic recursive
penetration fix. Both will do the same thing, but the automatic option often requires you to use it
several times successively to eliminate all penetrations, while the automatic recursive completes the
fix in one click. However, the iterative option will take longer to complete, because it is essentially
automatically repeating the automatic fix until it reaches a point at which no further improvements
can be made. You also have the option to either fix individual penetrations by clicking on a single
parent branch of the tree, or fix all penetrations at once by clicking and highlighting the complete
Penetrations tree.
In some circumstances, there may be the need to lock or freeze a component that cannot be adjusted
or moved by the fixing tool. To achieve this, right-click on the component and select Lock Component
from the context menu. Once a component is locked, a symbol will appear by the folder indicating that
the component is locked.
Altair Engineering

234
In the previous example, you locked the component, C-Pillar Bot Inner Panel RH. The lock symbol
appears multiple times to correspond with the multiple references to the same component. To unlock
the component, right-click again on the locked component and select Unlock Component from the
context menu. For the purpose of this tutorial you will not be using the lock functionality.
To fix the penetrations in the model you will use the Iterative Fix:
1. In the Penetrations tab, right-click on Penetrations and select Automatic Recursive
Penetration Fix from the context menu.
2. In the dialog that appears, asking if you would like to continue, click Yes.
Note: After the process has finished, a majority of the penetrations have been fixed. Three
penetrations remain which require manual editing to fix.
235

Altair Engineering
Assembly
Altair Engineering

236

Weld the two front trusses to each other by creating connectors at pre-defined weld points
Weld the two front trusses to the reinforcement plate by creating connectors between shell
elements
Weld the right rails to each other and to the front trusses by creating connectors from a master
connectors file
Update weld type of NASTRAN/OPTISTRUCT ACM (area contact method) welds, which already
connect the rear trusses to each other, by first creating connectors from these welds and then
realizing the connectors into two-noded weld elements.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly.hm. Weld the two front trusses by creating
connectors between geometry surfaces at pre-defined weld points.

2. In the User Profile dialog, select OptiStruct.
3. Click OK.
4. Open a model file by clicking File > Open > Model from the menu bar, or click
Standard toolbar.
on the
5. In the Open Model dialog, navigate to <installation_directory>\tutorials\hm and open the

frame_assembly.hm file. A model appears in the graphics area.
237
to shade your model's geometry and surface edges.

Altair Engineering
and so on).
Step 2: Display only the assembly assem_1 for elements and geometry.
1. In the Model browser, click
(Model View).
2. Expand the Assembly Hierarchy folder and sub-folders.

3. Set the entity selection to
Note: This options turns on/off both elements and geometry when you perform right-click
operations in the Model browser.
4. Right-click on assem_1 and select Isolate from the context menu. HyperMesh only displays the
components that are in the assem_1 assembly.
Step 3: Load the Connector Browser.

1. Open the Connectors browser by clicking View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Connector from
the menu bar.
2. Review the layout of the Connector browser. Currently there are no components or connectors
listed because there are no connectors in the model.
Note: Use the Connector browser to view and manage connectors. The top portion of the browser
is referred to as the Link Entity browser, and it displays information about linked entities.
The middle portion is referred to as the Connector Entity browser, and it contains a list of
the connectors in your model. The bottom portion of the browser is referred to as the
Connector Entity Editor, and it displays attributes assigned to the connector(s) selected in
the Connector Entity browser. HyperMesh groups the connectors based on their connection
type.
Altair Engineering

238
Step 4: Create welds between the geometry for the two front trusses at the
pre-defined weld points.
Connectors can be created automatically or manually. The automatic approach creates and realizes
connectors automatically. The manual approach allows you to create and realize connectors manually.
Realization is the process in which the connector creates the weld entity.
Use the Spot, Bolt, Seam, and Area panels to create connectors automatically within the Connector
browser, and use the create and realize subpanels to create connectors manually.
1. Open the Spot panel by right-clicking in the Connector Entity browser and selecting Create >
Spot from the context menu.
2. Go to the spot subpanel.
3. Verify that the current component is Con_Frt_Truss.
Note: The current component is always boldfaced in the Model browser, Component folder.
4. Set the location selector to points.

5. Select the six pre-defined weld points by clicking points >> by collector.
6. Select the component Con_Frt_Truss.
7. Click select.
8. Set the connect what selector to comps.
9. Click comps.
10. Select the components Front_Truss_1 and Front_Truss_2.
11. Click select.
12. In the tolerance = field, enter 5.
Note: The connector will connect any selected entities within this distance of itself.
13. Click type= and select weld.
239

Altair Engineering
14. Under connect what, switch the toggle from elems to geom.
Spot panel settings for steps 4.4 through 4.14.
15. Click create. HyperMesh automatically creates and realizes six connectors (Status bar reads, "6
spot connectors created, 6 realized."), and organizes them as geometry (not elements) in the
current component collector, Con_Frt_Truss.
Note: Green connectors indicate that the creation of the weld entity was successful. There are four
states of connectors: realized (green
), unrealized (yellow
), failed (red
), and
modified ( ). If connectors were created manually, the color of the connectors changes from
yellow to green, which indicates that they are realized into weld elements. As mentioned
above, if you create connectors automatically they will be green immediately as there is no
interim unrealized (yellow) state.
HyperMesh also adds fixed points to the surfaces at the ends of the weld elements to guarantee
connectivity between the weld elements and the shell mesh that will be created on the surfaces.
Weld element with fixed points created on the surfaces
16. Click return.
Step 5: Review the Connector Browser.

1. In the Connector Entity browser, expand the RBAR folder.
Note: The RBAR folder contains the six connectors that you just created. HyperMesh grouped all of
them under RBAR because that is the type of connector created. Notice the IDs of the
connectors in the Entities column, the Links of the connectors, and the State of the
connectors. You may need to increase the size of the tab area to see the State column.
2. In the Link Entity browser, right-click on Front_Truss_1 and select Find from the context menu.
HyperMesh isolates the component in the graphics area and highlights the six connectors in the
Connector Entity browser to indicate that these connectors have Front_Truss_1 as a link.
Altair Engineering

240
3. Right-click on Front_Truss_1 and select Find Attached from the context menu. HyperMesh finds
the components that are attached to Front_Truss_1 through the connectors.
Note: Front_Truss_1 and Front_Truss_2 are now both highlighted in the Link Entity browser,
which indicates that they are displayed in the graphics area.
Step 6: Create a shell mesh on the two front truss components.

1. Open the AutoMesh panel by pressing F12.
3. Set the mesh mode to automatic.
Note: It may currently be set to interactive.
6. In the elem size = field, enter 10.
8. Set the elems to surf comp/elems to current comp toggle to elems to surf comp.
9. Click mesh. HyperMesh meshes the surfaces.
241

Altair Engineering
10. Zoom into the area with a connector and note how the fixed point created from the weld has
ensured that the mesh seeding passes through the weld.
11. Click return.
In this step you will display the reinforcement plate that needs to be welded to the two front trusses.
1. In the Model browser, set the entity selection to
2. Right-click on assem_2 and select Isolate from the context menu.
Weld the two front trusses to the reinforcement plate.
Step 8: Create connectors between the shell mesh of the front trusses and
the reinforcement plate at pre-defined points.
In this step you will manually create connectors between the shell elements of the front trusses and
reinforcement plate at pre-defined weld points.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on Con_Truss_Plate and select Make
Current from the context menu.
2. Open the Spot panel.
3. Go to the create subpanel.
4. Set the location selector to points.
5. Click points >> by collector
6. Select the component Con_Truss_Plate.
7. Click select.
9. Click comps.
10. Select the components: Front_Truss_1, Front_Truss_2, and Reinf_Plate.
11. Click select.
12. Under connect what, switch the toggle from geom to elems.
13. Set the num layers to total 2.
14. Set connect when to now.
15. Click create. HyperMesh creates eight spot connectors with comp links (Status bar reads "8 spot
connectors created with comps links.") at the selected weld points, and organizes them into the
current component collector, Con_Truss_Plate.
Altair Engineering

242
Note: In the Connector Entity browser, these eight connectors are currently grouped as
undefined.
16. In the Connector Entity browser, expand the undefined folder.
Note: The connectors in this folder are colored yellow, which indicates that they are unrealized.
Step 9: Realize the connectors in the component Con_Truss_Plate into weld

elements.
In this step you will realize the undefined, unrealized connectors and assign them a connector type.
1. In the Connector Entity browser, select the following unrealized connectors: 7, 8, 11, and 12.
Hint: These connectors are displayed along the top of the Reinf_Plate component.
2. In the Entity Editor:
Set Config Name to weld.
For Tolerance, enter 7.
Set Connectivity to mesh dependent.
Set Adjust Option to adjust realization.
Set Adjust Realization to project and find nodes

Note: When this option is active, the nodes will be equivalenced if the realized finite element of
the connector is coincident to a node of the shell mesh it is being connected to. If there
are no suitable nodes present, the closest node of the element the projection is landing is
connected.
3. In the Connector Entity browser, right-click on the selected connectors and select Rerealize from
the context menu. The selected connectors realize into the weld elements.
Note: The mesh has not been remeshed to connect the two components.
243

Altair Engineering
4. In the Connector Entity browser, select the four remaining unrealized connectors (9, 10, 13, 14).
Hint: These connectors are displayed along the bottom of the Reinf_Plate component.
Set Adjust Option to adjust mesh.
Set Adjust mesh to remesh.
6. In the Connector Entity browser, right-click on the unrealized connectors and select Rerealize
from the context menu. HyperMesh realizes the selected connectors, and remeshes the mesh to
connect the two components.
The two front trusses welded to the reinforcement plate with weld elements at the connectors
Altair Engineering
to shade your model's elements and mesh lines.

244
Weld the two right rails to each other and to the two front trusses by creating connectors from a master connectors file.
Step 11: Create connectors to connect the right rails to each other and to
the front trusses by importing a master connectors file.
1. From the menu bar, click File > Import > Connectors.
in the File field.
3. In the Select connector file dialog, open the rails_frt_truss.mwf file.

4. Click Import. HyperMesh imports connectors and organizes them into a new component,
CE_Locations.
Note: It will take a few seconds for HyperMesh to import the connectors.
Step 12: Realize the connectors in the component CE_Locations into weld
elements.
245

Altair Engineering
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on CE_Locations and select Make Current
2. In the Connector Entity browser, click the undefined folder. The Entity Editor opens and
displays the undefined connectors corresponding data.
Set Config Name to Weld.
Set Adjust Option to adjust realization.
Set Adjust Realization to project and find nodes.
the context menu.
Right rails welded to each other and to the front trusses with weld elements at the connectors
Weld to the two front trusses by duplicating and reflecting selected connectors created from the master connectors file
Step 14: Create a new component collector to hold new connectors.

HyperMesh creates and opens a component in the Entity Editor.
Altair Engineering

246
Note: HyperMesh makes this new component, the current component.

2. For Name, enter CE_Locations_Dup.
3. Click the Color icon, and select a color.
Step 15: Duplicate the connectors created from the master connectors file
and reflect them.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on CE_Locations and select Show from the
context menu.
2. Open the Reflect panel by clicking Connectors > Reflect > Connectors from the menu bar.
3. Set the entity selector to connectors.
4. Click connectors >> by collector.
5. Select CE_Locations.
6. Click select.
7. Click connectors >> duplicate >> current comp. HyperMesh duplicates the displays the
connectors, and organizes them into the current component, CE_Locations_Dup.
8. Set the orientation selector to x-axis.
Note: This is the axis normal to the plane of interest.
9. Specify a base node to reflect about by double-clicking B.
10. Click x=. HyperMesh activates the x=, y=, and z= fields.
Note: Their values are all 0.000 by default, which is the base point you want to reflect about.
11. Return to the reflect panel by clicking return.
12. Click reflect. HyperMesh reflects the connectors.
13. Click return.
Note: The connectors are yellow, which indicates that they are unrealized.
Step 16: Update the connectors for the left rails to link them to the left rail
components.
2. Sort the connectors by their state by clicking State. HyperMesh organizes all of the realized
connectors at the top of the list.
Tip:
You may need to increase the size of the tab area to see the State column.
3. Click State again. HyperMesh organizes all of the unrealized connectors at the top of the list.
4. In the Link1 and Link2 columns, review the the unrealized connectors.
Note: Some of the connectors are linked to the components, Right_Rail_1 and Right_Rail_2.
This data is from the rails_frt_truss.mwf file that you imported. These links need to be
updated to reflect the components, Left_Rail_1 and Left_Rail_2.
247

Altair Engineering
5. Select all of the unrealized connectors in the list.
6. In the Entities column, right-click on the selected connectors and select Update Link from the
context menu.
7. In the Update window, Search column, set the Link Type to comps.
8. In the Search column, click the Link Select field.
9. In the panel area, click component.
10. Select the component, Right_Rail_1.
11. Click proceed. HyperMesh inserts Right_Rail_1 into the Link Select field.
12. In the Replace column, set the Link Type to comps.
13. In the Replace column, click the Link Select field.
15. Select the component, Left_Rail_1.
16. Click proceed. HyperMesh inserts Left_Rail_1 into the Link Select field.
17. Click Update. HyperMesh updates the connectors' links.

18. Repeat 16.7 through 16.17, except search for the Right_Rail_2 component and replace it with the
Left_Rail_2 component.
19. Scroll through the list of unrealized connectors to make sure that none of the connectors are linked
to the right rail components.
20. Close the Update window by clicking X next to Update.
Altair Engineering

248
Step 17: Realize the connectors in the component CE_Locations_Dup into

weld elements.
1. In the Connector Entity browser, select all of on the unrealized connectors, which are organized in
the CE_Locations_Dup component. The Entity Editor opens and displays selected connectors
common attributes.
3. In the Connector Entity browser, right-click on the selected unrealized connectors and select
Rerealize from the context menu. HyperMesh realizes the selected connectors into weld elements.
Step 18: Verify that all connectors are realized and identify the pairs of
adjacent connectors.
2. From the State column, verify that all of the connectors are realized.
3. Zoom into one of the two areas where the front trusses are connected to the rail components.
Note: At these two areas, there are pairs of adjacent connectors.
5. In the Visualization tab, click
(Visualization Options).
(Connectors).
6. Under Color by, select Layer. HyperMesh changes the connectors color to purple because under
Layers, 2t is defined by the color purple.
Note: This option indicates that each of these connectors link two components. Because each pair
of connectors creates a series of two weld elements, you can combine each pair into a single
connector, which links the three components together.
Step 19: Isolate the pairs of adjacent 2t connectors identified in the

previous step.
1. In the Model browser, turn off the geometry display for all of the components.
2. In the Link Entity browser, select Front_Truss_1, Front_Truss_2, Right_Rail_1, and
Left_Rail_1.
3. Right-click and select Find Between from the context menu. HyperMesh finds and displays 12
connectors between the four components you selected.
Step 20: Unrealize the displayed connectors.

1. Open the Unrealize panel by clicking Connectors > Unrealize from the menu bar.
2. Click connectors >> displayed.
249
Altair Engineering
Note: The Status bar reads "12connectors added by 'displayed'. Total selected 12."
3. Click unrealize. HyperMesh unrealizes the connectors, and deletes the weld elements associated to
them.
4. Click return.
Step 21: Combine the pairs of adjacent 2t connectors into 3t connectors.

1. Open the Connector Quality panel by clicking Connectors > Check > Connector Quality from
the menu bar.
2. Go to the connectors (unrealized) subpanel.
5. Click preview combine. HyperMesh finds 12 connectors that need to be combined.
Note: The status bar reads, "12 connector(s) found that need to be combined."
6. Click combine. HyperMesh combines the connectors, and displays them in a dark blue color to
indicate that they have three layers.
Note: The status bar reads, "6 connectors deleted."
7. Optional: If the connectors are not visible, right-click in the Link Entity browser and select Find
Between.
8. Click return.
Step 22: Realize the 3t connectors in the component Con_Frt_Truss into

weld elements.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on Con_Frt_Truss and select Make
2. In the Connector Entity browser, select the 6 unrealized connectors. The Entity Editor opens and
displays the selected connectors common attributes.
the context menu. HyperMesh realizes the connectors.
5. Verify that there are now three links for the six connectors you just updated.
7. In the Visualization tab, click
(Visualization Options).
(Connectors).
8. Under Color by, select State.
Altair Engineering

250
Step 24: Create connectors from existing ACM welds.

In this step you will use the Fe Absorb tool to obtain connectors from the existing ACM welds
(elements) in the component, Con_Rear_Truss.
1. From the menu bar, click Connectors > Fe Absorb.
2. In the Automated Connector Creation and FE Absorption dialog, set FE configs to custom.
3. Set FE type to optistruct 69-71 acm.
4. Toggle the Elem filter from All to Select.
5. Double-click Elements.
6. In the panel area, click elems >> by collector.
7. Select the component, Con_Rear_Truss.
8. Click select.
9. Click proceed.
10. Select the Move connectors to FE component checkbox.
11. Click Absorb. HyperMesh absorbs the elements into realized, 2t connectors at the locations of the
ACM welds, and organizes them into the Con_Rear_Truss component, the same component to
which the ACMs belong.
12. Click Close.

251

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial, you will learn how to apply an adhesive connection to the left rails.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly_1.hm. Area connectors must be meshed in order to
work properly. When the connectors location is existing FE mesh elems, the connector automatically
gets meshed to match the elements chosen. However, after creating an area connector on surfs, lines,
or along nodes, you must use the automesh options (which display when you select one of these
locations types) to create a mesh on the connector area.
area
Create and realize area connectors in a single process.
create
Create, but not realize, area connectors.
realize
Create FE representations of previously-created area

connectors.

3. Click OK.
4. Open a model file by clicking File > Open > Model from the menu bar, or clicking
Standard toolbar.
on the

frame_assembly_1.hm file. A model appears in the graphics area.
and so on).

the menu bar.
Note: You can use the Connector browser to view and manage the connectors in your model. The
top portion of the browser is referred to as the Link Entity browser, and it displays
information about the linked entities in your model. The middle portion is referred to as the
Connector Entity browser, and it contains a list of the connectors in your model. The
bottom portion of the browser is referred to as the Connector Entity Editor, and it displays
attributes assigned to the connector(s) selected in the Connector Entity browser. HyperMesh
groups the connectors based on their connection type.
Altair Engineering

252
Step 3: Create an adhesive connection between component Left_Rail_1 and

Left_Rail_2 on the top flange.
1. In the Model browser, Components folder, isolate Left_Rail_1 and Left_Rail_2.
2. Zoom into an area displaying the two flanges and inspect the elements to be joined.
HyperMesh creates and opens a component in the Entity Editor.
Note: HyperMesh makes this new component, the current component.
4. For Name, enter area_edit_panel.
5. Open the Area panel by right-clicking in the Connector Entity browser and selecting Create >
Area from the context menu.
6. Set the location selector to elems.
7. Select one element on the top flange of the Left_Rail_1 component as indicated in the following
image.
8. Click elems >> by face. HyperMesh selects the entire flange.

253

Altair Engineering

10. Click comps.
11. Select the components, Left_Rail_1 and Left_Rail_2.
12. Click select.

13. In the tolerance= field, enter 10.
14. Click type= and select adhesives.
15. Set the hexa thickness to shell gap.
Note: This option projects directly to the shell component and takes no account of the thickness of
the shell components.
16. Click create. HyperMesh creates a new adhesive area connector.

17. Click return.
18. Inspect the new adhesive.
19. In the Connector Entity browser, right-click on the adhesive connector and select Unrealize from
the context menu. The connector becomes unrealized, and the Entity Editor opens and displays
the selected connectors corresponding attributes.
Altair Engineering

254
Set Hexa Thickness Option to (T1+T2)/2.

Note: (T1+T2)/2 takes into account the thickness of each shell part.
For Coats, enter 3.

Note: This option increases the number of hexas through thickness from 1 to 3.
21. In the Connector Entity browser, right-click on the unrealized adhesive connector and select
Rerealize from the context menu.
For the other set of flanges you will manually create an area connector and mesh it accordingly.
Step 4: Create an adhesive connection between component Left_Rail_1 and

Left_Rail_2 on the bottom flange.
1. Go to the area panel.
2. Set the location selector to nodes.
3. Click node list >> by path.
4. Select the row of nodes on the outer flange of the Left_Rail_1 component by first selecting the left
most node on the bottom flange of Left_Rail_1 and then selecting the right-most node on the
bottom flange as indicated in the following image.
5. In the width= field, enter 10.

6. In the offset= field, enter 3.
7. Next to connect what, click comps.
8. Select Left_Rail_1 and Left_Rail_2.
255

Altair Engineering
9. Click select.
10. Click create.
Note: The default mesh size for these mesh independent area connectors (when choosing by
nodes/lines/surfs) is 10. However, you can specify a different elem size if needed.
11. Go to the edit subpanel.
12. Select remesh.
13. Use the location: connectors selector to select the area connector you just created in step 4.10.
15. Click mesh.

Note: Connector unrealizes if there is a pre-exising mesh.
16. In the Connector Entity browser, select the unrealized connector.
Set Hexa Thickness Option to const_thickness.
For Const Thickness, enter 0.3.
18. In the Connector Entity browser, right-click on the unrealized connector and select Rerealize
19. Inspect the new adhesive created.
Note: When creating area connectors from elements, HyperMesh automatically meshes the area
connector using the current mesh. If the area connector is created from nodes, lines, or
surfaces and the default mesh is unsuitable from the area subpanel, then you can apply a
manual mesh.
Altair Engineering

256

In this tutorial, you will learn how to apply a bolted connection to two rear trusses.
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly_2.hm. The Bolt panel creates connectors based on
holes within the connected components, using spiders or washers at each end of an RBE connector.
When the Bolt panel is active, only bolt-type connectors display in the graphics area; graphics for
other connector types are suppressed until you exit the panel. The Bolt panel contains three
subpanels:
bolt
Create and realize bolt connectors in a single process.
create
Create, but not realize, bolt connectors.
realize
Create FE representations of previously-created bolt connectors.

3. Click OK.
Standard toolbar.
on the

and so on).
Create a bolted connection between the two rear truss parts.
257

Altair Engineering
(Model View).
2. Expand the Assembly Hierarchy folder and sub-folders.

3. Set the entity selection to
Note: This options turns on/off both elements and geometry when you perform right-click
operations in the Model browser.
4. Right-click on assem_5 and select Isolate from the context menu. HyperMesh only displays the
components that are in the assem_5 assembly.
5. Right-click on the Con_Rear_Truss component and select Make Current from the context menu.

the menu bar.
Altair Engineering

258
Step 4: Create a bolt connector.

1. Open the Bolt panel by right-clicking in the Connector Entity browser and selecting Create >
Bolt from the context menu.
2. Set the location selector to nodes.
3. Select a node on the edge of the hole in the Rear_Truss_1 component as indicated in the
following image.

5. Click comps.
6. Select the components, Rear_Truss_1 and Rear_Truss_2.
7. Click select.
8. In the tolerance= field, enter 50.
9. Click type= and select bolt (general).
Note: Re-realizing the connector will allow you to see the different bolt types.
10. Click realize & hole detect details.
11. In the max dimension = field, enter 60 to ensure that the diameter of the picked hole will be
captured.
12. Click return.
259

Altair Engineering
13. Click create.

Note: Ensure the display of the current component is turned on.
Bolted connection
14. To access the main menu, click return.
Altair Engineering

260

Replace the rear truss component, Rear_Truss_1, with a new, similar part and then update the
affected connectors.
Export the connector information
Export the FE deck and view the connector information in the deck
After the modeling of the assembly is complete, a design change might be made to any one of the
parts. When this occurs, you must replace the current part(s) in the model with the new, similar one(s)
and update the affected connections (welds).
Exercise
This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly_3.hm. A new part is needed in the assembly. In
this tutorial you will learn how to delete the original component, import a new part, and update the
connections. You will also export the connector information to a single file, and then export the entire
FE input deck and observe how the connector information is preserved.

3. Click OK.
Standard toolbar.
on the

and so on).

the menu bar.
261

Altair Engineering
Step 3: Import rear_truss_1_new.hm to set up the link update.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on Rear_Truss_1 and select Isolate from
the context menu.
2. From the menu bar, click File > Import > Model.
3. Under File selection, click
4. In the Open dialog, open the file, rear_truss_1_new.hm.

5. Click Import. HyperMesh imports rear_truss_1_new on top of rear_truss_1.
Altair Engineering

262
Step 4: Using the Connector Browser, update the connector links to the new
component.
1. In the Connector browser, Link Entity browser, right-click on Rear_Truss_1 and select Find
Attached from the context menu.
2. In the Connector Entity browser, right-click on any of the highlighted connector names and select
Update Link from the context menu.
3. In the Update window, click the Link Select field in the Search column.

5. Select the component, Rear_Truss_1.
6. Click proceed. HyperMesh inserts Rear_Truss_1 into the Link Select field.
7. In the Replace column, click the Link Select field.

9. Select Rear_Truss_1.1.
10. Click proceed. HyperMesh inserts Rear_Truss_1.1 in the Link Select field.
11. Click Update. HyperMesh updates the connector links.

12. Close the Update window by clicking X next to Update.
Step 5: Realize the connectors in the component Con_Rear_Truss.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, right-click on Con_Rear_Truss and select Make
2. Open the Spot panel by right-clicking in the Connector Entity browser and selecting Create >
Spot from the context menu.
3. Go to the realize subpanel.
5. Click type= and select weld.
263

Altair Engineering

7. Set the mesh dependent/mesh independent toggle to mesh dependent.
8. Under mesh dependent, set the adjust realization/adjust mesh toggle to adjust realization.
9. Click realize. HyperMesh realizes the connectors.
Step 6: Save the connector information to an XML file.

1. At the bottom of the Connector browser, click
(Export connectors -XML).
2. In the Export to file dialog, navigate to the location where you would like to save the XML file and
click Save.
3. In a text editor, open the XML file.
4. Inspect the file and observe how the connector information has been saved.
Note: In the future, you can use the XML file to import connectors.
Step 7: Export the finite element deck and observe how the connector
information is preserved.
1. From the menu bar, click File > Export > Solver Deck.
3. From the Template list, select standard format.
4. In the File field, click
5. In the Save OptiStruct file dialog, select a name and location for the file to be saved to.
Note: Be sure to use the .fem extension.
6. To view additional export options, click
next to Export Options.
7. Select the Include connectors check box.

8. Click Export.
9. In a text editor, open the .fem file you just saved.
10. Scroll to the very bottom. This is where all of the connector information has been saved. The
information has been saved as comment cards so that when you run the analysis, the connector
information is not read. When you import the input deck back into HyperMesh, the connector
information is read.
Altair Engineering

264

Import a PLMXML file.
Load and create a Common representation and NVH representation for modal analysis
Import connector parts, add connector representations, and realize connectors
Edit part attributes using the Entity Editor to reflect design changes
Activate configurations
Import and Export an assembly as a Solver Deck
Renumber entities using the ID-Manager
Check for errors using the Model Checker
Exercise
This tutorial uses the following files.
BOM_input.xml
Connectors.hm
Realizations.hm
Center_Rail_Conn_v1.xml
Longitudinal_Rail_Connectors.xml
Step 1: Start HyperMesh Desktop and Load the OptiStruct User Profile
1. Start HyperMesh Desktop 14.0.
3. Click OK.
Step 2: Import the PLMXML File

1. Open the Import - BOM tab by clicking File > Import > BOM from the menu bar.
2. In the File field, navigate to <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ and open the BOM_input.xml
file.
3. Click Import. Part assemblies and parts are imported into the session.
265

Altair Engineering
Step 3: Load and Create a Common Representation

Steps 4 and 5 below are optional as the Common representation can be created without loading the
CAD into the session. Since the Common representation forms the basis of subsequent discipline
specific mesh representations, its creation is a prerequisite for the next steps.
1. Open the Part browser by clicking View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Part from the menu bar.
2. In the Part browser, right-click and select Column Visibility from the context menu.
3. In the Column Visibility dialog, select the following columns: PDM PID, PDM MID, PDM
Material, and PDM Thickness. These columns show the PDM metadata that is parsed upon
importation of the PLMXML file. This information is also shown in the Entity Editor, PDM Data
pane.
4. Right-click on the Frame_Assembly_Config_A_000425_Safety part assembly and select

Representations > Load from the context menu.
5. In the Change Representations dialog, Load tab, select the CAD representation.
6. Click OK. All available CAD representations are imported into the session.
Altair Engineering

266

Representations > Create from the context menu.
8. In the Change Representations dialog, Create tab, set the Representations field to Common
(0/8).
9. Click OK. Available CAD representations are sent to the BatchMesher for processing.
Note: In the case of sheet metal parts, the BatchMesher extracts the midsurface from the solid
CAD representation.
10. In the BatchMesh dialog, click Yes to load the new representations for the eight parts.
Step 4: Create a NVH Representation for Modal Analysis

2. In the Change Representations dialog, Create tab, set the Representations field to NVH
15mm (0/8).
3. Click OK. Available NVH representations are sent to the BatchMesher for processing.
267

Altair Engineering
4. In the BatchMesh dialog, click No. The new NVH 15mm representations will not be loaded into the
session, but they have been added to the repository. If you invoke the Load tab of the Change
Representations dialog, you will see that eight NVH 15mm representations have been created.

6. In the Change Representations dialog, Create tab, set the Representations field to NVH
10mm (0/8).
7. Click OK. Available NVH representations are sent to the BatchMesher for processing.
8. In the BatchMesh dialog, click Yes to load the new NVH 10mm representations for the eight parts
into the session.
9. Verify that component, property, and material entities have been created by checking the relevant
columns in the Part browser (CID, PID, MID, Material and Thickness). Compare their values with
those shown in the PDM metadata columns (PDM PID, PDM MID, PDM Material and PDM Thickness).
Step 5: Import Connector Parts

1. Open the Import Model tab.
2. Click
file.
, then navigate to <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ and open the Connectors.hm
3. Click Import.
4. In the Part browser, you will see the newly imported connector parts.
Altair Engineering

268
Step 6: Add Connector Representations

1. In the Part browser, right-click on the Center Rail Connectors v1 part and select Representations
> Add from the context menu.
2. In the Add Representations dialog, set the Representation and File Type fields to Connector.
3. In the Representation File field, navigate to <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/connectors/
and open the Center_Rail_Conn_v1.xml file.
4. Click OK. A component containing connectors has been added to the part.
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 to add connector representations to the Center Rail Connectors v2 and
Longitudinal Rail Connectors parts using the following representation files.
Part
Representation File
Center Rail Connectors v2
Longitudinal Rail Connectors
Longitudinal_rail_connectors.xml
Step 7: Design change - modify Center Rail part attributes

269

Altair Engineering
1. In the Part browser note the PID of parts CenterInner_var2_A_000431_Safety and

CenterOuter_var2_A_000432_Safety.
2. In the Model browser, switch the view mode to Properties.

3. Select PID 103 and 104. The Entity Editor opens and displays the two properties common
corresponding attributes.
4. In the Entity Editor, T field, enter 3.0.

5. In the Part browser, notice the attribute modification you made is updated in the Thickness
columns. Save these changes to ensure that they are available if the current representation is
unloaded.
Altair Engineering

270
6. Right-click on the CenterRail_var2_A_000430_Safety part assembly and select Representations >

Save from the context menu. The checkmark in the Available column indicates that the
representation already exists in the part repository.
7. Select the Overwrite available checkbox.

8. Click OK.
Step 8: Activate the var2 Configuration

1. In the Part browser, Active column, clear the checkbox for the CenterRail_var1_A_000427_Safety
part assembly and Center Rail Connector v1 part.
Step 9: Export Assembly as a Solver Deck

1. Open the Export Solver Deck tab by clicking File > Export > Solver Deck from the menu bar.
2. In the File field, enter frame_var2_model.fem.
3. Under Export Options:
Set Export to Custom to ensure that inactive parts are not written to the solver deck.
Under Comments, select the Part Assemblies/Parts checkbox.
4. Click Export.
5. Save the model as frame_assembly.hm.
271

Altair Engineering
Step 10: Import Assembly Solver Deck

1. Start a new HyperMesh Desktop session.
2. Open the Import Solver Deck tab by clicking File > Import > Solver Deck from the menu
bar.
3. In the File field, locate the frame_var2_model.fem solver deck.
4. Click Import.
5. In the Part browser, verify that the BOM was correctly created upon import.
Note: All part assembly and part metadata in the original model should be present, with the
exception of the Representation name.
Step 11: Import Realizations

1. Open the Import - Model tab.
2. Click
file.
, then navigate to <install_directory>/tutorials/hm/ and open the Realizations.hm
3. The Spotweld component, in the Realizations.hm file, references a material that has the same ID
as a material that already exists in the current session, therefore under Entity Management, set
Materials to Keep Existing Attributes.
4. Click Import. Connector parts are imported and organized in the Part browser.
Altair Engineering

272
Step 12: Realize Connectors

1. In the Part browser, right-click on the Spotwelds component and select Make Current from the
context menu.
2. In the Part browser, right-click on the Longitudinal_Rail_Connectors component and select Hide
from the context menu. The display of the components connectors is turned off in the graphics
area enabling you to get a better visual of each component's connectors.
3. Open the Connector browser by clicking View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Connectors from
the menu bar.
4. In the Connector Entity browser, select the acm (shell gap) connector folder.
Set Property Script to no/skip post script.
Set Element Organize to elems to current comp.
Note: Connector links are defined via Parts to ensure that connectors realize even if you,
accidentally, renumber all of the entities in the model.
6. In the Connector Entity browser, select all of the connectors.

7. Right-click on the selected connectors and select Rerealize from the context menu.
8. In the Part browser, right-click on the Spotwelds part and select Isolate Only from the context
menu. Verify that the realized FE resides in the Spotwelds component.
Step 13: Renumber Nodes and Elements

1. Open the ID-Manager by clicking Tools > ID-Manager from the context menu.
2. In the ID-Manager, select Components, Properties, and Materials then right-click and select
Exclude from the context menu.
273

Altair Engineering
3. For the Master Model, enter 1,000,000 in the Min field and 1,500,000 in the Max field.
4. Set the Correction Option for Nodes and Elements to Insert in Gaps.
5. Correct ID overflow by right-clicking on the Master Model and selecting Correct > Overflow from
the context menu.
Step 14: Run the Model Checker

1. Open the Model Checker by clicking Tools > Model Checker > OptiStruct.
2. In the Model Checker tab, click
3. Verify that the model is error free.
Step 15: Export the Solver Deck

2. In the Export Solver Deck tab, File field, enter the file name frame_var2_assembled.fem.
3. Under Export options, Comments, select the Part Assemblies/Parts checkbox.
4. Click Export.
Altair Engineering

274
Morphing
HM-3520: Sculpting
HM-3635: Working with a HyperMesh and HyperMorph Model in HyperStudy
HM-3695: Working with a Parameterized File Model for Shape Variables in HyperStudy
275

Altair Engineering

Exercise: Translating Nodes to Increase the Length of a Propeller Blade
In this tutorial, you will increase the length of a propeller blade by 100 units, using freehand morphing.
Figure 1: Original blade
Figure 2: Blade after morphing
Step 1: Load the model.

Standard toolbar.
on the

propeller.hm file. A model appears in the graphics area.
Step 2: Morph the blade.

Method 1: Fixed value based
1. Open the move nodes subpanel by clicking Morphing > Free Hand from the menu bar.
2. Set the morphing method to translate.
3. In the z= field, enter -100.

Altair Engineering

276
5. Use the moving nodes and fixed nodes selectors to select the nodes indicated in the following
image.
Figure 3: Node and element selections.
6. Use the affected elements selector to select the elements between the fixed nodes and moving
nodes.
7. In the mv bias and fx bias fields, keep the default values (1.00).
8. Click morph. HyperMesh alters the blade of the propeller.
Note: The length of the propeller blade increased by 100. The fixed nodes did not move.
HyperMesh stretched the affected elements evenly to maintain element quality. The
stretching of the elements took place between the moving nodes and the fixed nodes.
9. Restore the propeller back to its original shape by clicking undo.
Method 2: Interactive graphic manipulator base

10. In the move nodes subpanel, set the morphing method to manipulator.
11. Leave the other parameters and options set to their default values.
13. Use the moving nodes and fixed nodes selectors to select the nodes indicated in the following
image.
Figure 3: Node and element selections.
14. Use the affected elements selector to select the elements between the fixed nodes and moving
nodes. A manipulator appears.
277

Altair Engineering
15. Optional: Move the manipulator to a different location by activating the origin: nodes selector and
selecting another node as the origin.
16. Zoom in and rotate close the manipulator area.
17. Translate the nodes by clicking and dragging one of the three yellow arrows of the manipulator.
18. Rotate the nodes about the center of the manipulator by clicking and dragging one of the three
yellow arcs of the manipulator.
19. Click undo.

20. Move the nodes in a plane by clicking and dragging one of the three yellow right angles of the
manipulator.
Altair Engineering

278
21. Create more than one manipulator at a time by setting the single manipulator/multiple toggle to
multiple.
22. Create a new manipulator by clicking new manip and selecting one or more moving nodes.
Note: The different manipulators may have different selected entities and different parameters,
and can be moved independently of one another.
23. Move a manipulator by clicking a manipulator or simply moving your mouse over a manipulator.
HyperMesh updates the panel to the parameters associated to that manipulator. You can change
the parameters or the entities associated with them if you desire.
24. Make manipulators active or inactive by switching the manip:active/manip:inactive toggle. When
active, the manipulators morph the model when you move them. When inactive, the manipulators
will only change their own position and orientation when you move them.
Summary
Method 1: The length of the propeller blade increased by 100. The fixed nodes did not move. The
affected elements were stretched evenly to maintain element quality. The stretching of the elements
took place between the moving nodes and the fixed nodes.
Method 2: The length of the propeller blade increased depending on how you dragged the handles
along the three arrows, arcs, or right angles of the manipulator to respectively translate, rotate, or
move the nodes. The fixed nodes did not move. The affected elements were stretched evenly to
maintain element quality. The stretching of the elements took place between the moving nodes and
the fixed nodes.
279

Altair Engineering
HM-3520: Sculpting
Exercise: Conforming a Seat to a Dummy Profile
The objective of this exercise is to take a dummy pelvis profile and imprint it onto a seat.
Figure 1: Seat before and after sculpting
Step 1: Load and review the model.

Open the HyperMesh file, dummy_position_solid.hm.
Step 2: Morph the seat.

1. From the menu bar, click Morphing > Free Hand.
2. Go to the sculpting subpanel.
3. Set the sculpting tool to mesh.
4. For the sculpting tool, select all of the elements in the dummy collector (Figure 2).
5. For affected elements, select all of the elements in the seat collector (Figure 2).
6. For the base point as well as the tool path: node list, choose a node on the dummy (Figure 2).
7. Define a sculpt direction for your seat using N1 N2 (Figure 2).
8. Set your taper angle to 85 (degrees).
9. Verify that mesh compression is set to compress by factor.
10. Set mesh compr= to 0.5.
Figure 2: Setting up the model for morphing
Altair Engineering

280
10. Click move+ to complete the morphing operation.
Figure 3: Seat after sculpting
11. Review the obtained mesh quality.
Summary
Using just a few steps you have been able to take a fairly complicated profile and impose it on to
another mesh.
281

Altair Engineering
Exercise: Changing the Curvature of a Bumper to a Curved Line

In this exercise, you will use the line difference approach to morph a bumper to conform to a new
section line.
Figure 1: Bumper before and after morphing

Open the HyperMesh file, bumper_morphing.hm.
Step 2: Morph the bumper.

1. Open the map to geom panel by clicking Morphing > Map to Geometry from the menu bar.
2. Change the geometry selector to line difference.
3. Select the from line (Line A) and the to line (Line B) as shown in figure 2.
4. Toggle the morphing entity (2nd column) from map domains to map nodes.
5. Select nodes >> displayed.
6. Use no fixed nodes (2nd column, 2nd row).
7. Use map by line axis morphing with a 1.0 mvbias and fxbias (column 3).
Figure 2: The from line and the to line
8. Click map.
Summary
The profile of the bumper is changed to follow the new section line.
Altair Engineering

282

Exercise: Changing the Profile of the Roof of a Car
In this tutorial, you will use map to sections to change the profile of the car roof.
Figure 1: Car model.

Open the HyperMesh file, car_section.hm.
Step 2: Morph the roof.

1. Click Morphing > Map to Geometry to access the Map to geom panel.
2. Change the mapping section type to map to sections.
3. Under map to sections, toggle lines to line list.
4. Switch map domains to map elements (2nd column).
5. Toggle no fixed nodes to fixed nodes (2nd column).
6. Keep blend all option selected.
7. Keep rotate nodes active.
8. Keep the 3rd column selector set to map by line normal.
9. Click first line list button and select Line A and Line B on the model.
10. Under to: click the second line list button and select Line A and Line B on the model.
Lines should be selected in the same order.
11. Under map to elements click the elems button and select elements by collector.
12. Pick collector Roof. (This may be located on the second page of collectors)
13. Click select.
14. Click the XZ Right Plane View (
) icon to set the view
15. For fixed nodes use Shift + Left Mouse Button to select all the nodes as shown in figure 2.
Figure 2: Selection for fixed nodes
283

Altair Engineering
16. Click map.
Summary
The roof of the car has been morphed while the mesh quality has been maintained.
Altair Engineering

284
Exercise: Changing the Shape of the B-pillar with the Help of Morph Volume
This exercise shows how to smoothly change the shape of a B-pillar via morph volumes.
B-Pillar before and after morphing

2. To open a model file, click File > Open > Model from the menu bar, or click
toolbar.
on the Standard

body_side.hm file. A model appears in the graphics area.
Step 2: Create morph volumes.

1. To open the Morph Volumes panel, click Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes from the menu
bar.
2. Set the creation method to pick on screen.
3. Set handle placement to corners only.

4. Select the auto-tangent check box.
6. Click the four red circles indicated in the image below to draw a window. HyperMesh creates a
morph volume, which encloses the area.
285

Altair Engineering
Points for creating the morph volume
Step 3: Split the morph volumes.

1. Go to the split/combine subpanel.
2. Set the by nodes/by edge toggle to by edges
3. Select an edge of the morph volume close to location 1 as indicated in the following image. A green
colored cross moves to the location of the black dot.
Locations to split the morph volume
4. Click split. HyperMesh splits the morph volume into two.

5. Repeat steps 3.3 and 3.4, except select an edge of the morph volume close to location 2 as
indicated in the previous image.
Altair Engineering

286
Step 4: Change the profile of the b-pillar.

Method 1: Fixed value based
1. To open the Morph panel, click Morphing > Morph from the menu bar.
2. Go to the move handles subpanel.
3. Set the morphing method to translate.
4. Set the orientation selector to along xyz.

5. In the y val= field, enter 100.
6. Leave the x val= and z val= fields set to 0.
7. Press and hold SHIFT, then drag your mouse around the the eight handles indicated in the image
below.
Select handles for morphing
8. Click morph.
9. To verify that the b-pillar is morphed, rotate the model.
10. To restore the model's original shape, click undo.

287

Altair Engineering
Method 2: Interactive graphic manipulator base

11. In the move nodes subpanel, set the morphing method to interactive and manipulators.
12. Leave the other parameters and options set to their default values.
14. Press and hold SHIFT, then drag your mouse around the the eight handles indicated in the image
below. A manipulator appears.
15. Optional: You can select another node as the origin to set the manipulator in a different position.
Altair Engineering

288
16. Zoom in and rotate close to the manipulator area.
17. To translate the nodes, click and drag, graphically, one of the three yellow arrows of the
manipulator.
18. Click undo.

19. To rotate the nodes about the center of the manipulator, click and drag, graphically, one of the
three yellow arcs of the manipulator.
20. Click undo.

21. To move the nodes in a plane, click and drag, graphically, one of the three yellow right angles of
the manipulator.
289

Altair Engineering
22. Click undo.

23. To create more than one manipulator at a time, set the single manipulator/multiple toggle to
multiple.
24. To create a new manipulator, click new manip and then graphically select one or more moving
nodes.
Note: The different manipulators may have different selected entities and different parameters,
and can be moved independently of one another.
25. To move a manipulator, click a manipulator or simply move your mouse over a manipulator.
HyperMesh updates the panel to the parameters associated to that manipulator. You can change
the parameters or the entities associated with them if you desire.
26. To make manipulators active or inactive, switch the manip:active/manip:inactive toggle. When
active, the manipulators morph the model when you move them. When inactive, the manipulators
will only change their own position and orientation when you move them.
Summary
In both methods, you morphed the b-pillar in a smooth fashion with minimum distortion to the
elements.
Altair Engineering

290

Exercise: Using Domains and Handles
In this exercise you will create domains and handles, and morph the model.

Open and review the HyperMesh model morphing_1.hm.
Step 2: Auto generate 2-D domains and handles.

1. Click the Morphing menu in the menu bar and select Create > Domains.
2. Change the create method to auto functions.
3. Click generate.
Based on the models geometric features, all of the models elements are organized into various
domains and local handles are created and associated with the domains.
Step 3: Move elements into a new 2-D domain.

1. Set the selector to 2D domains. Toggle to the elems selector if not already there.
2. Click
to clear the elements that were already selected.
3. Using elems >> by window, select the elements indicated in figure 1.
Figure 1: Elements to select to move into a new domain
4. Verify that partition 2D domains is active.

5. Click create to create the domain.
Local handles are created for the new domain. You should now have two local domains. Elements
can only belong to one domain at a time. Thus, the elements you selected were moved into the
new domain. This functionality makes it very easy to group elements into different domains.
Step 4: Split the edge domain of the radius to have more control when
morphing.
1. Click the edit edges subpanel in the Morphing > Domains panel.
2. Verify that the split option is selected.
3. With the domain selector active, select the edge domain of the parts radius as indicated in the
Figure 2.
291

Altair Engineering
The node selector automatically becomes active once the edge domain is selected. Click the
domain selector to make it active and see that you selected the desired edge domain.
Figure 2: Edge domain to select
4. Click the node selector to make it active.

5. Select the node on the positive Y-axis end of the radius, as indicated in the image Figure 3.
Figure 3: Node selection to split the edge domain of the radius
6. Click split to split the edge domain at the node.

7. Repeat the above process to further split the edge domain of the radius, this time at the node
indicated in the Figure 4.
Figure 4: Node selection to further split the edge domain of the radius
8. When complete, click return to exit the panel.
Step 5: Add local handles to the 2-D domain on the parts left side.
Altair Engineering

292
1. Click the Morphing menu, and pick Create > Handles.

2. For name=, enter local.
3. Click the attached to: domain selector to make it active.
4. Select the 2-D domain on the parts left side by selecting its red icon, as indicated in the following
image.
Figure 5: Adding handles to a 2-D domain
5. Click the by nodes: nodes selector to make it active.

6. Select the two nodes as indicated in the previous image.
7. Click create to create the handles and add them to the 2-D domain.
8. Click return to exit the panel.
Step 6: Perform basic morphing to understand how domains and handles

interact with each other and the mesh.
1. Click the Morphing menu, and select Morph.
2. Select the move handles subpanel if not already there.
3. Change the mode to interactive if not already set.
4. With the handles selector active, select the two handles on the right-hand end of the part, as
indicated in figure 6.
If you select one or more handle, those handles follow the handle you drag (in Step 6.10,
following).
5. Switch from manipulator to on plane.
6. Click the N1 selector to make it active.
7. For N1, N2, and N3, select any three nodes on the model to define a plane.
8. Click morph.
The message, pick handles and move to new location appears in the status bar.
9. Click on and drag one of the selected handles to morph the part.
As you drag the handle, the meshs size and shape is adjusted. Notice that the following occurs as
the selected local handle is moved:
293
The handles selected in step 6.2 above follow the handle you are dragging.
All of the elements belonging to the selected local handles 2-D domain are affected by moving
that local handle.
Altair Engineering
The 2-D domains non-selected local handles act like anchors (they do not move).
The nodes on the edge domains and between any two non-selected local domains do not move.
None of the elements in the other 2-D domain are affected.
10. Release the mouse button to complete the morphing operation.
Figure 6: Example result of morphing the model
11. Click undo.

The HyperMorph module allows for multiple levels of undo and redo for all morphing operations.
This functionality is available for any particular HyperMesh session and its current model as long as
the session and its model remain open.
12. Click
to clear the selected handles.
13. With the handles selector active, select one or more global handles.
14. Click morph.
15. Click on and drag any global handle to morph the part.
Summary
The following occurs as the selected global handle is moved:
The handles selected in Step 6.2 above follow the handle you are dragging.
The non-selected global handles act like anchors (they do not move).
All of the elements, local handles and edge domains are affected.
Altair Engineering

294

Exercise: Increasing the Gauge Thickness of the Spring Wire
In this tutorial, you will use domains and handles to increase the gauge thickness.
Figure 1: Before and after morphing

Open the HyperMesh file, spring.hm.
Step 2: Change the gauge thickness.

1. Click the Morphing menu and pick Create > Domains.
2. Switch domain type to 2D domains.
3. Verify elements toggle is set to all elements.
4. Verify that only the partition 2D domains option is active.
5. Click create.
6. Click the Morphing menu and pick Morph. Enter the alter dimensions subpanel if not already
there.
7. Change the morphing method to radius.
8. Change the center calculation to by normals.
9. Keep all the other settings.
10. For domains (under edge and 2D) select the 2D domain and the two edge domains as shown
in Figure 2.
Figure 2: Domains to select for altering the gauge radius
295
When the circular edge domain is selected, the radius box populates with the current radius value.
Altair Engineering
11. In the radius field, type 12.

12. Click morph.
Summary
The gauge thickness of the spring wire is changed from 7.5 to 12.0.
Altair Engineering

296

Exercise: Changing the Radius of the Spring Coil
In this exercise, you will increase the radius of the spring coil.

Open the HyperMesh file, spring.hm.
Step 2: Change the coil radius.

2. Switch domain type to 2D domains.
3. Verify that the elements toggle is set to all elements.
4. Verify that only the partition 2D domains option is active.
5. Click create.
6. Click the Morphing menu and pick Morph. Enter the alter dimensions subpanel if not already
there.
7. Change the morphing method to radius.
8. Change the center calculation to by axis.
297

Altair Engineering
9. Change the axis to the z-axis.
Figure 2: Domains and base node to select for altering the coil radius
10. For domains (under edge and 2D) select the 2-D domain and the two edge domains.
11. For the base node for the z-axis select the node as shown in Figure 2.
12. Keep the default settings for the remaining options.
13. Activate add to current.
14. In the radius field, type 20.
15. Click morph.
Summary
Twenty units are added to the coil radius.
Altair Engineering

298

Objective
Use morphing to change the thickness of the middle layers of a four-layered solid, while maintaining
the thickness of the outer layers.
Tools
Domains will be created using 3D domains > by component. Thickness will be altered using alter
dimensions.
Step 1: Open the file.

1. Open the file, Morph_Adhesive_Layers.hm.
Step 2: Create domains and handles.

2. Switch the domain type to 3D domains.
3. Toggle the element selector to all elements.
299

Altair Engineering
4. Activate the divide by comps and partition 2D domains options. The panel should appear as in
the following image:
5. Click create to create the domains.

6. Click return to exit the Domains panel.
Step 3: Display only the morph faces of interest.

1. Using the Model Browser, hide all the components except ^morphface.
2. Mask all ^morphface elements except those on the outer layer and the layer between the Outer
comp and the Adhesive_Outer to leave all the elements shown in the following image.
HINT: Select a couple of elements on the face you want to keep. Select elements >> by face,
and then select elements >> reverse. This will reverse the selection to the elements you
do not want and will allow you to mask those elements with the mask button.
3. To reduce the number of domains and handles shown on the screen, click the Mask tab.
4. Click the + next to Morphing to expand it.
5. Click the + in the Show column for Local Domains/Handles to display the domains and handles
for only the displayed elements.
6. Hide the ^morphface component in the Model Browser.
Altair Engineering

300
Step 4: Increase the thickness of the outer adhesive layer by 5 units.

1. Click the Morphing menu and pick Morph to open the Morph panel.
2. Open the alter dimensions subpanel.
3. Change the dimension type to radius.
4. Activate the add to current checkbox.
5. For domains, select the curved edge domains as well as the 2-D domains representing the curved
surfaces as seen in the following image.
6. Set the center calculation to by axis.

7. For the axis, use the z-axis.
8. For B select the temp node that represents the center of the cylinder.
9. In radius= box, change value to 5 units.
10. Click morph.
11. Go to the save shape subpanel.
12. For name= enter sh1.
13. Switch to as node perturbations.
14. Click save.
15. Click undo all to revert back to the original model configuration.
16. Show all components except the ^morphface component.
17. Go to the apply shapes subpanel.
18. For shapes select sh1.
19. Click select.
20. Click animate.
This takes you to the Deformed Shape panel.
21. Change the animation scale from model units to scale factor.
22. Set the scale factor to 1.
23. Click linear to start the animation.
301

Altair Engineering
24. Once you are done viewing your animation and verifying that it is as intended, you can return to
the main panel area.
With this step you have successfully completed morphing one of the middle layers of the four-layer
model.
Optional: Using the process shown above, increase the thickness of Adhesive_Inner component by
5 units.
Altair Engineering

302

Objective
Use morphing to create multiple configurations of a model.
Tools
Domains, morph
Figure 1: Tube to morph
Step 1: Open the file.

1. Open the file, tube.hm.

1. From the menu bar, click Morphing > Create > Domains.
3. Switch the domain type to 3D domains.
5. Activate the partition 2D domains option.
6. Click create.
Step 3: Partition the outer domain.

1. Make sure you are still in the Domains > create subpanel.
2. In the Model Browser, hide the component solid.
3. Using the Mask panel ( ), display only the outer elements of the component ^morphfaces.
HINT: Select a couple of elements on the face you want to keep. Select elements >> by face,
and then select elements >> reverse. This will reverse the selection to the elements you
do not want and will allow you to mask those elements with the mask button.
4. Click return to return to the Domains panel.
303

Altair Engineering
7. Click the + in the Show column for the Local Domains/Handles to display the domains and
handles for only the displayed elements.
8. Change your view to a left view.
9. Change the domain type to 2D domains.
10. Change the elements selector from all elements to elems.
11. Select the elements as displayed in the following picture.
Figure 2: Elements to partition
12. Click create to create the new domain.

Step 4: Increase the outer diameter of the middle section of the tube.
1. Click Morphing > Morph to open the Morph panel.
2. Go to the alter dimensions subpanel.
3. Set the dimension type to radius.
4. Set the center calculation to by edges.
5. Switch the mesh to wireframe.
Altair Engineering

304
6. Select the two edge domains and the 2D domain as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3: Select the following Edge and 2D domains.
7. Set the radius= value to 27.

8. Click morph to morph the part.
9. Remain in this panel for the next section.
Figure 4: New profile of the part
Step 5: Offset the inner diameter of the tube.

1. Click unmask all
to display all the elements.
2. Use the Mask panel to display only the tube inner elements of the component ^morphfaces.
HINT: Select a couple of elements on the face you want to keep. Select elements by face followed
by elements reverse. This will reverse the selection to the elements you do not want and will
allow you to mask out those elements.
3. Click return to return to the Domains panel.
6. Click the + in the Show column for the Local Domains/Handles to display the domains and
handles for only the displayed elements.
7. Click Morphing > Morph to open the Morph panel.
8. Go to the alter dimensions subpanel, set the dimension type to radius.
9. Select domains >> displayed. This selects the two inner edge domains as well as the 2D domain
for the tube inner.
305

Altair Engineering
Figure 6: edge domains on the inner radius
10. Change the center calculation: to by axis.

11. For the axis, switch to the y-axis.
12. For base point, select the temp node at the center of the tube arc.
13. For radius= enter 3.
14. Check add to current.
15. Click morph to morph the inner diameter of the tube.
Figure 7: Tube with offset inner
Summary
Using morphing operations, dimension changes have been successfully performed on a tubular mesh.
Altair Engineering

306

Exercise: Using Cyclical Symmetry to Assist in the Morphing of a Bottle
In this exercise you will create a dome shape at the bottom of the bottle using morph volumes.

Open the HyperMesh file bottle.hm

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes.
2. Switch create morphvol to create matrix.
3. Set:
x density = 3
y density = 8
z density = 5
buffer % = 5
4. Select elems >> displayed.

5. Toggle global system to local system.
6. For syst, select the system located at the top of the bottle.
7. Use the default values for the remaining settings.
8. Click create to create the morph volumes.
Note: Morph volumes are created, encompassing the bottle, with red colored handles created at
the corners of each morph volume.
Step 3: Create symmetry.

307

Altair Engineering
1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create >Symmetries.

2. Under domains, activate morph volumes & mapping check box.
Symmetries can either be linked to domains or to morph volumes. Here you are associating the
symmetries to the morph volumes.
3. Change 1 plane to cyclical.
4. Change 180 degrees to set freq.
5. Set # of cycles to 8.
6. For syst select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.
7. Click create.
Note that a cyclical symmetry is created.
Step 4: Create the dome.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes, and then select the update
edges subpanel.
2. Toggle update nodes to update ends.
3. Change the view to the bottom view by selecting the XY Bottom Plane View
4. Verify that the options by edges and free are selected (see image below).
5. Using the image below as reference, select the line to the left of the tangency at the top of the
center circle.
Figure 2: Updating tangencies, selecting line
Altair Engineering

308
6. After selecting the line, select the tangency (shown below).
Figure 3: Updating tangencies, select tangency
Notice that after selecting the tangency, the two arrows are replaced with a single arrow.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 on the three other tangencies shown in the image below:
Figure 4: Updating tangencies, additional tangencies to update
8. When finished, click return to exit the panel.

9. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph and then select the move handles subpanel:
10. Select the handles at the bottom of the bottle, as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 3: Handles to translate
309

Altair Engineering
11. Switch the morphing method from interactive to translate.

12. Switch to along xyz
13. Set z val = 10
14. Click morph.
Since you have symmetries defined, translating a single handle on the inner ring at the bottom,
ensures that a similar behavior is imparted on all the handles symmetrically associated to it.
15. To reduce the number of domains and handles shown on the screen, click the Mask tab. If this
isnt displayed, select View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Mask.
16. Click the - in the Hide column to turn off the display of all morphing entities.
17. Rotate the model to view the changes made.
Figure 6: Morphed model
Summary
Using morph volumes with appropriate tangencies, and by creating symmetries you are able to create
a dome-shaped feature at the bottom of the bottle.
Remarks
There are four different methods to define the continuity between the morph volumes.
Free makes morph volume edges independent of other edges.
Fixed connectivity allows you to prescribe the angle at the end of an edge.
Master-slave maintains tangency between two morph volume edges while keeping the master
edge independent of the slave edge. (When the master edge moves, the slave edge follows, but
when the slave edge moves, the master edge does not have to follow.)
Continuous maintains tangency between two morph volume edges while allowing both edges to
affect each other.
The default setting in morph volume is always set to tangent which is continuous edge connectivity.
This definition can always be changed in the update edges subpanel, based upon the morphing
needs.
Altair Engineering

310

Exercise: Creating a Circular Bead on the Bottle
Figure 1: Adding beads to the bottle
In this exercise you will first create a bead using the default continuous edge connectivity. You will
then update the edges to free and see how it affects the bead creation.

Open the HyperMesh file bottle.hm

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes.
2. Switch create morphvol to create matrix.
3. Set:
x density = 3
y density = 8
z density = 5
buffer % = 5

5. Toggle global system to local system.
6. For syst, select the system located at the top of the bottle.
7. Use the default values for the remaining settings.
8. Click create to create the morph volumes.
Note: Morph volumes are created encompassing the bottle, with red colored handles created at the
corners of each morph volume.
311

Altair Engineering

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create >Symmetries.
2. Under domain, activate morph volumes & mapping.
Symmetries can either be linked to domains or to morph volumes. In this case, you are associating
the symmetries to the morph volumes.
3. Change 1 plane to cyclical.
4. Change 180 degrees to set freq.
5. Set # of cycles to 8.
6. For syst select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.
7. Click create.
Note: A cyclical symmetry is created.
Step 4: Split the morph volumes.

1. On the toolbar, click XZ Left Plane View
2. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes, then select the
split/combine subpanel.
3. Set the toggles to split mvols and by edges.
4. Set single split to 0.8.
5. Select an edge of Morph Volume 1 (Figure 2).
6. Click split.
7. Set single split to 0.2.
8. Select an edge of Morph Volume 2 (Figure 2).
9. Click split.
Figure 2: Splitting morph volumes
Altair Engineering

312
Step 5: Morph the part.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph, then select the move handles subpanel.
2. Switch the morphing method from interactive to translate.
3. Switch the translate option to along xyz.
4. Set x-val = -5.0.
5. For system =, select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.
6. Select a handle as shown in figure 3.
7. Click morph.
Figure 3: Selecting a handle for morphing
As the bead is created, the upper and lower portions of the bottle deform too (figure 4). This is not
the intention, as you want to create a bead without affecting the other parts of the bottle.
Figure 4: Morphing using continuous morph volumes
8. Click undo to undo the morphing operation.

313

Altair Engineering
Step 6: Update the morph volume edges.

To stop this bulging effect of the upper and the lower portions of the bottle, you will use the free edge
connectivity between these morph volumes.
1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes, and then select the update
edges subpanel.
2. Toggle update nodes to update ends.
3. Switch edge tangency to free.
4. Update the edges, working your way around the bottle (see figures 5 and 6 below).
Figure 5: Selecting edges to update the tangencies
Figure 6: Changing the tangencies from continuous to free

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph, then select the move handles subpanel.
2. Verify that the morphing method is translate.
3. Switch the translate option to along xyz.
4. Set x-val = -5.0.
5. For system =, select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.
6. Select the handle as shown previously in figure 3.
Altair Engineering

314
7. Click morph.
Figure 7: Bead created with free edge connectivity
Summary
Using morph volumes with appropriate tangencies and symmetries you were able to create a bead on
the given bottle.
315

Altair Engineering

Objective
Update the mesh to a new geometry quickly using symmetry.
Tools
3-D domains, symmetry, interactive morphing.
Figure 1: Mesh to morph
Step 1: Load the model.

1. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model and load the file fe_only.hm.
2. From the menu bar, select File > Import > Geometry and load the file new_design.igs.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Domains.
2. Switch the domain type from global domains to 3D domains.
4. Activate the partition 2D domains option.
5. Click create to create the domains.
6. Select return to exit the panel.
Altair Engineering

316
Step 3: Create symmetries.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Symmetries to enter the Symmetry panel.
2. Switch the symmetry type to cyclical.
3. Switch the symmetry angle from 180 degrees to set freq.
4. Set the # of cycles to 18.
5. Click syst.
6. Select the center point of the gear.
7. Click domains >> all.
8. Click create.
9. Click return.
Step 4: Morph the mesh to the new geometry.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Morph , then select the move handles subpanel.
2. Zoom in to one of the cogs of the gear as in the following image:
Figure 2: Mesh, domains handles and the new geometry
3. Switch the morphing method to move to point.

4. With from: handle active, select the node depicted in the following image.
5. With to: point active, select the point on the geometry you want to move the handle to, as
depicted in the following image:
Figure 3: Morphing handle to point
317

Altair Engineering
As the handles are moved, you will see that the mesh starts conforming to the new geometry.
Figure 4: Mesh mapped onto the new geometry
6. In the same manner, move the following handles:
Figure 5: Handles to map
7. Return to the main menu.
Figure 6: Updated (morphed) mesh
Summary
Notice how each cog on the gear is updated. Taking advantage of the symmetry in this part, you are
able to morph it much quicker.
Altair Engineering

318

Exercise: Morphing a Yoke via Morph Volumes and Shapes
In this exercise you will increase the diameter of one of the prongs of a yoke using morph volumes.
You will reflect the shape on to the other prong and finally position the combined shapes from one
yoke to the other.
Figure 1: Yoke model

1. Open the HyperMesh file yoke.hm.
2. In the Model Browser, right-click component yoke_2, then select Hide; make sure component
yoke_1 is in Show mode.
Step 2: Convert hexas to morph volume.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes, then select the convert
subpanel.
2. Select elems >> by collector.
3. Select hexas. Make sure that register all inner nodes is checked.
4. Click select.
319

Altair Engineering
5. Click convert.
Figure 2: Converting hexas volumes to morph volumes
Note: All the seven hexa elements are converted into morph volumes.
Step 3: Increase the prong diameter.

1. In the Model Browser, right-click Tag and select Show to display all the tags.
2. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Morph, then select the move handles subpanel.
3. Set the mode selector to move to node.
4. Click options and make sure morphing>mvols: is set to active (toggle if it is set to inactive).
5. Click return.
6. For handle, click Handle 1, and for node, click tag 1.
7. Repeat this process for the other 35 handles.
Figure 3: Using tags to change the morph volumes
Step 4: Save the morphed shape.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Shapes.
2. Go to the save as shape subpanel.
3. For name=, enter Prong1.
4. Toggle as handle perturbations to as node perturbations.
5. Click create and select Yes to the message which appears.
6. Click undo all to bring the model to its original position before morphing.
Altair Engineering

320
Step 5: Create coordinate system.

You need to reference a coordinate system in order to create symmetry.
1. In the Model Browser, right-click and select Hide for Shape and Morphing Volume. Right click
on yoke_1 and select Show.
2. From the menu bar, select Geometry > Create > Systems > Axis Direction to open the
Systems panel, create by axis direction subpanel.
3. Click origin and select the node labeled "origin."
4. For X-axis, select the node labeled "X."
5. For XY plane, select the node labeled "Y."
6. Click create.
7. Click return.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Symmetries.
2. For name =, enter symm1.
3. Under domains, click the check-box for morph volumes. (make sure it is active).
4. Set 1 plane and keep the rest of the default settings.
5. Click syst and select the newly created coordinate system.
6. Click create.
7. Click return.
Step 7: Reflect shape.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Shapes.
2. Change the subpanel to apply shapes.
3. Under shapes, change apply shapes to reflect shapes.
4. Change apply only to apply & create.
5. Keep the default auto-envelope.
6. Click shapes and select the newly created shape from the previous section.
7. Under reflect using: click symmetries and select the newly created symmetry.
8. Click reflect.
Note: A reflected shape has been created and applied on the other prong.
321

Altair Engineering
The name of the shape, created by reflecting, has the same name as the original shape with a
suffix 1.
Step 8: Position the shapes onto the other yoke.

In this step, you will position the shapes of the two prongs of the yoke onto the opposite yoke.
1. In the Model Browser, right-click Title and select Show.
2. In the Model Browser right-click yoke_2 and click Show.
3. In the apply shapes subpanel, under shapes, change reflect shapes to position shapes.
4. Change the selector from scale to no scale.
5. Click shapes and select the two shapes present in the model.
6. Under from: select the three nodes named from_N1, from_N2 and from_N3 for N1, N2 and N3.
7. Under to: select the three nodes named to_N1, to_N2 and to_N3 for N1, N2 and N3.
8. Click position.
9. Click return.
Note: The two or more shapes have been created and applied to the other yoke. The name of the
first new shape (on the other yoke) will have a suffix 2 because it is the second copy of the
first shape and the second shape will have a suffix of 11 as it is the first copy of the
reflected shape.
Altair Engineering

322

Exercise: Using Shapes to Interpolate Loads
Shapes are one of the most versatile types of the morphing entities. Loads can be converted into
shapes and vice versa. When you position shapes, they act on a volume equivalent to the initial
volume, but at the new location. In this regard, shapes can be used to interpolate loads on a mesh
given the loading at the boundaries of a volume.
In this exercise you are given a temperature distribution at points defined by a cube (hexa element).
You will use shapes to interpolate the temperatures to the tube lying inside the cube.
Figure 1: Model

Open the HyperMesh file s_bend_tube.hm
Step 2: Convert temperatures to shapes.

1. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Create > Shapes, then select the Convert subpanel.
2. Switch the conversion type to temperature to shapes.
3. For loadcols, select temperature.
4. Click select.
5. Click convert.
Figure 2: Temperature converted in shape vectors
Note: The temperature loads have been converted into shape vectors.
323

Altair Engineering
The shape vectors are proportional to the temperature loads on the corners of the cube and the
distances from those corners.
The name of the converted shape is the same as the temperature load collector.
Step 3: Translate the shape.

1. Click the apply shapes subpanel.
Figure 3: The base and the node for translating the shape
2. Change the operation to translate shapes.

3. Change apply only to create new.
4. For envelope, use auto-envelope.
5. For shapes, select temperature.
6. Click select.
7. For from: base, select the node shown in Figure 3.
8. For to: nodes, select the node shown in Figure 3.
9. Click translate.
The shape has been transferred to the tube. You selected the same base and to node, effectively
selecting a translate distance of 0.
A new shape is created with the suffix 1 (temperature1).
Step 4: Convert shape vectors to temperature loads.

1. Click the convert subpanel.
2. Switch the conversion type to shapes to temperatures.
3. For shapes, select temperature1.
4. Click select.
5. Click convert.
The shape has been converted into temperature load.
Altair Engineering

324
Step 5: Check the result.

1. In the Model Browser, right-click and select Hide for Shape.
2. In the Model Browser, right-click component cube and select Hide.
3. In the Model Browser, right-click LoadCollector and select Hide.
4. From the BCs menu, select Contour Loads.
Make sure you expand the Contour Loads utility appropriately to visualize all the buttons.
5. From the list of loads, select temperature1.
6. Click Accept.
This takes you to the Contour panel.
7. Select simulation = temperature1.
8. Select data type = Temperature.
9. Click contour.
Figure 4: The contoured temperature results
Summary
Using shapes you have been able to interpolate temperatures from the corners of a volume on to an
object located in that volume.
325

Altair Engineering

Exercise: Recording Shapes
The Record panel gives you the flexibility of making changes to the mesh using panels outside the
HyperMorph module and saving them as shapes.
In this exercise you will change a bead using the Node Edit > align node subpanel and record the
shape function. You will then reflect the shape to the other side of the mesh to complete the mesh
update.
Figure 1: Location to record the nodal movements on and reflect

Open the HyperMesh file floor.hm.
Step 2: Start recording nodal movements.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Free Hand, then select the record subpanel.
2. Click start.
3. Click return.
Step 3: Change the bead profile.

1. From the menu bar, select Geometry > Edit >Nodes > Align to enter the align node subpanel.
2. Select the nodes shown below for the 1st end and 2nd end.
Figure 2: first set of nodes to align
Altair Engineering

326
3. Select the nodes between the selected nodes to align the nodes to the 1st end: and 2nd end: nodes.
4. Repeat the same process to align the next row of nodes (figure 3).
Figure 3: Second set of nodes to align
5. Select the nodes between the selected nodes to align the nodes to the 1st end and 2nd end nodes.
6. Repeat the same process to align the next row of nodes (figure 4).
Figure 4: Third set of nodes to align
Step 4: Stop the recording.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Free Hand, then select the record subpanel.
2. Click finish.
This stops the record process.

2. Set name= Morph1.
3. Toggle save option to as node perturbations.
4. Click save.
327

Altair Engineering
Step 6: Create coordinate system.

1. From the menu bar select Geometry > Create > Systems > Axis Direction.
2. For origin select the node with tag origin.
For x-axis select the node with tag x-axis.
For xy-plane select the node with xy-plane.
3. Click create.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Symmetries.
2. Set name = symm1.
3. For symmetry type use 1 plane.
4. For align with use x-axis.
5. Select the syst created in step 6.
6. Click create.
Note that 1 plane symmetry is created with a square symbol.
Step 8: Reflect shape.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Shapes, then select the apply shapes subpanel.
2. Under shape change the option to reflect shapes.
3. Under reflect shapes change the option to apply & create.
4. For shape, select Morph1.
Altair Engineering

328
5. For symmetries, select symm1.

6. Click reflect.
Summary
The shape (Morph1) is reflected to the other side. Also, the reflected shape has the same name with
the suffix 1. The changes that you made on one side are thus transferred to the other side.
329

Altair Engineering

Exercise: Using Morph Constraints to Keep the Area of a Windshield Constant
while Changing its Shape
In this exercise will change the shape of the windshield while keeping its area constant.
Figure 1: Windshield mesh

Open the HyperMesh file windshield.hm.
Step 2: Create a shape to define the degree of freedom for the mesh.
1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Free Hand and select the move nodes subpanel.
2. Switch the method to translate.
3. Key in
x = 0;
Y = -5 (negative 5);
Z=0
4. Under moving nodes: click nodes >> by sets and select move_node.
5. Click select.
6. Under fixed nodes: click nodes >> by sets and select fix_node.
7. Click select.
8. Under affected elements: click elems >> displayed.
9. Click morph.
11. For name =, enter Shape1.
12. Toggle the save option to as node perturbations.
13. Click save.
This initial shape defines the direction in which the nodes have the freedom to move, as the shape of
the windshield is changing, thus enabling us to keep the area at a constant.
Altair Engineering

330
Step 3: Create a constraint.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Constraints.
2. Set name = const1.
3. Change the constraint type to area.
4. For shapes, select Shape1.
6. Switch the area option to equal to.
7. Click calculate to calculate the area of the mesh:
Note: The value shows in the area box is: 1.085e+06.
This is the actual surface area of the windshield which will be maintained.
8. Click create.
Note: The constraint is created. The symbol for the constraint is a matching-mesh.
9. Right-click Shape and select Hide in the Model Browser.
10. Right-click MorphingConstraint and select Hide in the Model Browser.
Step 4: Create morph volume.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes.
2. Switch the method to create morphvol.
3. Toggle entity type to enclose elems.
5. Toggle coordinate system to global system.
6. Click create.
The morph volume is created.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph and select the move handles subpanel.
2. Change the morph type to move to node.
3. For from: handle, select handle1 (Figure 2).
4. For from: node, select node1 (Figure 2).
331

Altair Engineering
5. Repeat the process for the other handles and nodes.
Figure 2: From handles and from nodes

1. Click the save shape radio button.
2. Set name = Shape2.
3. Toggle the save option to as node perturbations.
4. Click save.
Step 7: Check the result.

1. Right-click MorphingVolume in the Model Browser and select Hide.
2. Go to View > Toolbars, make active Checks toolbar, select the Mass/Area Calc (
) icon.
3. For comps, select windshield.

4. Click select.
5. Click calculate.
The final area of the windshield is 1.085e+06, which is the same as the initial area. So, even
though the profile of the windshield has changed, its area has not. As the height of the windshield
reduced, it expanded in the direction provided by Shape1.
Summary
Using morph constraints, you able to change the shape of the windshield, while keeping its area
constant.
Altair Engineering

332

Exercise: Using Limiting Constraints and Freehand Morphing to Position a
Dummy and Morph the Seat
In this exercise, you will learn to position the H-point of the dummy on a seat cushion.
This helps to reduce design and remeshing of the seat based on the pre-stress analysis. To do this
exercise you will be using a limiting constraint and freehand morphing.
Figure 1 Model with Seat cushion and dummy

Open the HyperMesh file dummy.hm
Step 2: Create constraints.

2. Set name= const1.
3. Set type of constraint to on elements.
4. Set the option under nodes to bounded.
5. Set project along: to N1,N2 along negative z (choose from side of cushion).
6. Set distance= 2.
This will ensure that there is a distance of 2 units between the dummy and the seat after the
morphing is complete.
7. Use nodes >> by collector and select cushion.
8. Click select.
9. Use elems >> by collector and select dummy.
333

Altair Engineering
10. Click select.

11. Click create.
Constraints with a diamond shape are created.
Figure 2 Morphing Constraints on Seat cushion and dummy

1. Right-click MorphingConstraint in the Model Browser and select Hide.
2. From the menu bar, select Morphing > Free Hand and select the move nodes subpanel.
3. Switch moving method to translate.
4. For moving nodes, use nodes >> by collector and select cushion.
5. Click select.
6. For fixed nodes, use nodes >> by collector and select dummy.
7. Click select.
8. For affected elements, use elems >> by collector and select cushion.
9. Click select.
10. For the translate magnitude, set
x=0
y=0
z = 80
11. Click morph.

The top surface of the cushion has conformed to the shape of the dummy.
The distance between the dummy and the seat-cushion is 2 mm.
Altair Engineering

334
Summary
Using limiting constraints, you are able to move a mesh such that it moves an adjoining mesh along
with it, thus preventing penetration between the two of them.
335

Altair Engineering

Exercise: Using Cluster Constraints to Preserve the Wheel Shape while
Lengthening the Body of a Truck
When circular features are stretched, they become elliptical in shape. In some cases as in the wheels
of a truck, this effect is not desirable. In such cases, using cluster constraints will allow you to translate
the features, along with the morph, while maintaining its circular shape.
In the exercise you will be changing the length of the cab while preserving the shape of the wheel. To
facilitate the morphing process you will be employing constraint and symmetry.
Figure 1: Truck model

Open the HyperMesh file truck.hm.
Step 2: Create a coordinate system.

1. Using the menu bar select Geometry > Create > Systems > Axis Direction.
2. For origin select the node with tag origin.
3. For x-axis, select node with tag x-axis.
4. For xy-plane, select node with xy-plane.
5. Click create to create the coordinate system.
6. On the toolbar, select XZ Right Plane View (
Altair Engineering

336
Step 3: Create and split the morph volume.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Morph Volumes.
2. Switch the creation method to create morphvol.
3. Set entity type to enclose elements.
4. Select elems >> all.
5. Set system to global system.
6. Set buffer % = 5.
The morph volume is created.
7. Click create to create the morph volume.
8. Click the split/combine subpanel.

9. Toggle the operation to split mvols.
10. Toggle to split the morph volume by edges.
11. Toggle the type of split to single split.
12. Set single split = 0.44.
13. Select the morph volume in the graphics window.
14. Click split to split the morph volume.
The original morph volume is now split into two morph volumes.
Step 4: Create a Symmetry.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Symmetries:
2. For name =, enter symm1.
3. Under domain, check the box for morph volumes.
Symmetry can be linked to either domains or morph volumes. In this exercise since you are dealing
with morph volumes you will use the check to link the symmetry to the morph volume.
4. Switch the symmetry type to 1 plane.
5. For syst, select the coordinate system created in step 4.2 .
337

Altair Engineering
6. Click create to create the symmetry.

A 1 plane symmetry with a square symbol has been created.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph, then click the move handles subpanel.
2. Switch the morphing mode to translate.
3. Switch the along option to along xyz.
4. Set the following values:
X val = 500
Y val = 0
Z val = 0
5. Select two handles as shown in figure 3.

6. Click morph to morph the front half of the truck.
Figure 2.1 Front half of the truck to morph
Figure 2.2 Front half of the truck morphed
Altair Engineering

338
The front end is stretched 500 units. Since the front wheels are also the part of the morph volumes
they became elliptical after morphing. This is not desirable. You will undo this morphing, constrain
the wheels and re-do it.
Figure 3: undesired morphing of the front wheel
7. Undo all morphs.
Step 6: Create a cluster constraint.

As seen in the previous image, the front wheels, after morphing, become elliptical. To fix this issue,
you will be employing a particular type of constraint, called a cluster constraint, which helps to keep
the original shape of a portion of the model while morphing.
2. Set name = const2.
3. Switch the constraint type to cluster.
4. Select nodes >> by collector.
5. Select comps >> by id.
6. Use id = 1-8 and then hit ENTER on the keyboard.
7. Click select to select the components.
8. Click create to create the cluster constraint.
The cluster constraints are created on the nodes of the selected components.
339

Altair Engineering
Figure 4

10. In the Model Browser, right-click MorphingConstraint and click Hide to turn off the constraints.

Repeat the procedure in Step 5 to morph the front of the truck by 500 units.
The front end is stretched 500 mm. The front wheels are moved in the morphing process while
maintaining their circular shape.
Summary
Using cluster constraints and morph volumes you are able to stretch the cab of the pickup without
distorting the wheels.
Altair Engineering

340

Exercise: Remeshing Domains After Morphing
Depending on the morphing being performed, there is a possibility that the mesh can get distorted. For
such cases, HyperMorph provides a remeshing capability. The advantage of this remeshing is that the
newly created elements are automatically a part of the original domain. This provides continuity to the
morphing process along with proper element quality.
Figure 1: Model

Open the HyperMesh file arm2D.hm.
Step 2: Set the morph options.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Assign > Morph Options.
2. Select the auto qa subpanel.
3. Switch auto quality check to 2D jacobian.
4. Set limit = to 0.7.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Domains.
2. Switch the creation type to 2D domains.
3. Switch from all elems to elems.
4. Use elems >> by sets and select set_1.
5. Click select.
7. Use elems >> by sets and select set_2.
8. Click select.
341

Altair Engineering

Note: Two 2D domains are created.
Step 4: Translate the washer.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Morph, then select move handles.
2. Switch the mode to translate.
3. Switch the along option to along vector.
4. Select N1 and N2 as shown in figure 2.
Figure 2: Selecting N1 and N2 for the translate vector
5. Set dist = 0.25.

6. Select the two handles on the washer.
Altair Engineering

342
7. Click morph to morph the washer.

The elements outside the washer get compressed as the washer moves. Also, as the elements fail
(jacobian < 0.7) they are highlighted (figure 3).
Figure 3: Elements after morphing and quality check on Jacobian 2D
Step 5: Remesh the domain.

1. From the menu bar select Morphing > Create > Domains and then select the update subpanel.
2. Switch the update option to remesh 2D/3D.
3. Switch new mesh type: to quads.
4. Select both 2-D domains on the model.
5. Click calc avg to get the average element size.
6. Click remesh to remesh the domain.
343

Altair Engineering
Figure 4: Updated mesh and quality check
The mesh is updated.
Summary
Using this technique, you can update the mesh in regions that might have undergone excessive
elemental deformation during morphing. Since the domains and handles are maintained, it allows you
to conduct further morphing if need be.
Altair Engineering

344
Analysis Setup
HM-4020: Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties using HyperBeam
HM-4070: OptiView
345

Altair Engineering

Create constraints (OPTISTRUCT SPC) on the channels geometry lines
Create a force (OPTISTRUCT FORCE) on the bracket to simulate a pressing load on it
Define a load step (OPTISTRUCT SUBCASE)
Export the model to an OptiStruct input file
Submit the OptiStruct input file to OptiStruct
Review the resulting HTML report file
The purpose of using a finite element (FE) pre-processor is to create a model, which can be run by a
solver. A finite element solver can solve for responses of parts to loading conditions on them. The
loads can be in the form of boundary constraints, forces, pressures, temperatures, and so on.
In this tutorial, you will gain an understanding of the basic concepts for creating a solver input file by
using a template. More specifically, you will learn how to define loading conditions on a model, specify
solver specific controls, and submit an input file to a solver from HyperMesh.
Exercise: Setting up Loading Conditions

This exercise uses the model file, channel_brkt_assem_loading.hm. It contains the bracket and
channel assembly in the following image.
Step 1: Load the OptiStruct user profile.

3. Click OK.
Altair Engineering

346
Step 2: Retrieve and view the HyperMesh model file,

channel_brkt_assem_loading.hm.
Standard toolbar.
on the

channel_brkt_assem_loading.hm file. A model appears in the graphics area.
Step 3: Create two load collectors named pressing_load and constraints.

1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Create > Load Collector from the context menu.
HyperMesh creates and opens a load collector in the Entity Editor.
For Name, enter pressing_load.
Click the Color icon, and select a color for the load collector.
Set Card Image to <None>.
3. Repeat steps 3.1 and 3.2 to create second load collector labeled constraints.
347

Altair Engineering
Step 4: Apply constraints (OPTISTRUCT SPC) to the channels line geometry.

Note: By selecting this view, HyperMesh sets the component's and load collector's displays back to
what they were when the view was saved. The load collectors that you created in step 3 are
now turned off because they did not exist when the view was saved. You will need to turn
these back on to see the display of the BCs when you create them in the next steps.
2. In the Load Collector folder, click
display of their geometry.
3. In the Component folder, click
next to pressing_load and constraints to turn on the

next to channel to turn on the display of its geometry.
4. Open the Constraints panel by clicking BCs > Create > Constraints from the menu bar.
7. Select the six lines on the perimeter of the channels bottom surface as indicated in the following
image.
8. Verify that all six dofs (degrees of freedom) are selected.

Note: For an OptiStruct linear static analysis, dof 1, 2, and 3 represent translations in the global x, y-, and z-directions, respectively. Dof 4, 5, and 6 represent rotations about the global x-,
y- and z-axis, respectively.
9. Click load types = and select SPC.

Altair Engineering

348
10. Click create. Hypermesh creates constraints on the lines.
11. In the size = field, enter 5. HyperMesh reduces the display size of the constraints.
12. Select the label constraints checkbox. HyperMesh displays a label for each constraint.
Note: The labels identify what dofs are assigned to the constraints.
13. Exit the main menu by clicking return.
Step 5: Map the constraints (OPTISTRUCT SPC) on the geometry lines to the
channel nodes associated to the lines.
1. Open the loads on geometry panel by clicking BCs > Loads on Geometry from the menu bar.
2. Click loadcols.
3. Select the load collector, constraints.
4. Click select.
349

Altair Engineering
5. Click map loads. HyperMesh creates a constraint at each node associated to the geometry lines.
6. Click return.
7. In the Model browser, Component folder, turn off the display of geometry for all component
collectors.
Step 6: Prepare to create forces (OPTISTRUCT FORCE) on the bracket for the
pressing load case.
2. In the Load Collector folder, right-click on pressing_load and select Make Current from the
context menu.
Note: The pressing_load load collector is now the current load collector, and any loads created
will be placed in this collector.
3. Right-click on pressing_load and select Show from the context menu.
Step 7: Create two forces (OPTISTRUCT FORCE) on the bracket for the
pressing load case.
1. Open the forces panel by clicking BCs > Create > Forces from the menu bar.
3. Set the entity selector to nodes.
Altair Engineering

350
4. Select the two nodes indicated in the following image.
5. In the magnitude = field, enter 5.

6. Set the orientation selector to y-axis.
7. Click load types = and select FORCE.
8. Click create. HyperMesh creates two forces.
9. In the magnitude % = field, enter 200.0. HyperMesh increases the display size of the forces.
10. Select the label loads checkbox. Each force displays the label FORCE = 5.00e+00.
The two forces created for the pressing load case
11. Click return.
Step 8: Define the load step for the pressing load case.
1. Create a Load Step by right-clicking in the Model browser and selecting Create > Load Step
from the context menu. HyperMesh creates and opens a load step in the Entity Editor.
351

Altair Engineering
For Name, enter pressing_step.
Set Analysis type to Linear Static.
For SPC, click Unspecified >> Loadcol.
In the Select Loadcol dialog, select constraints and then click OK.
For LOAD, click Unspecified >> Loadcol.
In the Select Loadcol dialog, select pressing_load and then click OK.
Step 9: Display and mask the load step (the load collectors defined in the
load step).
Altair Engineering

352
1. In the Model browser, Load Step folder, right-click on pressing_step and select Hide from the
context menu. HyperMesh hides the pressing_load and constraints load collector
2. Right-click on pressing_step again and select Show from the context menu.
353

Altair Engineering

Create a solver input file by using a template
Review entities in HyperMesh to see how they will appear in the solver input file
Define materials and properties
Select solver element types for HyperMesh element configurations
The purpose of using a finite element (FE) pre-processor is to create a model that can be run by a
solver. HyperMesh interfaces with many FE solvers and all of them have unique input file formats.
HyperMesh has a unique template(s) for each solver it supports. A template contains solver specific
formatting instructions, which HyperMesh uses to create an input file for that solver.
Exercise: OptiStruct Linear Statics Setup for a Shell Assembly

This exercise uses the file, channel_brkt_assem_analysis.hm. It contains the bracket and channel
assembly in the following image.

3. Click OK.
Step 2: Retrieve and view the file, channel_brkt_assem_analysis.hm.

Standard toolbar.
on the

channel_brkt_assem_analysis.hm file. A model appears in the graphics area.
Altair Engineering

354
Step 3: Review a bracket element to identify what type of OptiStruct element

it is and to see how it will be formatted in the OptiStruct input file.
1. Open the Card Edit panel by clicking
on the Collectors toolbar.

3. In the graphics area, select an element on the bracket component.
Note: The bracket component is blue.
4. Click edit. The Card Image opens, and indicates that the selected element is an OptiStruct
CQUAD4 or CTRIA3, depending on whether you selected a quad or tria element.
Note: EID is the elements ID, PID is the ID of the elements property, and G(X) is the grid (node)
ID that makes up the element. Options specific to the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 appear in the
menu panel area.
5. Close the Card Image by clicking return.
6. Exit the Card Edit panel by clicking return.
Step 4: Review and edit the existing steel materials card image by
accessing the card editor from the Model browser.
This material is defined for the channel.
1. In the Model browser, Material folder, click steel. The Entity Editor opens and displays the
material's corresponding data.
Note: The card image indicates the material is of OptiStruct type MAT1.
2. In the Entity Editor, NU (Poisson's Ratio) field, change the value from 0.3 to 0.28.
355

Altair Engineering
Step 5: Define a material collector named aluminum for the bracket.

This material is defined for the channel.
1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Create > Material from the context menu.
HyperMesh creates and opens a material in the Entity Editor.
2. For Name, enter aluminum.

3. Set Card Image to MAT1.
4. For E (Young's Modulus), enter 7.0e4.
5. For NU (Poisson's Ratio), enter 0.33.
Step 6: Define a property collector (PSHELL card image) that will be

assigned to the channel component collector.
1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Create > Property from the context menu.
HyperMesh creates and opens a property in the Entity Editor.
Altair Engineering

356
2. For Name, enter channel.

3. Set Card Image to PSHELL.
4. For Material, click Unspecified >> Material.
5. In the Select Material dialog, select steel and then click OK. HyperMesh assigns the material.
6. For T (thickness), enter 3.0.
Step 7: Assign the channel property to the channel component.

1. In the Model browser, Component folder, click channel. The Entity Editor opens and displays
the component's corresponding data.
2. For Property, click Unspecified >> Property.

357

Altair Engineering
3. In the Select Property dialog, select channel and then click OK. HyperMesh assigns the property
channel to the component channel.
Step 8: Update the bracket property to have a PSHELL card image, a

thickness of 2.0, and the aluminum material.
1. In the Model browser, Property folder, click bracket. The Entity Editor opens and displays the
properties' corresponding data.
2. Set Card Image to PSHELL.

4. In the Select Material dialog, select aluminum and then click OK. HyperMesh assigns the
material aluminum to the property bracket.
5. For T (thickness), enter 2.0.
Altair Engineering

358
Step 9: Calculate the section properties for the bar elements (OptiStruct
CBEAM) by using HyperBeam.
1. Open the HyperBeam panel by clicking Properties > HyperBeam from the menu bar.
2. Go to the standard section subpanel.
3. Set the standard section library to HYPERBEAM.
4. Set the standard section type to solid circle.
5. Click create. HyperMesh invokes the HyperBeam module.
Note: The solid, green circle represents the cross section. Under the local coordinate system you
should see the number, 10.0000, which is the circles radius.
HyperBeam module with the standard solid circle section
6. Under Parameter Definition, click the Value field next to Radius (r) and change the value from
10 to 3. HyperMesh updates the values in the Data pane to reflect the circle's new diameter.
7. In the Model browser, right-click on circle_section.1 and select Rename from the context menu.
8. In the editable field, rename the section 6mm_Beam_Sect.
9. Close the HyperBeam module and return to your HyperMesh session by clicking File > Exit from
the menu bar.
Step 10: Create a property collector named bars_prop for the bar elements
(OptiStruct).
1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Create > Property from the context menu.
HyperMesh creates and opens a property in the Entity Editor.
359

Altair Engineering
2. For Name, enter bars_prop.

3. Set Card Image to PBEAM.
5. In the Select Material dialog, select steel and then click OK. HyperMesh assigns the material
steel to the property bars_prop.
6. For Beam Section, click Unspecified >> Beamsection.
7. In the Select Beam Section dialog, select 6mm_Beam_Sect and then click OK. HyperMesh
assigns the beam section, and populates the parameter fields in the PBEAM card with the data in
the 6mm_Beam_Sect beam section.
Step 11: Update the CBEAM elements in the bolts component to use the
PBEAM Property.
1. In the Model browser, Component folder, click bolts. The Entity Editor opens and displays the
component's corresponding data.
2. For Property, click Unspecified >> Property.
Altair Engineering

360
3. In the Select Property dialog, select bars_prop and then click OK. HyperMesh assigns the
property bars_prop to the component bolts.
Step 12: Define a H3D file to be output from OptiStruct by using the control
cards panel.
1. Open the Control Cards panel by clicking Setup > Create > Control Cards from the menu bar.
2. In the Card Image, select the control card FORMAT.
Note: In the card image, the FORMAT line is set to H3D. This specifies OptiStruct to output
results to a Hyper3D (H3D) file, which can be viewed in the HyperView Player. A HTML
report file will be output and the H3D file will be embedded in it.
3. In the number_of_formats = field, enter 2. A second FORMAT line appears in the card image.
4. In the second FORMAT line, click H3D and then select HM.
Note: This option specifies OptiStruct to output the results to a HyperMesh binary results file,
allowing the results to be post-processed within HyperMesh.
5. Exit to the Control Cards panel by clicking return.

361

Altair Engineering
Note: The FORMAT button is now green, which indicates that the card will be exported to the
OptiStruct input file.
Step 13: Export the model to an OptiStruct input file.

2. In the File field, click .
3. In the Select OptiStruct file dialog, navigate to your working directory and save the file as
channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.
4. Click Export. HyperMesh exports the model as an OptiStruct .fem input file for the solver specified
by the current user profile.
Step 14: Review the contents of the file channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.

1. In any text editor (Notepad, Wordpad, Vi, etc.), open the file channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.
2. Near the top of the file, note the following:
The line FORMAT HM, which you specified in HyperMesh
The load step (OptiStruct SUBCASE) named pressing_step which you defined in HyperMesh
Under the load step, the load collector ids (OptiStruct load and constraint set identification
numbers)
3. Search for "FORCE."

4. Note the load set identification number for each force (OptiStruct FORCE). It is either 1 or 2 as
shown below. These numbers correspond to the numbers under the load steps in the file.
5. Search for "SPC" (HyperMesh constraint).

6. Note the constraint set identification number for each constraint (OptiStruct SPC). It is 2 as shown
below, which lists a few of the constraints. This number corresponds to the number under the load
steps in the file.
7. Search for the load collector name "pressing_load."

Altair Engineering

362
8. Note the load collectors, pressing_load and constraints. Also, note their collector ID and color
ID. When the model is imported into HyperMesh, the loads are organized into these load collectors
and have these IDs and colors.
9. Close the file channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.

With the exercise completed, you can save the model as a HyperMesh file, if desired.
363

Altair Engineering
HM-4020: Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties

using HyperBeam
In this tutorial you will learn how to:
Obtain beam section properties for various types of beam cross-sections using HyperBeam, a
module within HyperMesh
Populate the fields of property collectors with beam properties
Assign a property collector to a beam element you create
In FEA, beams are typically modeled as 1D elements. In this tutorial you will become familiar with the
modeling of beam sections for 1D elements (beam, bar, and rod) in HyperMesh. The focus is on
obtaining and assigning beam-section properties, not on creating beam elements themselves.
Exercise: Obtaining and Assigning Beam Cross-Section Properties using

HyperBeam
This exercise uses the model file, hyperbeam.hm.
Model geometry
The model geometry represents different types of cross-sections used in this tutorial: standard, shell,
and solid. The model consists of a solid cylinder attached to a hollow trapezoidal structure, which is
further joined to an irregularly shaped solid component (see previous image).

3. Click OK.
Altair Engineering

364
Step 2: Retrieve and view the file, hyperbeam.hm.

Standard toolbar.
on the

hyperbeam.hm file. A model appears in the graphics area.
Note: This model's geometry represents different types of cross-sections: standard, shell, and
solid. In the following step you will create a standard circular section to represent the crosssection of the cylinder, a shell section with lines to represent the cross-section of the hollow
trapezoidal feature, and a solid section with lines to represent the cross-section of the solid
irregular feature.
This model is organized into four collectors: one contains all of the surfaces, two contain the
lines for the shell-section and the solid-section, respectively, and the last component stores
beam elements.
Step 3: Model a standard circular section using HyperBeam.

In this step, use the standard section subpanel in the HyperBeam panel to quickly model a solid
circular section.
In order to define a circular cross-section, HyperBeam requires the diameter of the cross-section as
input. Measure the diameter of the section before invoking HyperBeam using the Distance panel from
the Geom page.
1. Use the nodes panel to create three nodes on the circle defining the base of the solid cylinder.
From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Nodes > Extract on Line.
Using the lines selector, select the circular line defining the base of the cylinder.
In the number of nodes field, enter 3.
Click create. HyperMesh generates three nodes on the line, two of which are located at the
same location (since the circular line is a line that closes upon itself).
Click return.
Note: With the two independent locations left, you can measure the diameter.
Nodes on circle to measure diameter
365

Altair Engineering
2. Use the Distance panel to measure the distance between the two nodes diametrically opposed.
From the menu bar, click Geometry > Check > Nodes > Distance.
Go to the two nodes subpanel.
Use the N1 and N2 selectors to select the two nodes, which are diametrically opposed, on the
circular line that defines the base of the cylinder. The distance= field reads 110 units, which
indicates the distance between the two nodes and the diameter of the circle.
Click return.
3. Use the HyperBeam panel to create a solid circle standard section.
From the menu bar, click Properties > HyperBeam.
Go to the the standard section subpanel.
Set the standard section library to HYPERBEAM.
Set the standard section type to solid circle.
Click create. The HyperBeam module opens with a solid circle cross-section displayed in the
center panel. The left pane (HyperBeam view) lists the cross-sections defined in the model,
and the right pane (Results window) displays the results for the various beam properties
computed for the dimensions displayed.
HyperBeam window (standard section)
Altair Engineering

366
4. Modify the diameter of the cross-section.
Under Parameter Definition, click the Value field next to Radius (r).
In the editable field, enter 55 and then press ENTER. The value of the diameter updates, along
with the quantities computed for the cross-section in the Results window. These properties
are calculated based on the dimensions that were input. For example, HyperBeam calculates the
area of this cross-section, its moments of inertia, and its torsional constant.
Note: Alternatively, drag the graphical handles, which represent the diameter of the cross-section,
until the diameter changes to the desired value.
5. Assign the name Solid Circle to this cross-section in the HyperBeam view.
In the HyperBeam view, right-click on the name of the cross-section under the auto1 folder
and select Rename from the context menu.
In the editable field, enter Solid Circle and press ENTER.
6. Return to HyperMesh by clicking File > Exit from the menu bar.
The information that was computed is automatically stored in a beamsect collector with the name
you specified for the section. This beamsect collector will later be used to populate the fields of a
property card.
Note: Since geometry information was available, this cross-section could have been defined as a
solid section using the solid section subpanel. A standard section was used instead because
it did not require selection, although it required a diameter measurement.
You may save your HyperMesh model to your working directory at this point.
In this step, a beam cross-section for standard sections was created using HyperBeam. You also
learned how to specify the dimensions for the standard section, and how to save this section for
subsequent use.
Step 4: Model a shell section.

In this step, use the shell section subpanel of the HyperBeam panel to model a beam section for the
trapezoidal feature of the geometry.
Use the lines in the pre-defined component shell_section to define the section. These lines are
located at the mid-plane of the trapezoidal geometry. In addition to these lines, HyperBeam also
requires the thickness of the feature as input to calculate the shell section properties.
Shell section lines
Use the various panels, such as the Distance panel, to find the thickness of this feature. The thickness
of the feature is equal to 2 units.
1. Create a shell section using the lines in the shell_section component.
367
From the menu bar, click Properties > HyperBeam.
Go to the shell section subpanel.
Set the entity selector to lines.

Altair Engineering
Click lines >> by collector.
Select the collector, shell_section.
Click select.
Set cross section plane to fit to entities.
Set section based node to plane base. HyperMesh activates the base node selector.
While left-clicking, move the mouse on top of one of the mid-plane lines as shown in the image
above. Click anywhere on the highlighted line to define the base node.
Set part gen to auto.
Click create. The HyperBeam module opens.
Note: The cross section plane option allows the software to define the plane for calculating beam
cross-sectional properties based on the entity (lines/element) selection. A user-controlled
plane can also be defined by changing the cross-section plane using the toggle.
When using the fit to entities option, you can select a reference node for the plane if you
want properties about a point other than the section centroid. This is done using the section
base node option. This node defines the origin of the coordinate system that serves as the
reference when computing the various beam cross-section properties. All the properties are
calculated both about the centroid and about the node you select.
Shell section
The coordinates of the centroid are calculated with respect to the user-defined coordinate system
appearing at the node location specified earlier. The coordinates of the shear center are calculated
both from the centroid and from the origin of the section. Local Ys and Zs are the coordinates of
the shear center with respect to the origin of the section, while principal Vs and Ws are the
coordinates of the shear center from the centroid of the section.
Altair Engineering

368
2. Modify the thickness of the cross-section and assign it a value of 2 units.
In the Model browser, right-click on shell_section.1 and select Edit from the context menu.
The Edit Shell Section dialog opens.
In the Part thickness field, enter 2. HyperMesh updates the values for the beam properties
computed in the Results window.
Click Update.
Click Exit to close the dialog.
3. Rename the section, Trapezoidal Section.

4. Exit the HyperBeam module by clicking File > Exit from the menu bar.
In this step, a beam cross-section representing a shell section was created using HyperBeam, and
the thickness for the shell section was assigned. The shell section is defined with only one thickness
as it is defined as one part. For shell sections comprised of multiple parts, each part is assigned an
independent thickness.
You may save your model to your working directory.
Step 5: Create a solid section using surfaces.

In this step, model the irregular solid feature of the geometry as a solid section using the solid
section subpanel of the HyperBeam panel.
The input for a solid section can be 2D elements, surfaces, or a set of lines that form a closed area.
Use the surfaces in the solid_section collector to define the solid section.
1. Create a solid section using the surfaces in the solid_section component.
369
In the HyperBeam panel, go to the solid section subpanel.
Set the entity selector to use surfs.
Select the highlighted surface in the following image.
Set section base node to base node.
Click base node.
While left-clicking, hover over a line or the surface until the surface highlights. Click anywhere
on the highlighted entity to select a base node.
Altair Engineering
Defining the solid section
Set analysis type to first order.

This option tells HyperBeam to use first order (linear) elements to calculate the properties of the
section.
Click create. The HyperBeam module opens, meshes the area enclosed by the selected curves
with quadrilateral elements, and calculates the properties using these elements.
Solid section
2. Rename the section "Solid Section" and save your data.

3. Exit HyperBeam and save your data.
Step 6: Assign beam properties to a property collector and a beam element.

Altair Engineering

370
In HyperMesh, you can assign the beam properties computed in HyperBeam and stored in a beamsect
collector to your solver beam property card. To achieve this, create a property collector with the solver
beam property card of interest, and assign the beamsect collector to the property collector.
When creating an actual beam element, assign the property collector to the element itself.
1. Create a property collector with a PBEAM card and assign the Solid Circle beamsect collector to it.
Create a property collector by right-clicking in the Model browser and selecting Create >
Property from the context menu. HyperMesh displays the property in the Entity Editor.
Name the property standard_section.
Set the Card Image to PBEAM.
Assign the Material as steel.
Assign the Beam Section as Solid Circle.
The properties calculated using HyperBeam are automatically assigned to the PBEAM card. Observe
that the values of the parameters (A, I1a, I2a, I12a, J, etc.) are extracted from the properties of
the selected section.
2. Use the Bars panel to create a beam element with the standard_section property assigned, and a
direction vector set to the global x-axis.
From the menu bar, click Mesh > Create > 1D
Elements > Bars
Click property = and select standard_section.
Click the lower-left switch and select vectors as the option to define the orientation of the
beam.
Set the orientation selector to x-axis.
Activate node A.
While left-clicking, hover over the line that runs though the cylinder until it is highlighted. Select
two nodes at the ends of the line for node A and node B.
Creating a beam element
The beam element is created and placed into the beam component.
Note: When creating beam elements, the z-axis is defined by the two nodes selected as node A
and node B. The direction of the cross-section (x- or y-axis) is defined either by using
components, vectors, or a direction node. Due to the nature of this solid circle, how you
define the x- or y-axis is unimportant.
Changes made to a beamsect collector (for example, through editing of a cross-section) are also
automatically applied to any property collector referencing this beamsect collector.

371

Altair Engineering
Summary
In this tutorial, you experimented with the tools and techniques for modeling beam cross-section and
obtaining their properties using HyperBeam. You learned how to edit cross-sections and assign their
properties to property collectors, which can then be assigned to 1-D elements.
For more details on how to create 1-D elements, review the tutorial, Creating 1-D Elements. Additional
techniques for creating 1-D elements from connector entities are discussed in the tutorial, Creating
Connectors.
Altair Engineering

372

In this tutorial, you will learn how to assign element material orientation using the following:
System ID
Vector
Angle

3. Click OK.
Step 2: Retrieve and view the file, composites.hm.

Standard toolbar.
on the

composites.hm file. A model appears in the graphics area.
Step 3: Update all of the elements to the correct element types for
OptiStruct.
1. Open the Element Type panel by clicking Mesh > Assign > Element Type from the menu bar.
2. Click elems >> all. HyperMesh selects all of the element types (1D, 2D, and 3D).
3. Click update.
373

Altair Engineering
Step 4: Assign element material coordinate direction using system ID.

1. Open the Composites panel by clicking composites from the 2D page.
2. Go to the material orientation subpanel.
5. Set the Material orientation method to by system ID.
6. Activate the system selector.
7. Select the rectangular system on top of ball as indicated in the following image.
Note: The system ID = 1.
8. Click color and select a display color for the review vectors or lines.
9. In the size = field, enter 2.0.
Note: This value specifies, in model units, how large the review vectors are when displayed.
10. Click assign.
11. Open the Card Edit panel by clicking
on the Collectors toolbar.

13. Select any element in the model.
14. Click edit.
15. In the Card Previewer dialog, review the card.
Altair Engineering

374
Note: This function assigns the ID of the coordinate system to the selected elements. This can be
verified by reviewing the MCID field of the CQUAD4 card populated with System ID 1 for
the currently loaded OptiStruct user profile. How each analysis code interprets this
information varies. For OptiStruct, refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in
the Bulk Data Section of the OptiStruct Reference Manual. For visualization purposes
HyperMesh also projects the x-axis of the selected coordinate system onto the face of the
shell elements to define the x-axis of the material coordinate system. If you later modify the
system, the element material coordinate directions change implicitly.
16. Exit the Card Previewer by clicking return.
17. Exit the Card Edit panel and return to the Composites panel by clicking return.
Step 5: Assign element material coordinate direction using a system axis.

In this step you should be in the Composites panel, material orientation subpanel.
3. Set the Material orientation method to by system axis.
4. Activate the system selector.
5. Select the rectangular system on top of ball as indicated in the following image.
Note: The system ID = 1.
6. Under the system selector, set the switch to local 2-axis.
7. In the size= field, enter 2.0.
9. Click project.
10. Open the Card Edit panel.
13. Click edit.
Note: This function assigns a material angle to the selected elements, which for OptiStruct is
defined as the angle between the vector direction connecting node1 and node2 of the shell
element (that is, the element coordinate system x-axis) and the projection of the selected
local axis onto the surface of the shell element. This can be verified by reviewing the
THETA field of the CQUAD4 card populated with an angle (in degrees) for the currently
loaded OptiStruct user profile. Each element in this case will have a unique THETA value as
defined by the projection. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For
OptiStruct, refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of
the OptiStruct Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh also projects the
local axis of the selected coordinate system onto the face of the shell elements to define the
x-axis of the material coordinate system.
15. Exit the Card Previewer.
16. Exit the Card Edit panel and return to the Composites panel.
375

Altair Engineering
Step 6: Assign element material coordinate direction using a vector.

3. Set the Material orientation method to by vector.
4. Set the orientation selector to vector.
5. Activate the vector selector.
6. Select the radial r vector from the spherical coordinate system on the bottom of the ball.
Note: The r-axis will flash once when you click on it.
7. Click B.
8. Select the origin of the local spherical system as the base.
11. Click project.
15. Click edit.
Note: This function assigns a material angle to the selected elements, which for OptiStruct is
defined as the angle between the vector direction connecting node1 and node2 of the shell
element (that is, the element coordinate system x-axis) and the projection of the selected
vector onto the surface of the shell element. This can be verified by reviewing the THETA
field of the CQUAD4 card populated with an angle (in degrees) for the currently loaded
OptiStruct user profile. Each element in this case will have a unique THETA value as defined
by the projection. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For OptiStruct,
refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of the
OptiStruct Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh also projects the
selected vector onto the face of the shell elements to define the x-axis of the material
coordinate system.
Step 7: Assign element material coordinate direction using an angle.

3. Set the Material orientation method to by angle.
4. In the angle = field, enter 45.00.
Altair Engineering

376
7. Click set.
11. Click edit.
Note: This function assigns a material angle of 45 degrees to the selected elements, which for
OptiStruct is defined as the angle 45 degrees from the vector direction connecting node1
and node2 of the shell element (that is, the element coordinate system x-axis) using right
hand rule. In order to use right hand rule, the normal direction of the element must be
known and can be determined from the Tools page, Normals panel. This can be verified by
reviewing the THETA field of the CQUAD4 card populated with a 45-degree angle for the
currently loaded OptiStruct user profile. Each element in this case will have a THETA of 45
degrees. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For OptiStruct, refer to
the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of the OptiStruct
Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh defines a vector using OptiStruct
convention on the face of the shell elements to define the x-axis of the material coordinate
system. This option should be used only in situations where great care has been taken to
assure that the node1-node2 direction of the shell elements are initially aligned properly.
Step 8: Review ply directions.

In this step you should be in the Composites panel.
1. Go to ply directions subpanel.
2. Use the switch to select zone based model.
5. Select the collector, yellow_sample.
Note: The yellow_sample collector has a PCOMP card image assigned to it with the following
laminate definitions (45/60/90). The PCOMP definition assigned to the yellow_sample
collector can be reviewed in the card editor.
6. Click select.
7. In the ply = field, enter 1.
Note: This defines the ply number to review.
9. Set the entity selector to props.
10. Click props.
11. Select yellow_sample.
12. Click select.
13. Click edit.
377

Altair Engineering

Note: The first ply defined on the PCOMP card is the most negative z-axis ply as determined from
the element normal. All ply angles on the PCOMP card are relative to the material
coordinate direction set in the above exercises using right hand rule. In order to use right
hand rule, the normal direction of the element must also be known and can be determined
from the Tools page, Normals panel. For OptiStruct, refer to the PCOMP(G) bulk data cards
in the Bulk Data Section of the OptiStruct Reference Manual.
19. Click review.
20. Review additional ply angles, reselect elements, and enter a ply ID by clicking review.
Note: Elements that do not have ply angles assigned will not be displayed. Ply directions are set
through card images in the solver template; an example is PCOMP card for OptiStruct.
Altair Engineering

378

Create loads and boundary conditions on geometry
Map the loads from geometry to elements
Export to a solver deck
Modify the mesh and remap the loads to the new mesh
Exercise: Working with Loads on Geometry

This exercise uses the model file, c-channel0.hm.
C-channel model in shaded mode
Step 1: Retrieve the model file, c-channel0.hm.

In this tutorial, you will experiment with the export of the loads applied to geometry entities.
Therefore, you will need to have a template loaded. In this step, load the OptiStruct user profile and
retrieve the c-channel model. By loading the OptiStruct user profile, the template will be automatically
loaded.
3. Click OK.
Standard toolbar.
on the

c-channel0.hm file. A model appears in the graphics area.
Note: The model's geometry is of a C-channel with two reinforcement ribs. The various surfaces
are organized into several component collectors.
Step 2: Create three load collectors for constraints, forces, and pressure
loads.
In this step, create load collectors to organize constraints, forces, and pressure loads in.
1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Create > Load Collector from the context menu.
HyperMesh creates and opens a load collector in the Entity Editor.
379

Altair Engineering
For Name, enter constraints.
Click the Color icon, and select a new color for the load collector.
Set Card Image to <None>.
3. Repeat steps 2.1 and 2.2 to create two more load collectors named pressure and forces.
Note: Different boundary conditions can now be created.
Defining loads and boundary conditions on geometry.

In the following steps you will apply constraints, pressures, and forces to geometric entities in the
model. You will first constrain the bottom portion of the c-channel using line data, then you will create
pressure loads on the top surfaces. Lastly, you will apply forces to the eight corners of the surfaces
defining the top of the c-channel.
Constraints on lines, pressures on surfaces, and forces on fixed points
Altair Engineering

380
Step 3: Fully constrain the bottom eight lines of the c-channel using the
Constraints panel.
1. In the Model browser, Load Collector folder, right-click on constraints and select Make Current
2. Open the Constraints panel by clicking BCs > Create > Constraints from the menu bar.
5. Select the eight lines defining the bottom portion of the c-channel as indicated in the following
image.
Lines to constrain
6. In the size= field, enter 1.

Note: This is the size of the icons that will be used to represent the constraints in the graphics
area.
7. Clear the label constraints checkbox.
8. Select the dof1, dof2, dof3, dof4, dof5, and dof6 checkboxes.
Note: The selected Dofs will be constrained. Dofs 1, 2, and 3 are x, y, and z translation degrees of
freedom. Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom.
9. Click load types = and select SPC.

10. Click create. HyperMesh applies constraints to the selected lines. Constraints are represented by
triangular icons in the graphics area.
381

Altair Engineering
11. Optional: Display the degrees of freedom labels by selecting the label constraints checkbox.
Step 4: Apply a pressure of 25 units normal to the top three surfaces using
the Pressures panel.
1. In the Model browser, Load Collector folder, right-click on pressure and select Make Current
2. Open the Pressures panel by clicking BCs > Create > Pressures from the menu bar.
4. Set the first switch to entities.

6. Select the three surfaces defining the top of the c-channel as indicated in the following image.
Altair Engineering

382
Surfaces to apply pressure to
7. In the magnitude = field, enter 25 for the pressure.

Note: Specifying a negative magnitude ensures that the pressure load pushes down on the
surfaces. By default, pressure load are created normal to the surfaces.
8. Toggle the display of the pressures from magnitude % = to uniform size =.
Note: Pressure loads are represented by arrows in the graphics area. You can input the size of the
arrow as a value or as a percentage of the actual pressure load applied. In this exercise, you
will specify its length as a certain number.
9. In the uniform size = field, enter 1.
Note: This is the display size of the pressure arrows in the graphics area.
10. Clear the label loads checkbox.
Note: In this exercise, you will not display the actual value of the pressure load in the graphics
area.
11. Click load types = and select PLOAD.
12. Click create. HyperMesh applies pressure loads to the selected surfaces. Pressure loads are
represented with an arrow and a label in the graphics area.
Note: Labels can be template based (PLOAD here) or follow the HyperMesh terminology (P) as
specified in the modeling subpanel of the Options panel.
383

Altair Engineering
Step 5: Create forces at the eight corners of the three top surfaces.
1. In the Model browser, Load Collector folder, right-click on forces and select Make Current from
the context menu.
2. Open the Forces panel by clicking BCs > Create > Forces from the menu bar.
4. Set the entity selector to points.
5. Select the eight fixed points defining the corners of the c-channels top surfaces as indicated in the
following image.
Fixed points to apply forces to
6. Set the coordinate system toggle to global system.

7. Toggle the vector definition from magnitude % = to uniform size =.
8. In the uniform size = field, enter 1.
9. Clear the label loads checkbox.
10. In the magnitude = field, enter 15.
Note: The minus sign is used to specify a direction opposite to the one you will select in the next
step.
11. Under magnitude =, set the orientation selector to z-axis.
12. Click load types = and select FORCE.
13. Click create. HyperMesh creates a point force for each fixed point you selected, with the given
magnitude in the z-direction.
Altair Engineering

384
Loads on geometry
Tip:
If you organized some loads in the wrong load collector, use the Organize panel to move the
loads into the right collector.
In the previous steps you created various types of loads on various geometric entities: lines, surfaces,
and fixed points. The ultimate goal is to apply these loading conditions to finite elements. In the
following steps you will create the elements to apply the loading conditions to.
Step 6: Generate elements on the surfaces.

In this step, use the Automesh panel to create a quad dominant (mixed) mesh. The elements
generated will be organized into their surface's component collector, which will avoid the need to set
current component collectors.
1. Open the Automesh panel by pressing F12.
6. Toggle from elems to current comp to elems to surf comp.
Note: This option ensures that the elements created will be organized into the surfaces component
collector.
Note: In this mode, HyperMesh automatically generates a mesh on the surfaces based on the
element size and the type of elements selected. No further user input is required or can be
supplied.
8. Click mesh. HyperMesh creates a shell mesh on the surfaces.
385

Altair Engineering
Meshed c-channel
In this step, you created a shell mesh on the surfaces. In the following step you will map the loads that
were applied to geometric entities to these finite elements.
Step 7: Map the loads from geometry to elements.

A load collector, just like component collectors, can store both loads on geometry and loads on finite
elements. These two types of loads are separate and independent, and can therefore be manipulated
independently. At this time, your load collectors contain loads only in their geom side. By mapping
these loads on geometry to finite elements and using your existing loadcols, you will also populate
their elems side.
In this step, use the Load on Geom panel to map the loads from the geometric entities (to which the
geometric loads are applied) to the mesh associated with these geometric entities for the constraints
and pressure load collectors.
1. Open the Loads on Geometry panel by clicking BCs > Loads on Geometry from the menu bar.
2. Click loadcols.
3. Select the load collector, constraints.
4. Click select.
5. Click map loads. HyperMesh maps the constraints previously applied to the lines to the nodes of
the mesh associated to these lines.
Note: These constraints are placed in the same load collector as the ones applied to the geometry,
only in the elems portion.
Altair Engineering

386
Constraints mapped to the elements
6. Repeat steps 7.1 through 7.5 to map the pressure loadcol to the mesh. HyperMesh maps the
pressure loads previously applied to the surfaces to the nodes of the mesh associated to these
surfaces
Note: These pressure loads are placed in the same load collector as the ones applied to the
geometry.
Step 8: Export the model to a solver deck.

When you export a model using an export template, only the loads on the mesh are exported. The
loads on the mesh may have been applied directly to the mesh, mapped from geometry to the mesh,
or both. You can use the Export tab to export loads to an ASCII solver-specific file (according to the
loaded export template). The loads are exported as mesh loads.
Use the Custom template to determine which loads are exported. If all is selected, then all of the
loads on the geometry that have not been mapped (if any) are mapped to the loads on the mesh, and
all of the loads on the mesh are exported. If displayed is selected, then all of the displayed loads on
the mesh (if any) are exported. All of the loads on the mesh associated with the displayed loads on the
geometry (if any) are exported as well. If any of the loads on geometry are displayed and have not
been mapped, they will automatically be mapped to the loads on the mesh and exported as well.
In this step, use the Model browser to ensure that only the already mapped loading conditions are
exported. One load collector stores both the loads on the geometry and the loads on the mesh. The
mesh (or multiple meshes) is associated with the geometric entities to which the loads on the
geometry have been applied. Each load type is stored in a dedicated section of the same load collector.
Use the Display panel to separate or simultaneously visualize the loads on the mesh and the loads on
the geometry. Turn off the display of the loads applied to the geometric entities to only display the
loads applied to the mesh.
1. In the Model browser, Load Collector folder, click
of their geometry.
next to all of the loads to turn off the display
Load collector's geometry display turned off
387
Altair Engineering
3. In the File field, click
4. In the Select OptiStruct file dialog, navigate to your working directory and save the file.
5. View advanced export options by clicking
next to Export options.
6. From the Export drop-down list, select Displayed.

7. Click Export. HyperMesh exports the model as an OptiStruct .fem input file.
Note: Because you turned off the geometry display of the load collectors in your model, HyperMesh
only exports the loads mapped previously. You may open the exported deck in any text
editor to verify that no OptiStruct FORCE card has been exported in the deck.
In this section you experimented with exporting loads applied to geometric entities and elements in the
Export tab. You learned that with different combinations of the all/displayed options and loads
displayed in the Model browser, you can control what information gets exported.
Step 9: Modify the mesh and remap the loads to the new mesh.
When loads are applied to geometry, you can re-applying them to different meshes as many times as
you want. This functionality is particularly useful when you want to remesh a model without having to
delete complicated loads or boundary conditions. After remeshing, you can easily remap loads or
boundary conditions that have been applied to geometric entities to the new mesh, while loads applied
to elements are automatically deleted when the elements themselves are deleted.
Note: If you delete geometric entities to which loads are applied to, the loads will be deleted. The
deletion of geometric entities will not affect any loads applied to the mesh.
In this step, you will remesh the surfaces.
1. Go to the Automesh panel.
4. Leave all other options used earlier unchanged.
5. Click mesh. The automesher deletes the existing elements, and creates a completely new set
based on the new element size.
Note: HyperMesh removes the loads that were applied to the initial mesh since the elements are
no longer there.
6. Click return.
New mesh
Altair Engineering

388
Step 10: Map all the loads on geometry to the new mesh using the Load on
Geom panel.
In this step you will remap the loads applied to the geometry to the new mesh.
1. Open the Loads on Geometry panel by clicking BCs > Loads on Geometry from the menu bar.
2. Click loadcols.
3. Select the following load collectors: constraints, pressure, and forces.
4. Click select.
5. Click map loads. HyperMesh applies the loading conditions initially defined for the geometric
entities to the new mesh, and places the various loading conditions into the same load collector as
the corresponding ones applied to the geometry.
Note: You did not have to display these loads to map them.
In this step, you experimented with the remapping of loads applied to geometric entities to a new
mesh. Loads applied to geometric entities can be mapped several times to the different finite element
entities attached to these geometric entities. For example, this functionality is useful in a situation
where a mesh had to be changed, and it saved you from having to recreate loads on the elements.

With all of the exercises complete, you can save the model if desired.
Summary
In this tutorial, you used several boundary condition creation panels to generate constraints and
various loading conditions on geometric entities. You then experimented with the mapping of these
loads on the geometry to finite elements. You also familiarized yourself with the rules that govern the
export of loads on geometric entities.
No consideration to the creation of specific card images that need to accompany the various loading
conditions was given. For more information on how to generate the various loading conditions for
different solvers, refer to the Modeling / Solver Specific section of the HyperMesh tutorials.
389

Altair Engineering

Import include files
Review and manipulate includes
Create includes and reorganize the database
Locate entities in includes
Import new data into includes
Export options
While HyperMesh supports include formulations for several other solvers, you will use LS-DYNA 970
input decks for the purpose of this tutorial.
Many FEA solvers allow you to organize your input deck into separate files, and provide a mechanism
to read all files linked to a single input deck. This capability is commonly known as "includes."
HyperMesh provides several options for importing such models, one of which preserves the include
structure upon import. The Include view in the Model browser is available to manipulate these
includes. The Include view lets you create, review, edit, organize, and update the contents of any
HyperMesh model into various include files. Every entity in HyperMesh then belongs to either the
master model or one of its include files.
Step 1: Load the LS-DYNA user profile and import the model.
In this step you will load the LS-DYNA user profile, import the LS-DYNA decks (master file and include
files) defining the model, and preserve the organization of the data into the various include files.
2. In the User Profile dialog, select LsDyna, Keyword970.
Note: Selecting a solver user profile sets the FE input reader to this solver and loads the solvers
FE output template. It also loads a macro menu with numerous tools specific to this
interface. The graphical user interface is also tailored to this solver with panel names and
options renamed or removed to match its terminology as much as possible.
3. Click OK.
4. From the menu bar, click File > Import > Solver Deck.
Note: The Import - Solver Deck tab contains the following advanced options for importing
include files:
Merge: merges all of the data in the individual includes into a master model, and then imports
the master model into HyperMesh as a single model. HyperMesh has no knowledge regarding
individual include files with this option.
Skip: reads INCLUDE statements as control cards and ignores the data within the include files.
None of the contents of the include files are processed.
Preserve: preserves the INCLUDE statements, and processes the contents of the include files.
The contents of the include files are "marked" to remember which include file they belong to.
When the deck is exported from HyperMesh, if desired, all of the entities that are marked as
belonging to include files get written back to that include file. The entire file structure (the
master file and all of its include files) are rewritten from the HyperMesh database.
5. In the File field, navigate to the <installation_directory>\tutorials\hm\ directory and open

the master.k file.
6. Next to Import options, click
7. From the Include files drop-down list, select Preserve.

Altair Engineering

390
8. Click Import. HyperMesh imports the master.k deck, and the wheels.key, frame.key and
engine.key include files, which are also present in the same directory. The truck model defined
with a master deck and several include files were imported into HyperMesh while preserving the
organization of the data between the various files.
Truck model
Step 2: Review the model organization using the Include view in the Model
browser.
You can access the Include view (
) in the Model browser. In this view you can create, review,
edit, organize, and update the contents of a model into various include files. From the right-click
context menu you can access additional Include view functions. For a complete description of the
options available, refer to Model Browser's include view.
In this section, you will launch the Include view, review the structure of the model and its organization
into the various includes, and experiment with some of the display and configuration options available.
structure.
. HyperMesh displays a tree-like organization of the database
Note: The Master Model is at the top level of the include browser. Data, which does not have any
references to an include file, is stored in the master model. Each include file is represented
by
along with its file name. Each include can be expanded to reveal its contents. The
contents of each include is grouped into folders containing each type, next to which appears
the total number of entities of that type. Each of the folders can be expanded to review the
individual entities in that folder. The browser can be configured to show only specific entities
of interest.
2. Expand the include, engine.key.
3. Review its content, which consists of components, materials, and properties.
4. Expand the Component folder, which consists of six component collectors.
Components content of the engine.key include
391

Altair Engineering
5. Review the contents of the other includes as well as the contents of the folders belonging to the
Master Model. The wheels.key include contains, for example, components, control volumes,
groups, materials, properties, and sets.
Note: While most entities are presented in this tree, elements and nodes are not listed, as this
would not be practical for larger models.
6. In the Model browser, right-click and select Collapse All from the context menu. All of the folders
collapse.
7. Right-click on Master Model and experiment with the Show and Hide display options in the
context menu.
8. Visually review the components that each include contains by isolating the include you wish to
review using the Isolate only option in the context menu.
Displaying only the frame.key include
9. Turn on the display of the entire model.
In this section, you launched the Include view and reviewed the structure of the model and its
organization into the various includes. You also customized the Include view and used some of the
display options to modify the display of the model in the graphics area.
Step 3: Review the various options available in the Include view.

You can configure the columns within the Include View so that only the columns you are interested in
are displayed. In this step you will learn how to configure the Include View in the Model browser.
1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Collapse All from the context menu.
Note: There are columns for Export, Include Path, and Include Type.
2. Expand the frame.key folder.

Note: The Export, Include Path and Include Type columns are only relevant for the include files
and not for the individual entities within the file.
Altair Engineering

392
3. In the Model browser, right-click and select Configure Browser from the context menu.
4. In the Browser Configuration dialog, select the Columns tab.
Note: From the Columns tab you can can define which columns are displayed in the Model
browser when you are in the Include View.
5. Clear the Include Type checkbox.

6. Click OK. The Include Type column is no longer visible in the browser.
Step 4: Create new includes, reorganize the model, and locate entities in
includes.
Whether you import includes or are simply starting from a flat HyperMesh model, you can create new
includes in your database using the Include View, and organize entities into them using the
Organize panel. You can also select entities (using the standard SHIFT and CTRL keys) from the
Include view and drag them between two includes or between the master model and an include.
To determine which include a specific entity belongs to, you can use the Organize panels locate
function.
In this section, create a new include for the doors and organize the corresponding collectors into it
using the Organize panel. Finally, determine which include a certain material belongs to using the
locate function.
1. In the Model browser, Include View, right-click on Master Model and select Create > Include
File from the context menu. HyperMesh adds a new include under the master model with an
editable name, and displays it in bold, which signifies that it is the current include.
Note: You can add includes under the master model or under includes themselves.
393

Altair Engineering
2. In the editable field, enter the name doors.key for the new include.
Note: You can rename or make current a new include using the right-click context menu.
3. Open the Organize panel by clicking organize from the Tool page.
4. Go to the includes subpanel.
6. Click dest = and select doors.key as the destination for the components.
7. Click comps.
8. Select the components: SHELL: DOOR-LEFT, SHELL: DOOR-RIGHT, and SHELL: DOORWINDOWG-LEFT.
9. Click select.
10. Click move. HyperMesh moves the selected components into the doors.key include.
Note: An expand/collapse icon is added next to the doors.key include, which indicates that data
has been placed under it.
11. Expand the doors.key include, Component folder to review the components that you moved.
12. Hide all of the includes except doors.key. HyperMesh displays the elements organized in this
include in the graphics area.
Door and window elements in doors.key.
13. Change the display back to Display All.

14. In the Organize panel, includes subpanel, set the entity selector to mats.
Altair Engineering

394
15. Click locate. HyperMesh displays a list of all the materials available in this model.
16. Select the material, MATL1_38. HyperMesh updates the dest= field to show which include (or
master) file this particular material belongs to. In this case, it belongs to the wheels.key include.

In this section, you created a new include in the Include view, and moved some components from
the master model, as well as their corresponding elements, into it. Finally, you used the locate function
to quickly identify which include a material belonged to.
Step 5: Import new data into an include and export the model.
By default, the Master Model is always the current file (displayed in bold in the Include view) and
any new entities you create or import into HyperMesh will be automatically placed in it. You can use
the Make Current option from the Include view context menu to make any include the current
include. When you create a new include, this include will automatically become the current include.
You can use the Include File Options function in the Include view context menu to define export
options for individual include files. Using this option, you can define whether the include file should get
exported, when the export function is used, and where the file should be exported.
The Export - Solver Deck tab contains the following advanced options for exporting models that
contain include files:
Merge: merges all of the data in individual include files into a single master model during export.
The exported file does not contain references to any include files.
Preserve: exports all the data in individual include files separately to their corresponding files.
The references to these includes in the master model file are also maintained.
In this section, you will create a new include in the master model labeled barrier.dyn, and then
import a barrier model into it. You will then review the include file options for each one of the includes
in the model and modify them as needed. Lastly, you will export the model, while also preserving the
includes.
1. In the Include view, right-click on Master Model and select Create > Include File from the
context menu.
2. In the editable field, enter the name barrier.dyn for the new include.
Note:
The new include is displayed in bold, which indicates that it is now the current include
and any new data created or imported into HyperMesh will be placed in it.
3. From the menu bar, click File > Import > Solver Deck. The Import tab opens.
4. In the File field, navigate to the <install_directory>\tutorials\hm\ directory and open the
barrier.dyn file.
5. Click Import. Hypermesh imports the barrier.
395

Altair Engineering
Truck and barrier
6. In the Include view, expand Barrier.dyn and review its contents.

Note: barrier.dyn is displayed in bold, and both barrier.dyn and doors.key are non-italicized,
while engine.key, frame.key, and wheels.key are all italicized. This is a visual representation
of the export option that is set for each of these three includes.
7. Right-click on engine.key and select Include File Options from the context menu. The Include
File Options dialog opens, and displays the following:
File path- type in or browse for the directory in which the include is to be exported.
Do not export - When this check box is selected, HyperMesh will not export include when you
export the model. When this check box is clear, HyperMesh exports the include when you export
the model. This check box is automatically selected when you read includes into HyperMesh that
have their permission set to read only, as well as includes that are referenced by the master
include using absolute paths.
The frame.key, wheels.key and engine.key includes are all referenced by the master.k
include, that you imported initially using relative paths (edit the master.k file to verify this), but
their permissions were set to read only. In order to export these includes, clear the Do not
export check box.
8. For the engine.key, frame.key and wheels.key includes, clear the Do not export check box and
then click Set.
9. Right-click on an include and select Export All Includes from the context menu. The Export all
includes dialog opens.
10. In the File name field, enter the location and name of the master model and click OK. HyperMesh
exports all of the include files as individual files.
Altair Engineering

396
Note: This option is equivalent to exporting the master model from the Export - Solver Deck tab
( ) with the preserve includes check box selected. When you want to export a single file,
use the export subpanel and set export option to merge includes.
11. Go to the directory you selected in the previous step and verify that all of the includes have been
exported with the names set in the Include view.
Step 6 (Optional): Save your work

The tutorial is complete. Save your work as a HyperMesh file.
In this tutorial you used the include browser to manage the use of includes in your truck model.
Several options for import, display, organization, and export were used.
397

Altair Engineering
HM-4070: OptiView
Import an optimization model
Create a new set of optimization entities
Organize these into optimization problems
Run both problems
View results
Exercise
Step 1: Launch HyperMesh and set the user profile to OptiStruct.
Step 2: Import the cclip.fem file.
1. Select Import Solver Deck
from the Standard toolbar.
2. Select OptiStruct for the File type.

3. Click the
in the File line to browse to <installation_directory>\tutorial\hm\ and select
cclip.fem.
4. Click Import to open the file.
Step 3: Create Problem 1 and organize optimization entities.

1. In the Model browser, click (Optimization View).
2. Review the Optimization Repository. The Optimization Repository gives an overview of all
optimization related entities in the database. Info types and children entities help give a clear
snapshot without having to review individual entities.
Figure 1
3. Right-click the Optimization Problems folder and click Create > Optimization Problem.
HyperMesh creates an optimization problem and opens it in the Entity Editor.
4. In the Entity Editor, name this problem Topology.
5. Drag and drop all the entities from the repository into the newly created problem.
Note: You can drag and drop entities from the repository into problems or problems into problems.
Any combination of selected entities can be dragged and dropped.
Altair Engineering

398
Step 4: Define a new set of optimization entities.

1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Create > Free Size Desvar from the context menu.
The Free Size Optimization panel opens, from which you can define a free size design variable.
Tip:
Give the free size design variable a meaningful name so you can easily drag and drop.
2. Use the props selector to select the shells property.

3. You can create new response/constraint pairs, or anything else you want to change from problem
to problem. For this tutorial, we will just compare Topology to Free Size.
Step 5: Create Problem 2 and organize optimization entities.

1. In the Model browser, right-click and select Create > Optimization Problem from the context
menu.
2. In the Entity Editor, name this problem Free Size.
3. Drag and drop all the entities defined in the repository to the newly created problem.
Note: Two design variables will be defined for the Free Size problem.
4. In the Free Size folder, right-click on the shell design variable and select Remove from Problem
Note: This will not delete the problem from the repository.
Step 6: Set problems to export and run.

1. In the Model browser, right-click on the Topology problem and select Set Export from the
context menu.
Note: Once problems are defined, only one can be exported at a time. The problem set to export is
in bold, and furthermore, the Entity State browser shows these rules.
2. Open the OptiStruct panel.
3. Set the export options to custom.
4. Save the input file as cclip_topology.fem.
5. Click OptiStruct to run the analysis.
Note: The Optimization View allows one .hm for all optimization problems, and it is up to the user
to wisely name each input file.
399

Altair Engineering
Customization
Scripts
Altair Engineering

400
Scripts
401

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial you will create a new button on the User page of the Utility menu.
Tools
The User page is available on the Utility menu. To access the User page:
1. From the menu bar, click View > Browsers > HyperMesh > Utility.
2. At the bottom of the Utility menu, click the User button
Command files and Tcl/Tk scripts can be added to the userpage.mac file. When HyperMesh starts, it
first looks for the userpage.mac file in the directory from which it launches, and then in the installation
directory. UNIX users also have the option of putting the userpage.mac file in their home directory.
The userpage.mac file controls the display and available operations on the User page of the
HyperMesh Utility menu. In order to invoke a command file or Tcl/Tk script from the User page, a
button must be defined inside the userpage.mac file. The *createbutton command is used to define
the button and its characteristics. The syntax for this command is:
*createbutton(page, name, row, column, width, COLOR, helpString, macroName [ , arg1
])
where:
page
The page number on which the button is to appear. For the User
page, this value is 5.
name
The text to display on the button, enclosed in quotes: " ".
row
The row in which to place the button. The number of visible rows
depends on your monitors graphics resolution. A positive value
indicates an absolute row number. A 0 indicates the next highest
available row. A negative value indicates the number of rows to
skip. Rows begin at the bottom of the menu.
column
The column where the button starts (0-10). Columns begin to the
right of the menu.
width
The width of the button (max = 10).
COLOR
The color of the button. The available button colors are: RED,
BLUE, GREEN, CYAN, MAGENTA, YELLOW, GRAY, and BUTTON
(background). The color name must appear in capital letters.
helpString
The string to be displayed in the menu bar when the middle mouse
button is pressed and the button is clicked, enclosed in quotes: " ".
macroName
The command to run when the button is pressed, enclosed in

quotes: " ".
arg1
A list of optional arguments passed to the script.
Altair Engineering

402
Exercise
In this exercise, you will create a button on the User page that will launch the lighting.tcl dialog
from the HyperMesh installation.
Step 1: Create the userpage.mac file.

Using a text editor, create a blank userpage.mac file in the appropriate directory.
When HyperMesh starts, it first looks for the userpage.mac file in the directory from which it launches
and then in the installation directory. On Windows, the default launch directory is in the My
Documents folder. UNIX users also have the option of putting the userpage.mac file in their home
directory. It is not recommended to modify the userpage.mac file in the installation directory.
Step 2: Add the command to create the button.

1. Add the following text to the userpage.mac file:
*createbutton(5,"Lighting",10,5,5,YELLOW,"Launch the lighting.tcl

script","EvalTcl","lighting.tcl")
The EvalTcl macro is defined in the globalpage.mac file in the HyperMesh installation. It takes a
Tcl script as its argument and executes the script.
Notice that the full path is not used to reference the lighting.tcl script. A full path can be
specified if the file is not located in one of the predefined paths that HyperMesh searches to find
scripts. Users can add additional search paths using the TCL_INCLUDE environment variable.
Relative paths can also be used from these search paths.
2. Save the modified userpage.mac file.
Step 3: Load the updated userpage.mac file.

1. Restart HyperMesh from the working directory or reload the current macro menu .mac file. This
allows the current session to use the modified userpage.mac file.
To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, from the menu bar select
Preferences > Menu Config and click on retrieve next to macro file. Make sure to load the
proper .mac file from the hm/scripts/<profile name> directory based on the current user profile,
or load the default hm.mac in the hm/bin/<platform> directory if no user profile is loaded.
2. Click the User button on the Utility Menu. You will see Lighting, the button defined in Step 2.
Compare this button to its definition. It is yellow in color, begins in column 5 of row 10, and
extends half way across the Utility Menu.
403

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial you will:
Determine the commands to save the current HyperMesh model
Create a Utility Menu macro to execute the command
Create a new button on the User page of the Utility Menu to run the macro
Tools
In order to execute command file commands or Tcl scripts from a button on any of the HyperMesh
Utility Menu pages, a Utility Menu macro must first be defined. A Utility Menu macro contains
valid command file or templex commands that execute the appropriate operations, and is defined using
the *beginmacro and *endmacro commands. Macros may accept data passed to them using the
arguments $1, $2, etc. Each argument specifies where the values should be substituted. These
macros are defined within the .mac files, including the userpage.mac file.
The following skeleton code shows the format of a Utility Menu macro:
*beginmacro(macroname)
command statements go here
*endmacro()
Utility Menu macros consist of HyperMesh Tcl modify commands.
Exercise
Create a Utility Menu macro from a command file that saves the model and add a button on the User
page that will launch the macro:
1. Define the task.
2. Delete the existing command.cmf file. This file is located in either the start-in directory or the
current working directory.
3. Perform the operations in HyperMesh that the script should run.
4. Extract the commands from the command.cmf file.
5. Add the commands to the userpage.mac file.
6. Modify as necessary and add macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro.
7. Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the new macro defined in Step 6.
8. Reload the current .mac file into HyperMesh to load the modified userpage.mac.
9. Test the macro.
Step 1: Define the task.

The first step in creating a macro is to define the process you want to automate and recognize the
individual tasks to reach the desired conclusion. Here, you want to create a one-button macro to
automate saving the current HyperMesh model to a file named temp.hm. The actions necessary to
complete this task are:
From the menu bar, select File > Save as > Model.
Use the file browser to locate a directory and enter the name for the filename.
Click Save.
Step 2: Delete the existing command.cmf file.

Altair Engineering

404
The current command.cmf file is located in the current working directory. When first opening
HyperMesh, the file is created in the directory HyperMesh is launched from. As soon as you begin
working in HyperMesh all executed commands are written to the command.cmf file. If the file already
exists, the commands are appended to the file. Deleting the file allows HyperMesh to create a new file
and allows the user to easily find the relevant commands.
Step 3: Perform the operations in HyperMesh.

Execute the full process within HyperMesh. Every command issued in HyperMesh appears in the order
executed and is reflected in the command.cmf file.
1. From the menu bar, select File > Save as > Model.
2. Using the file browser, locate a directory to save the temporary file with the name temp.hm.
Remember this is just a temporary file and will be overwritten each time the macro is executed.
3. Click Save.
Step 4: Extract the commands from the command.cmf file.

1. Open the command.cmf file using any text editor.
2. Locate the *writefile command at or near the end of the command.cmf file.
This is the command that writes the model file.
3. Select and copy this line.
Step 5: Add the commands to the userpage.mac file.

1. Open the userpage.mac file using any text editor.
2. Paste the *writefile command copied from the command.cmf file inside the userpage.mac file.
Step 6: Modify as necessary and add Utility Menu macro wrapper commands.
1. Remove the path in the *writefile command so that it looks like:
*writefile("temp.hm",0)
2. Enclose the commands from Step 5 between the wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro.
In the *beginmacro command, name the macro macroSave.
*beginmacro(macroSave)
*writefile("temp.hm",0)
*endmacro()
The macro name macroSave will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName
field in the *createbutton command.
3. Add the command *answer(yes) after the *writefile command.
The command *answer(yes) automatically answers yes if prompted to overwrite the file in the
event temp.hm already exists.
4. Save the userpage.mac file.
Step 7: Add the macro button.

Create a button on the User page to execute the macro.
1. Create a new button in the userpage.mac file.
405

Altair Engineering
*createbutton(5,"Save File",20,0,10,GREEN,"Save file","macroSave")

This creates a button on page 5 (User page), names it, places it in the 20th row, starts it at column
0, sets the width at 10 columns, applies to it the color green, provides a help string and references
the macro macroSave defined in Step 6.
Step 8: Reload the current .mac file into HyperMesh to load the modified
userpage.mac.
To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, select Preferences > Menu
Config from the menu bar and click on retrieve next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper
.mac file from the hm\scripts\<profile name> directory based on the current user profile, or load the
default hm.mac in the hm\bin\<platform> directory if no user profile is loaded.
Step 9: Test the macro.

1. Click the User button on the Utility Menu.
The new button labeled Save File should be on the User page.
2. Click this button to automatically save your file.
The file is saved to the directory specified in the *writefile command. In this case no directory is
specified so HyperMesh saves the file to the start-up or current working directory. It will always
save with the name specified in the macro (in this case, temp.hm).
Altair Engineering

406
HM-8030: Create a Utility Menu Macro to Create Constraints on a

Plane
Determine the commands to create constraints on a plane
Create a Utility Menu macro to execute the commands
Tools
*endmacro()
Load collectors can be created and edited using the Model Browser. Simply right-click in the Model
Browser and select Create > Load Collector to create one. To edit the name, color, or card image
of a load collector, right click on the load collector name in the Model Browser and select Edit
The Constraints panel can be accessed from the menu bar by selecting BCs > Create > Constraints
The Constraints panel allows you to create and update constraints.
Exercise
In this exercise you will create a Utility Menu macro from a command file that creates constraints on
a plane and add a button on the User page that will launch the macro:
1. Define the task.
5. Add them to the userpage.mac file.
6. Modify as necessary and add macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro.
7. Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the new macro defined in Step 6.
9. Test the macro.
407

Altair Engineering

automatically create constraints on certain nodes. The actions necessary to complete this task are:
Create a load collector for the constraints.
Enter the Constraints panel.
Apply constraints to the nodes on the end of the beam lying in the YZ plane.


1. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model and load the file, c_channel-tcl.hm.
2. Right click in the Model Browser and select Create > Load Collector.
3. In the Name field enter the name constraints.
4. Click create.
5. Open the Constraints panel.
6. Active the create subpanel.
7. Click nodes and select the on plane option.
The plane that will be selected is the YZ plane. This is accomplished by selecting the x-axis vector,
which is normal to the YZ plane. The base node option is then highlighted, allowing a node on one
end of the beam to be selected as the base node for the plane. All nodes on that plane are
highlighted when select is clicked.
8. Click create.

2. Select and copy all lines in the file.
Observe the *createmark command and the list of entity ID numbers. A mark is a storage buffer in
HyperMesh. For some actions performed on entities, the entity ID is first entered into the
designated mark.
There are two marks available to the user (1 and 2) for each entity type (elements, nodes, lines,
surfaces, points, etc). At the execution of the command using the mark, the changes apply to all
entities identified in the mark.
Step 5: Add the commands to the userpage.mac file.

1. Open the userpage.mac file using any text editor.
2. Paste the commands copied from the command.cmf file inside the userpage.mac file.
Altair Engineering

408
Step 6: Modify as necessary and add Utility menu macro wrapper

commands.
1. Enclose the commands in Step 5 between the wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In
the *beginmacro command, name the macro macroEdge_Const as shown, following. Remove any
lines copied from the command.cmf file that are not shown in the following.
*beginmacro(macroEdge_Const)
*collectorcreate(loadcols,"constraints","",11)
*createmark(nodes,1) 3358-3360 3296 3297 3142 etc
*loadcreateonentity_curve(nodes,1,3,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0)
*endmacro()
The macro name macroEdge_Const will be used to connect the button with the macro via the
macroName field in the *createbutton command.
2. Change the *createmark(nodes,1) command to *createmark(nodes,1) "on plane" 0 0 0 1 0
0 0.5 1 0
"on plane" is one of many selection methods available. This method allows the selection of only
entities that lie within a tolerance (in this case, 0.5) of the plane defined at the point (0,0,0) with
normal vector (1,0,0). In this exercise, this is the YZ plane. See the Entity Selector online help
topic for further details.
The final macro should look like:
*beginmacro(macroEdge_Const)
*collectorcreate(loadcols,"constraints","",11)
*createmark(nodes,1) "on plane" 0 0 0 1 0 0 0.5 1 0
*loadcreateonentity(nodes,1,3,1,0,0,0,0,0,0)
*endmacro()

*createbutton(5,"Edge Const",18,0,10,GREEN,"Add constraints to outer edge of

elements","macroEdge_Const")
0, makes it 10 columns wide, gives it the color green, provides a help string and references the
macro macroSave defined in Step 6.
409

Altair Engineering
userpage.mac.
default hm.mac in hm\bin\<platform> if no user profile is loaded.

The new button labeled Edge Const should be on the User page.
2. Click this button to run the macro that automatically creates constraints on the outer row of nodes.
Some commands used in this exercise are very model-specific. For example, creating a load
collector named constraints may cause an error if the collector already exists. Also, selecting
nodes using the by plane option and specifying the YZ plane may not be applicable to a lot of
situations.
Several options exist to make the *createmark commands general enough to work with any
model. For example, to select all the currently displayed elements in the model use the command
*createmark(elements,1) "by displayed".
Another option is to replace the *createmark command with *createmarkpanel. When executed,
this command presents the user with a selection panel for the entity specified. For this macro, the
*createmarkpanel command could be used to allow the user to select the appropriate nodes.
Additionally, this Utility Menu macro could be converted to a Tcl script that allows for additional
logic and error checking controls. This way, the user could also be prompted to enter a name for
the load collector using hm_getstring. An error check could then be performed to determine if
that load collector already exists, and appropriate action would then be taken.
Altair Engineering

410

Determine the commands to save the current HyperMesh model
Create a Utility Menu macro to execute the commands
Tools
*endmacro()
Exercise
In this exercise you will create a Tcl script from the command file commands, create a Utility Menu
macro that runs the Tcl script and add a button on the User page that will launch the macro:
1. Define the task.
5. Create a Tcl script by converting the commands to Tcl format and modifying as necessary.
6. Create a new Utility Menu macro that runs a Tcl script.
7. Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the macro created in Step 6 with the appropriate
Tcl script filename.
9. Test the macro.

automate saving the current HyperMesh model to a file named temp.hm. The actions necessary to
complete this task are:
From the menu bar, select File > Save as > Model.
Use the file browser to locate a directory and enter the name for the filename.
Click Save.

411

Altair Engineering

1. From the menu bar, select Files > Save as > Model.
2. Using the file browser, locate a directory to save the temporary file with the name temp.hm.
Remember this is just a temporary file and will be overwritten each time the macro is executed.
3. Click Save.

2. Locate the *writefile command at or near the end of the command.cmf file.
This is the command that writes the model file.
3. Select and copy this line.
Step 5: Create a Tcl script names savefile.tcl, convert the commands to Tcl
format and modify as necessary.
1. Create a new file named savefile.tcl using any text editor.
2. Paste the *writefile command copied from the command.cmf file inside the savefile.tcl file.
3. Remove all () and , and replace them with spaces. Also remove the . The command should
look like:
*writefile temp.hm 0
4. Add the command *answer yes after the *writefile command.
The command *answer yes automatically answers yes if prompted to overwrite the file in the
event temp.hm already exists. Notice that there are no parentheses.
5. Save the savefile.tcl script in the current working directory.
Step 6: Create a Utility Menu macro that runs a Tcl script.

1. Create a new Utility Menu macro that calls the *evaltclscript command to run a Tcl script,
using the macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In the *beginmacro command,
name the macro EvalTcl.
*beginmacro("EvalTcl")
*evaltclscript($1,0)
*endmacro()
The macro name EvalTcl will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName field
in the *createbutton command.
Altair Engineering

412

*createbutton(5,"SaveFile TCL",15,0,10,GREEN,"Save file using TCL macro",
"EvalTcl","savefile.tcl")
0, sets its width at 10 columns, applies to it the color green, provides a help string and references
the macro EvalTcl defined in Step 6.
Notice that the full path is not used to reference the savefile.tcl script. A full path can be
userpage.mac.

The new button labeled Save File TCL should be on the User page.
2. Click this button to automatically save your file.
The file is saved to the directory specified in the *writefile command. In this case no directory is
specified so HyperMesh saves the file to the start-up or current working directory. It will always
save with the name specified in the macro, in this case temp.hm.
413

Altair Engineering
HM-8050: Create Forces on Nodes and Add a Button on the User

Page
Determine the commands to create forces on nodes
Create a Utility menu macro to execute the commands
Tools
The following skeleton code shows the format of a Utility menu macro:
*endmacro()
Utility menu macros consist of HyperMesh Tcl modify commands.
Load collectors can be created and edited using the Model Browser. Simply right click in the Model
Browser and select Create > Load Collector to create one. To edit the name, color, or card image
of a load collector, right click on the load collector name in the Model Browser and select Edit
The Forces panel can be accessed from the menu bar by selecting BCs > Create > Forces.
The Forces panel allows you to create and update forces.
Exercise
In this exercise you will create a Tcl script from the command file commands, create a Utility Menu
macro that runs the Tcl script and add a button on the User page that will launch the macro:
1. Define the task.
6. Create a Utility Menu macro that runs a Tcl script.
7. Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the macro created in Step 6 with the appropriate
Tcl script filename.
9. Test the macro.
Altair Engineering

414

automatically create forces on certain nodes. The actions necessary to complete this task are:
Create a load collector for the forces
Enter the Forces panel
Apply forces to the nodes of interest


1. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model and then load the file, c_channel-tcl.hm.
2. Right click in the Model Browser and select Create > Load Collector.
3. In the Name field enter the name forces.
4. Click Create.
5. Open the Forces panel.
6. Activate the create subpanel.
7. Click nodes and select one node in the model.
For the direction of the force choose the z-axis option.
For magnitude=, enter 23.
Toggle from magnitude % option to uniform size option for load size and set the value to
15.
9. Click create.

1. Open the command.cmf file using any text editor or use the Open Command File
Scripting Toolbar.
option in the
2. Select and copy the following three lines in the file:

*loadsize(1,15,0,1)
*createmark(nodes,1) 3237
*loadcreateonentity_curve(nodes,1,1,1,0,0,23,0,0,23,0,0,0,0,0)
Observe the *createmark command and the list of entity id numbers. A mark is a storage buffer in
HyperMesh. For some actions performed on entities, the entity ID is first entered into the
designated mark.
There are two marks available to the user (1 and 2) for each entity type (elements, nodes, lines,
surfaces, points, etc.). At the execution of the command using the mark, the changes apply to all
entities identified in the mark.
415

Altair Engineering
Step 5: Create a Tcl script named create_force.tcl, convert the commands

to Tcl format and modify as necessary.
1. Create a new file named create_force.tcl using any text editor.
2. Paste the copied commands from the command.cmf file inside the create_force.tcl file.
3. Remove all () and, and replace them with spaces. The commands should look something like:
*loadsize 1 15 0 1
*createmark nodes 1 3237
*loadcreateonentity_curve nodes 1 1 1 0 0 23 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0
Simply running the above commands will work without a problem, but note that the *createmark
command is hard coded to the single node picked when generating the command file. Also notice
that the magnitude is hard coded as well. This is not very useful for a generic utility.
4. Replace the *createmark command with the *createmarkpanel command.
The command *createmarkpanel presents the user with a selection panel for the entity specified.
The commands should now look like this:
*loadsize 1 15 0 1
*createmarkpanel nodes 1 "Select nodes for load creation"
*loadcreateonentity_curve nodes 1 1 1 0 0 23 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0
5. If you want to let the user specify the magnitude, prompt the user for a value using hm_getfloat.
Then replace the hard coded magnitude in the *loadcreateonentity_curve command with the
user defined value. The commands should now look like this:
*loadsize 1 15 0 1
*createmarkpanel nodes 1 "Select nodes for load creation"
set mag_val [hm_getfloat "Magnitude=" "Enter force magnitude:"]
*loadcreateonentity_curve nodes 1 1 1 0 0 $mag_val 0 0 $mag_val 0 0 0 0 0
6. Save the create_force.tcl script.
Step 6: Create a Utility menu macro that runs a Tcl script.

1. Create a new Utility Menu macro that calls the *evaltclscript command to run a Tcl script,
using the macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In the *beginmacro command,
name the macro EvalTcl.
*beginmacro("EvalTcl")
*evaltclscript($1,0)
*endmacro()
The macro name EvalTcl will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName field
in the *createbutton command.

Altair Engineering

416
*createbutton(5,"Create Force",16,0,10,GREEN,"Create z-direction force on selected

nodes","EvalTcl","create_force.tcl")
This creates a button on page 5 (User page), names it, places it in the 16th row, places its start at
column 0, gives it a width of 10 columns, applies to it the color green, provides a help string and
references the macro create_force.tcl defined in Step 6.
Notice that the full path is not used to reference the create_force.tcl script. A full path can be
userpage.mac.
To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open from the menu bar select
Preferences > Menu Config and click on retrieve next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper

The new button labeled Create Force should be on the User page.
2. Click this button to run the Tcl script that automatically creates forces in the z-direction of the
selected nodes.
The new forces are created on the specified nodes with the given magnitude and placed in the
current load collector if no load collector exists, the forces are placed in a load collector called
auto1.
It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the Command Window. This allows you to run the
Tcl script and easily review error messages, as well as print out debug information. Additional
details can be found in the Creating Tcl Scripts and Running Tcl Scripts sections.
417

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that:
Determines the components of a given set of force vectors
Calculates a vector resultant sum of the forces
Reports the resultant sum
Tools
The Tcl commands if, foreach and expr will be used to add logic and mathematical functions to the
script. The command hm_getentityvalue is used to extract information from HyperMesh entities,
based on data names.
Data names are generic references to the information that physically define an entity in the HyperMesh
environment. An example of this is the x, y, and z coordinates that define a node location in threedimensional space. The available data names for each entity can be found in the HyperMesh Reference
Guide Data Names topic.
Data names are accessed using the hm_getentityvalue command. This command uses the data
names available for an entity to return the particular value of interest. The command will return a
value that is either a string or a numeric value, depending on the command syntax and the value
stored in that particular data name field. The basic syntax of the command is:
hm_getentityvalue entity_type id data_name flag
where entity_type is the requested entity type (elements, loads, nodes, etc.), id is the entity ID, the
data_name is the data field name of interest, and flag is either 0 or 1 depending on whether the
command should return a numeric value (0) or a string (1).
To retrieve the x-component of a force with ID 12, the following command can be used:
set force_x [hm_getentityvalue loads 12 "comp1" 0]
Note: To assign the value from the command to a variable, the command is placed within square
brackets.
Exercise
Create a Tcl script to compute the resultant sum of a given selection of forces. This requires that the
script read data from the force entities and manipulate the data to calculate the resultant. To calculate
the resultant of the forces, retrieve the x, y, and z components of the forces and compute a vector
sum.
1. Define the process.
2. Determine the data names to use to extract the force components.
3. Create the Tcl script and add logic as necessary.
4. Test the script.
Step 1: Define the process.

The script should automate the following process:
Prompt the user to select a number of forces to calculate the resultant.
Make sure the user has selected one or more loads.
Extract the components of each force.
Sum the components.
Report the result to the user.
Altair Engineering

418
Step 2: Determine the data names to use to extract the force components.
The following table lists several relevant data names for force loads:
comp1
x component of the vector
comp2
y component of the vector
comp3
z component of the vector
config
The number "1" for forces

The number "2" for moments
The number "8" for velocities
The number "9" for accelerations
entitytype
the type of entity to which this load is applied (1=node,

3=component, 10=set)
node
when a load is applied to a node, this serves as a pointer

to the node
inputsystemid
reference system ID
Steps 3-9: Create the Tcl script and add logic as necessary.
A Tcl script to perform this function might be similar to the following:
Step 3: Open a text file and save the file as HM8060.tcl.

Step 4: Select the desired loads and then add those loads to a list.
The *createmarkpanel command is used to allow the user to graphically select the loads from the
HyperMesh interface and add them to the mark. The command below adds the loads to mark 1. Once
the loads have been added to mark 1, the load ids are assigned to a list called loads_list, using the
TCL command set. Add the following 2 lines to the file HM8060.tcl:
*createmarkpanel loads 1 "Select forces to compute resultant";
set loads_list [hm_getmark loads 1];
Step 5: Initialize the variables for the x, y, and z components.

Use the TCL command set to initialize the variables for the x, y, and z components of force to 0.
These variables will be used later in the script to compute the resultant force for each component. Add
the following 3 lines to the TCL file HM8060.tcl:
set x_comp_sum "0";
set y_comp_sum "0";
set z_comp_sum "0";
419

Altair Engineering
Step 6: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable loads_list has
values. If it does, proceed with the macro.
Before calculating the resultant of the forces selected, we should check to make sure that the variable
loads_list has values in it. This is done by using an if loop. In the if loop below, we are checking
that the variable loads_list is not empty. Add the following line to the TCL file to initialize the if
loop:
if {$loads_list != ""} {
Step 7: Use a foreach loop to iterate through each load in the list loads_list
and extract the x, y, and z components using the hm_getentityvalue
command and the appropriate data name.
Using a foreach loop, each load in the list loads_list will be iterated through. Within the foreach
loop, each load is referenced by load_id and then the component value is added to the previous loads
components value. For example, lets look at the x component. Using the set command, the variable
x_comp_sum is defined as the previous value of x_comp_sum, plus the x component of the current load.
The x component of the current load is retrieved by using the hm_getentityvalue command and the
data name comp1 (all the available data names for loads are shown in the table above). This process is
done for the y and z components as well. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL file:
foreach load_id $loads_list {
set x_comp_sum [expr $x_comp_sum + [hm_getentityvalue
loads $load_id "comp1" 0]];
set y_comp_sum [expr $y_comp_sum + [hm_getentityvalue
set z_comp_sum [expr $z_comp_sum + [hm_getentityvalue
}
Step 8: Report the Resultant Force to the user.

Use the command hm_usermessage to report each of the components of the resultant force. Add the
following line to the TCL file:
hm_usermessage "Resultant force: $x_comp_sum, $y_comp_sum
$z_comp_sum ";
Step 9: Complete the if loop and report an error message if no loads are
found.
To complete the if loop, add an else statement. Remember the if statement checked to see if the
variable loads_list was not empty. This else statement returns an error message to the user to let
them know that no loads were selected.
} else {
hm_errormessage "No loads selected";
}
Altair Engineering

420
Step 10: Test the script.

1. From the menu bar, select View > Command Window to display the Command Window at the
bottom of the screen.
2. Click and drag to open the Command Window from the bottom edge of the screen.
3. Open the file c_channel-tcl.hm.
4. Use the source command to execute the script. For example:
source HM8060.tcl
There are several important assumptions used when creating this script.
The user will always select force loads, as opposed to moments, pressures, etc.
The forces are applied to nodes, as opposed to comps or sets, and are valid to sum.
All of the forces are applied in the same coordinate system so that it is valid to sum the
component values directly.
If any of these assumptions are not true, the values returned by the script may be invalid.
Additional conditional logic can be programmed to check for each of these situations and an error
message can be returned or they can be handled appropriately.
5.
421
The result of the macro is shown in the status bar. Either a message with the resultant force is
shown or else there is a note saying that no loads were selected.

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that creates spline surfaces from the nodes of selected tria
elements.
Tools
The Tcl commands if, foreach, and incr will be used to add logic to the script. The command
hm_getentityvalue is used to extract information from HyperMesh entities, based on data names.
environment. An example of this is the x-, y-, and z-coordinates that define a node location in threedimensional space. The available data names for each can be found in the HyperMesh Reference Guide
Data Names topic.
where entity_type is the requested entity type (elements, loads, nodes, etc), id is the entity ID,
the data_name is the data field name of interest, and flag is either 0 or 1 depending on whether the
Note that to assign the value from the command to a variable, the command is placed within square
brackets.
Exercise
Create a Tcl script that creates spline surfaces from the nodes of selected tria elements. This requires
that the script read data from the element entities. To create the spline surfaces, retrieve the 3-node
IDs of the tria elements.
2. Determine the data names to use to extract the element type and node IDs.
4. Test the script.

Prompt the user to select a number of tria elements to create spline surfaces from.
Make sure the user has selected one or more elements.
If a selected element is not a tria, skip that element.
Extract the node IDs of each element.
Create the spline surface from the nodes.
Report on the number of spline surfaces created.
Altair Engineering

422
Step 2: Determine the data names to use to extract the element type and
node IDs.
The following table lists several relevant data names for tria elements:
config
The number, 103
node1
first node (node pointer)
node2
second node (node pointer)
node3
third node (node pointer)

Step 4: Allow the user to select the desired elements and then add those
loads to a list
The *createmarkpanel command is used to allow the user to graphically select the elements from the
HyperMesh interface and add them to the mark. The command below adds the elements to mark 1.
Once the elements have been added to mark 1, the element ids are assigned to a list called
elems_list, using the TCL command set. Add the following 2 lines to the file HM8070.tcl:
*createmarkpanel elems 1 "Select tria elements to create surfaces";
set elems_list [hm_getmark elems 1];
Step 5: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable elems_list has
Before continuing with the macro, we should check to make sure that the variable elems_list has
values in it. This is done by using an if loop. In the if loop below, we are checking that the variable
elems_list is not empty. Add the following line to the TCL file to initialize the if loop:
if {$elems_list != ""} {
Step 6: Initialize a variable which counts the number of times the foreach
loop is entered.
The variable success_count is initialized and set to 0. This variable is used to count the number of
times the foreach loop (defined in Step 7) is entered. We will use this variable at the end of the
script. Add the following line to the TCL script:
set success_count 0;
423

Altair Engineering
Step 7: Use a foreach loop to iterate through each element in the list
elems_list and then set a variable config which stores the element
configuration. This is extracted using the hm_getentityvalue command and
the appropriate data name.
Using a foreach loop, each element in the list elems_list will be iterated through. Within the
foreach loop, each load is referenced by elem_id and then the variable config is defined. This
variable is set to the result of the hm_getentityvalue which uses the element data name config to
report the configuration of the element. A tria element will have an element configuration of 103 while
a quad element will have a configuration of 104. Add the following 2 lines to the TCL file:
foreach elem_id $elems_list {
set config [hm_getentityvalue elems $elem_id "config" 0];
Step 8: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable config has a
value of 103. If it does, proceed with the macro.
Using an if loop, the variable config is checked to see if it doesnt have a value of 103. A value of
103 means that the element configuration is a tria element. If the value is not equal to 103, the
continue statement is used to move outside of the foreach loop. If the value is the config variable is
103, then the macro is continued. Add the following lines to the TCL script:
if {$config != 103} {
continue;
}
Step 9: Set 3 variables which contain the node id of each of the nodes used
to define the tria element.
Three variables are defined (node1, node2, and node3) which represent the 3 nodes that define the tria
element. These 3 nodes will be used to create the spline surface. Using the hm_getentityvalue
command and the element data names node1, node2, and node3 along with the pointer id, the node id
is retrieved and assigned to the appropriate variable. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script:
set node1 [hm_getentityvalue elems $elem_id "node1.id" 0];
Step 10: Set the appropriate mode to create the surface.

Using the *surfacemode command, the surface mode can be set according to the following:
1 mesh keep surface
2 mesh delete surface
3 mesh without surface
4 surface only
In this example, we only want to create a surface, so mode 4 is used. Add the following line to the TCL
script:
*surfacemode 4;
Altair Engineering

424
Step 11: Create a node mark which contains the 3 nodes defined in Step 9
and then use the *splinesurface command to create a spline surface using
the nodes in the mark.
Using the *createmark, mark 1 for nodes is created and it contains the 3 nodes defined in the variables
node1, node2, and node3.
*createmark nodes 1 $node1 $node2 $node3;
*splinesurface nodes 1 0 1 1;
Step 12: Increase the variable success_count which is used to count the
number of times the foreach loop is entered. Then, close the foreach loop.
Using the incr command, the variable success_count is increased. Following this command, a } is
used to close the foreach loop. Add the following 2 lines to the TCL script:
incr success_count;
}
Step 13: Clear the node and element marks, and then use the hm_usermessage
command to report the number of spline surfaces created.
Using the command *clearmark, mark 1 for the nodes and elements is cleared. Following these
commands, the hm_usermessage command is used to report the number of spline surfaces created.
The variable success_count is used to do this. Because this variable was increased each time the
foreach loop was entered and the element configuration was 103, this variable kept a count of the
number of spline surfaces that were created. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script:
*clearmark nodes 1;
*clearmark elems 1;
hm_usermessage "$success_count splines created."
Step 14: Add an else statement which compliments the if statement which
checked to see if the elems_list variable was empty. If it is empty, the else
statement is executed.
The else statement compliments the if statement defined in Step 5 which checks to see if the
elems_list variable is empty. If it is empty the else statement is executed. Inside the else
statement, the hm_errormessage command is used to report to the user that no elements were
selected. Following the hm_errormessage command, the if statement is closed using a }. Add the
following 3 lines to the TCL script file:
} else {
hm_errormessage "No elements selected";
}

1. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model and then load the file, spline-tcl.hm.
2. From the menu bar, select View > Command Window display the Command Window at the
425

Altair Engineering

source HM8070.tcl
5. Select a few of the tria elements and observe the spline surfaces that are created.
There are several important things to notice.

Only first order tria elements are considered. It is possible to add if/elseif logic to support
other element configurations.
The data names for the nodes associated with an element are pointers. A pointer is used to
directly access another data name. This means they point to the data names available for
nodes. In order to retrieve any data from a pointer, the data name requested for the particular
pointer must also be supplied. The additional data names are separated by a period or dot (.).
The *entityhighlighting and hm_commandfilestate commands are used to speed up the
execution of the script. The *entityhighlighting command disables highlighting entities when
the *createmark command is used. The hm_commandfilestate command controls if commands
are written out to the command file. It is always important to reset these commands after a
script is complete or before exiting due to an error.
Altair Engineering

426

In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that determines the radius of an arc.
Tools
The Tcl commands if and expr will be used to add logic and mathematical functions to the script. The
command hm_getentityvalue is used to extract information from HyperMesh entities, based on data
names.
environment. An example of this is the x, y, and z coordinates that define a node location in threedimensional space. The available data names for each entity can be found in the HyperMesh Reference
Guide Data Names topic.
where entity_type is the requested entity type (elements, loads, nodes, etc), id is the entity ID,
the data_name is the data field name of interest, and flag is either 0 or 1 depending on whether the
Note that to assign the value from the command to a variable, the command is placed within square
brackets.
Exercise
Create a Tcl script that determines the radius of a user selected arc. One point on the line and the
center of the arc will need to be calculated.
2. Determine the data names to use to extract the node coordinates.
4. Test the script.

Prompt the user to select a line.
Make sure the user has selected only one line.
Determine the center of the arc by creating temporary nodes.
Calculate the distance between one end of the arc and the center node using node coordinate
data names.
427

Altair Engineering
Step 2: Determine the data names to use to extract the node coordinates.
The following table lists several relevant data names for nodes:
globalx
x coordinate in the global system
globaly
y coordinate in the global system
globalz
z coordinate in the global system

Step 4: Allow the user to select the desired line which defines a circle or an
arc and then add that line to a variable
The *createmarkpanel command is used to allow the user to graphically select the line which defines
a circle or an arc from the HyperMesh interface and add it to the mark. The command below adds the
line to mark 1. Once the line has been added to mark 1, the line id is assigned to a variable called
line_list, using the TCL command set. Add the following 2 lines to the file HM8080.tcl:
*createmarkpanel lines 1 "Select line to find radius";
set line_list [hm_getmark lines 1];
Step 5: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable line_list has
Before continuing with the macro, we should check to make sure that the variable line_list has
values in it. This is done by using an if loop. In the if loop below, we are checking to see if the
variable line_list is empty. If the variable is empty, an error message is given to the user. Also,
using the elseif statement in the if loop, we can check to see if more than one line is selected. If
more than one line is selected, an error message is reported. If neither of those conditions are met,
the macro proceeds under the else statement. Add the following line to the TCL file to define the if
loop:
if {$line_list == ""} {
hm_errormessage "No lines selected";
} elseif {[llength $line_list] != 1} {
hm_errormessage "Only one line may be selected";
} else {
Step 6: Create 3 nodes on the line selected and then create a node at the
circle center of the 3 nodes. Add those nodes to a variable.
Use the *nodecreateonlines command to create 3 nodes on the line which is in mark 1. This is done
with the first command below. Then, use the *createcenternode to create a node at the center of a
circle formed by the three nodes that were just created in the *nodecreateonlines command. These
Altair Engineering

428
three nodes are referenced by using -1. -2, and -3 which reference the last node created, the
second to last node created, and the third to last node created. Then, the nodes are added to the
nodes mark 1 using the *createmark command. Again, the nodes are referenced using -1, -2, -3,
and -4 to add the last 4 nodes created to the mark. Finally, the nodes in mark 1 are added to the
variable node_list. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL script:
*nodecreateonlines lines 1 3 0 0;
*createcenternode -1 -2 -3;
*createmark nodes 1 -1 -2 -3 -4;
set node_list [hm_getmark nodes 1];
Step 7: Use the lindex command to get the node id of the first node in the
list node_list. Then get the x, y, and z coordinates for the node.
Set a variable called id which contains the node id for the first node in the list node_list. The id for
the first node is retrieved using the lindex command which takes the variable node_list and using
the index 0, retrieves the first node id in the list. Then, using the variable id and the
hm_getentityvalue command with the node data names x, y, and z, the x, y, and z coordinates for
the node are set to the variables x1, y1, and z1. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL script:
set id [lindex $node_list 0];
set x1 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "x" 0];
set y1 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "y" 0];
set z1 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "z" 0];
Step 8: Use the lindex command to get the node id of the last node in the
list node_list. Then get the x, y, and z coordinates for the node.
Set a variable called id which contains the node id for the last node in the list node_list. The id for
the first node is retrieved using the lindex command which takes the variable node_list and using
the index 3, retrieves the first node id in the list. Then, using the variable id and the
hm_getentityvalue command with the node data names x, y, and z, the x, y, and z coordinates for
the node are set to the variables x2, y2, and z2. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL script:
set id [lindex $node_list 3 ];
set x2 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "x" 0];
set y2 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "y" 0];
set z2 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "z" 0];
Step 9: Define three variables which are the x, y, and z distance between
the two nodes defined in the last two steps.
Three variables are defined which are simply the x, y, and z distance between the two nodes defined in
Steps 7 and 8. The component difference between each node is calculated using the coordinates
defined in Steps 7 and 8 and the TCL command expr. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script:
set dx [expr $x1 - $x2];
set dy [expr $y1 - $y2];
set dz [expr $z1 - $z2];
429

Altair Engineering
Step 10: Define a variable called radius which uses the variables dx, dy, and
dz to calculate the radius of the line which is a circle or an arc.
Using the three variables which were defined in the previous step (dx, dy, and dz) the magnitude of
the distance is calculated. This distance corresponds to the radius of the arc/circle which is defined by
the line selected. To calculate the radius, the expr command is used. Add the following line to the
TCL script:
set radius [expr sqrt(($dx*$dx) + ($dy*$dy) + ($dz*$dz))];
Step 11: Clear the nodes in the temporary node mark.

To clear all the nodes in the temporary node mark, use the *nodecleartempmark command. Add the
following command to the TCL script:
*nodecleartempmark;
Step 12: Report to the user the radius of the selected line.
Using the hm_usermessage command, the value of the variable radius is reported to the user. Also,
close the if loop which was started back in Step 5. Add the following two lines to the TCL script:
hm_usermessage "Radius = $radius";
}
Step 13: Clear the lines and nodes mark.

Using the hm_markclear command, the nodes mark and the lines mark are cleared. Add the following
two lines to the TCL script:
hm_markclear lines 1;
hm_markclear nodes 1;

1. From the File menu, load the file, radius-tcl.hm.
2. From the menu bar, select View>Command Window to display the Command Window at the
source HM8080.tcl
It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the command window. This allows you to run the
5. Select different lines to review the calculated radius.
Altair Engineering

430
Important things to notice.

The *entityhighlighting and hm_commandfilestate commands are used to speed up the
execution of the script. The *entityhighlighting command disables highlighting entities when
the *createmark command is used. The hm_commandfilestate command controls if commands
are written out to the command file. It is always important to reset these commands after a
script is complete or before exiting due to an error.
431

Altair Engineering

In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that:
Prompts the user for a property name and thickness
Creates the property collector
Assigns the OptiStruct PSHELL card image to the property collector
Assigns the thickness value to the property
Tools
The Tcl command if will be used to add logic to the script. The commands *dictionaryload and
*attributeupdatedouble are used to assign information to the property collector.
Solver-specific data created from the HyperMesh template system is stored in card images. Each piece
of data that defines a card image has a text string (data name) and a numeric attribute ID. An
example is the Youngs Modulus for a material.
Templates exist for each solver supported by HyperMesh and are located in sub-folders under the
<altair_home>\templates\feoutput directory. These templates define every solver-specific attribute
including data names, attribute IDs, card image formats, and the format of the data upon export. The
*defineattribute command is used to define attribute data names and IDs in a template file.
In order to determine the commands required to create template-specific data, it is best to run through
the process in HyperMesh and to review the commands that are written to the command.cmf file.
Property collectors can be created and edited using the Model Browser. Simply right click in the
Model Browser and select Create > Property to create one. To change the name, color, or card
image of a property collector, right click on the property name in the Model Browser and select Edit
Exercise
Create a Tcl script to create a property collector and assign a thickness. This requires that the script
prompt the user for a name and a thickness value.
6. Test the script.

Prompt the user to enter a name and a thickness value.
Make sure a property collector with the supplied name does not already exist.
Create the new property collector.
Assign the PSHELL card image to the property.
Assign the thickness to the PSHELL card.

Altair Engineering

432
working in HyperMesh, all executed commands are written to the command.cmf file. If the file already

1. If the OptiStruct user profile is not currently loaded, please load it at this time.
2. Right click in the Model Browser and select Create > Property.
3. Leave Type set to all and in the Name field, enter a name for the property.
4. For card image=, select PSHELL.
5.
Check the option for Card edit property upon creation.
6. Click Create.
7. Activate the T field and enter a thickness value.
8. Click return.

2. Select and copy all lines in the file.
Step 5: Create a Tcl script by converting the commands to Tcl format and
modify it as necessary.
1. Create a new Tcl file using any text editor.
2. Paste the copied commands from the command.cmf file inside the Tcl file.
3. Remove all () and , and replace them with spaces. Also place semi-colons (;) at the end of each
line. The commands should look something like:
*collectorcreateonly properties "my_prop" "" 11;
*createmark properties 2 "my_prop";
*dictionaryload properties 2
"C:/Altair/hw12.0/templates/feoutput/optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL";
*initializeattributes properties my_prop;
*attributeupdatedouble properties 1 95 1 1 0 0.25;
These commands can now be run to duplicate the creation of the PSHELL property. However, simply
running these commands as-is is not very flexible. The property ID, name and values are all hard
coded. The template file location in the *dictionaryload command is also hard coded. Finally, there
are a lot of extra commands that set unnecessary attributes.
4. In the *attributeupdatedouble command, the ID of the property is hard coded. In order to make
this flexible, you need to replace the hard coded ID with the ID of the new property collector:
(Changes to the above commands are shown below in bold print).
*createmark properties 2 -1
set prop_id [hm_getmark props 2];
433

Altair Engineering
*dictionaryload properties 2
"C:/Altair/hw12.0/templates/feoutput/optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL";
*attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 0.25;
Supplying an ID of -1 to the *createmark command can be used to select the most recently created
entity.
5. The template file path is also hard coded. You can make this flexible using the hm_info command:
*createmark properties 2 "my_prop";
*dictionaryload properties 2 "[hm_info -appinfo SPECIFIEDPATH
TEMPLATES_DIR]/feoutput/optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL";
*attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 0.25;
The user also needs to be prompted to enter a property name and thickness value. You can then
substitute those variables in the relevant commands:
set prop_name [hm_getstring "Name="];
set prop_thick [hm_getfloat "Thickness="];
*collectorcreateonly properties "$prop_name" "" 11;
*createmark properties 2 "$prop_name";
*attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 $prop_thick;
6. Finally, You need to add logic to test in order to make sure that the property name and thickness
values are valid:
set prop_name [hm_getstring "Name="];
if {$prop_name == ""} {
hm_errormessage "No name specified.";
return;
} elseif {[hm_entityinfo exist properties $prop_name byname] == 1} {
hm_errormessage "Property already exists.";
return;
}
set prop_thick [hm_getfloat "Thickness="];
if {$prop_thick == "" || $prop_thick <= 0.0} {
hm_errormessage "Invalid thickness value specified.";
return;
}
*collectorcreateonly properties "$prop_name" "" 11;
*createmark properties 2 "$prop_name";
*attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 $prop_thick;

Altair Engineering

434
1. From the menu bar, select View > Command Window to display the Command Window at the
2. Click and drag to open the Command Window from the top or bottom edge of the screen.
source filename.tcl
It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the Command window. This allows you to run the Tcl
script and easily review error messages, as well as print out debug information. Additional details can
be found in the Creating Tcl Scripts and Running Tcl Scripts sections.
435

Altair Engineering
Post-Processing
Altair Engineering

436

This tutorial demonstrates how to write an input file for a given fatigue solver using the options
available on the Fatigue panel.
Step 1: Retrieve the model file.

For this tutorial, retrieve the file, keyhole.hm. This file contains a finite element (FE) model, for which
an analysis has already been conducted, to obtain the stress/strain information for durability loads of
interest.
2. Open the keyhole.hm file.
Step 2: Load the results file.

1. From the menu bar, click File > Load > Results.
2. Open the keyhole.res file.
Step 3: Export data and write a fatigue solver input deck.

1. Open the Fatigue panel by clicking fatigue from the Post page.
2. Toggle FE Analysis Type to static/modal.

Results contained in keyhole.res were obtained from linear statics analysis.
Note: Select the transient dynamic option if a dynamic finite element analysis was used to obtain
the stress/strain results for the model.
3. Toggle Output File Format to ascii.
Note: Select the binary option if the fatigue solver allows a binary input file. For more information
on fatigue solvers and acceptable input file formats, see the Fatigue panel documentation.
4. Click browse and locate the file folder you want store the file in, then enter a name for the
output file.
Note: This output file is the input file for the fatigue solver.
5. Click data group = and select any of the data groups that you want to write to the output file.
Data groups are organized based on whether nodal or elemental results are available in the results
file.
6. Set select simulation to all.
This specifies the data in the results file that is written to the output file. In this case, selecting all
writes the stress/strain data for the selected nodes or elements for all loadcases represented in
keyhole.res.
437

Altair Engineering
Note: You can write out stress/strain information for all of the time steps, or you can choose a
range from a starting time step to an ending time step, or you can choose a selection of
time steps manually from the available list.
The next sub-step is to select the entities for which the finite element analysis results file is written.
Note: The type of entity you select is based upon the data group you selected. Select nodes if the
data group you selected refers to nodal results. Similarly, select elements if the data group
you selected refers to elemental results. Select sets to choose a predefined entity set
comprised of nodes or elements corresponding to a data group with nodal/elemental results,
respectively. If the data group results and the entity type are not the same, HyperMesh
displays the error message, "Results file doesnt contain nodal values."
7. Set the selector to elems.
8. Click elems >> by window.
9. Draw the window as shown in the following image.
10. Click interior.

12. Click write.
An ASCII file is written to the selected directory.
You can read this file into the appropriate fatigue solver to complete the fatigue analysis.
Altair Engineering

438

Understand applications for and be able to extract resultant forces and moments from HyperMesh free
body diagram (FBD) capabilities, including defining cross-sections for which resultant forces and
moments are calculated
Perform free body diagrams within HyperMesh to understand load paths and export free body loads to
detailed models of interest as boundary conditions (BCs) within a submodeling scheme. This process is
graphically shown for reference, following.
Global loads model of a generic wing.
Spar2 element set from the global loads model (middle Spar) with free body loads extracted.
Detailed model of Spar2 with free body loads applied as BCs from global loads model.
Exercises
This tutorial contains the following exercises:
Exercise 1: Creating Shear Moment Diagrams and Potato Plots from Global Loads Model using
Resultant Force and Moment Functionality
439

Altair Engineering
Exercise 1: Creating of Shear Moment Diagrams and Potato Plots from Global
Loads Model using Resultant Force and Moment Functionality
This exercise uses the model file, icw_ex1.hm.
Step 1: Create a coordinate system for spar2.

1. Open HyperMesh Desktop.
2. In the User Profiles dialog, set the user profile to OptiStruct.
3. Open model file, icw_ex1.hm.
4. Open the Sets browser by clicking Tools > Set Browser from the menu bar.
Since you will be working with Spar2, you will need to display the elements which represent Spar2
in the graphics area. Element sets, in addition to components and assemblies, can be used as a
model grouping and visualization tool. Elements sets can be created, deleted, made visible, and
hidden using the Set browser.
5. In the Sets browser, Elements folder, right-click on Spar2 and select Isolate from the context
menu. The elements representing Spar2 display in the graphics area.
6. Turn on element shading by clicking
Visualization toolbar.
(Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines) on the
7. Open the Nodes panel by clicking Geometry > Create > Nodes > Interpolate Nodes from the
menu bar.
8. Using the node list selector, select the nodes on the top and bottom of the left side.
9. Click create. HyperMesh creates a node on the left end of Spar2.

10. Repeat step 1.8 and 1.9 to create a node on the right side of Spar2.
11. Click return to exit the Nodes panel.
12. From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Systems > Axis Direction.
Altair Engineering

440
13. Go to the create by axis direction subpanel to create a system with origin at the left end and xaxis along the length of the spar.
14. Using the origin selector, select the left-middle node.
15. Using the x-axis selector, select the right-middle node for x-axis node.
16. Using the xy plane selector, select the left-top node for the xy-plane node.
17. Toggle to rectangular.

18. Click create.
19. Click return to exit the Systems panel.
Step 2: Create cross-section definitions for Spar2.

1. Open the FBD Cross-Section Manager tab by clicking Post > Free Body > Cross-Section from
the menu bar.
Cross-section definitions are determined by the following criteria:
An element set that contains the nodes that define the cross-section and determines which
"side" the resultant force and moment vectors are to be calculated. Only elements connected to
the nodes that define the cross-section, on one side or the other, need to be included in the
element set. However, additional elements can be included for visualization purposes with no
effect on the calculations.
A node set that defines the cross-section geometry.
A summation node that can be any node in the model or that can be automatically set to the
calculated centroid of the defined cross-section. Centroidal calculations are performed using
nodal coordinates that make up the cross-section only, hence element thicknesses associated
with the elements attached to the section are not considered. As such, there could be slight
differences in the calculated centroid and the "true" centroid of the section if thicknesses vary
throughout the section or the section is overly idealized.
(Optional) A result system that defines the coordinate system for which the resultant force and
moment vectors are transformed into and output for the selected cross-section(s).
2. In the FDB Cross-section Manager tab, click the arrow next to Advanced options to display the
Auto create cross-section form.
441

Altair Engineering
Use this form to create cross-sections along the length of Spar2.

Resultant force and moment extractions will be performed on these cross-sections to obtain the
necessary data to generate shear moment diagrams and potato plots. There are two options to
define cross-sections: a manual method and an advanced method. The advanced method
automates the creation of "continuous" cross-sections. The advanced method will be used in this
tutorial. See the online help for details about the manual method.
3. Click Elements twice.

4. In the panel area, click elems > by sets.
5. Select Spar2.
6. Click select.
7. Click proceed.
8. In the FBD Cross-section Manager tab, click Nodes twice.
9. Select the left-top and left-bottom nodes which define the first cross-section for Spar2.
10. Click proceed.
11. In the Element set prefix field, enter Spar2_E.
12. In the Node set prefix, enter Spar2_N.
Since the cross-section manager utility creates the necessary element and node sets, you must
define a prefix string for both element and node sets. This string will be appended by an
incremental number to give each created set a unique name. Optional input includes numbering
offset which defines an initial number for which the appended set numbers will begin.
13. Verify that the Sets accumulate checkbox is selected.
14. Click Accept.
A spreadsheet populates with the definitions of the cross-sections generated by the Auto create
cross-sections utility.
Altair Engineering

442
15. Select the Display sections checkbox, and then select any section in the spreadsheet to review
the selected cross-section.
The graphics area will be updated with the element set, node set, sum node, and result system that
define the selected cross-section. Optionally, if you select the Show model checkbox, the entire
model will be visible in the graphics area with the selected cross-section highlighted in red and the
remainder of the model transparent.
16. Select the first cross-section in the spreadsheet (Spar2_E1; Spar2_N1), hold SHIFT, and select the
last cross-section (Spar2_E8; Spar2_N9) to select the cross-sections for updating their result
system.
17. Update any single or multiple cross-sections by selecting the cross-sections from the spreadsheet
using CTRL/SHIFT and then selecting Summation Node or Result System to update these
definitions for all selected cross-sections.
18. Click Result System twice.
19. Select the system located at the left-middle end of Spar2 (system 102 created in Step 1).
20. Click proceed.
Note: You may have to display the Longeron2 system collector from the Model browser (Model
tab) to display system 102.
All cross-sections update to result system 102. Note that system 102 has the x-axis along the
length of the spar, y-axis located at the neutral axis of the beam in the plane of the web, and z-axis
perpendicular to the web of the beam. Also note that the sum node is set to the default centroid,
which automatically calculates the centroid of each cross-section and at which the resulting
resultant force and moment calculations will be performed. The result system is the system for
which all resultant force and moment result vectors will be transformed into and output.
443

Altair Engineering
21. Close the FBD Cross-Section Manager utility.
Step 3: Extract resultant force and moment data for all cross-sections of
Spar2 for all load cases.
1. Open the Resultant Force and Moment tab by clicking Post > Free Body > Resultant Force
and Moment from the menu bar.
2. In the .op2/xdb field, open the icw.op2. The selected .op2 file loads into the HyperMesh
database for use with all FBD utilities until another .op2 file is selected. It also populates the
Subcases list box with all subcases in the selected .op2 file that contain Grid Point Force
(GPFORCE) data. See the FBD documentation in the HyperMesh User's Guide for more details.
3. From the Loadsteps list, select all of the loadsteps using the filter buttons on the top of the list box
or with CTRL/SHIFT.
4. From the Cross-sections list, select all of the Spar2 cross-sections previously defined using the
filter buttons on the top of the list box or with CTRL/SHIFT.
5. Review the following table for a description of the Output options for the resultant force and
moment utility.
Function
Description
Coordinate System
Defines the coordinate system used for output of node

locations (x,y,z) only. The coordinate system does not
affect the transformation of the resultant force and
moment vector results, which is defined by the result
system on each cross-section definition.
Zero tolerance
Defines any number less than this number is set to zero

for numerical issues.
Create load
collectors
Creates load collectors containing the results of the

resultant force and moment calculations so that the
results can be visualized in the graphics area as force
and moment vectors.
Show summary
table
Brings up a window with formatted results similar to the

.csv (comma separated) file. Use this output for quick
checks of the data without having to open an alternative
spreadsheet or text editor program.
Create .csv file
Creates a .csv file with the results of the resultant force

and moment calculations, which can be opened directly
within standard spreadsheet applications.
Create .fbd file
Creates an .fbd file with the results of the resultant

force and moment calculations, which can be directly
read into HyperGraph to create shear moment diagrams
and potato plots.
6. Click Coordinate system twice.

7. Select coordinate system 102 which is located at left-middle end of Spar2.
8. Click proceed.
Note: You may have to display the Longeron2 system collector from the Model browser to display
system 102.
Altair Engineering

444
9. In the Zero tolerance field, enter 0.01.

10. Select the Create load collectors checkbox and optionally select a default color for the created
load collectors.
11. Select the Show summary table checkbox.
12. Select the Create .csv file checkbox, and open an existing .csv file (append data) or enter a new
file name; in this case, enter icw_res_force_moment.csv.
13. Select the Create .fbd file checkbox, and open an existing .fbd file (append data) or enter a new
file name; in this case, enter icw_res_force_moment.fbd.
By default, files are put into the HyperMesh start directory unless you specify another directory or
enter a file name.
14. Click Accept. Resultant force and moment calculations are executed on all of the selected crosssections for all selected subcases.
The Resultant Force and Moment Output Summary tab displays the resultant force and
moment calculations (see the following image). For each cross-section, there is a separate data
block grouped by loadstep. The data block contains cross-section nodal forces, moments, and the
sum of those nodal forces and moments about the defined sum node, in this case the calculated
centroid of the cross-section. Note that the sum of the moment components (Mx, My, Mz) for each
node is not the direct sum, as the (rXF) terms for the force resultant vector about the sum node
must also be added to each moment component appropriately. The sum of the forces components
(Fx, Fy, Fz) for each node is, however, the simple sum.
15. Optional. Open the .csv (comma separated) file directly with Microsoft Excel by using Windows
Explorer and double-clicking the file, icw_res_force_moment.csv.
445

Altair Engineering
This file contains the same results as the summary table in the previous image, but is available for
import into standard spreadsheet or text editor programs.
16. Optional. Open the .fbd file, icw_res_force_moment.fbd, in any standard text editor program.
By default, files are put into the HyperMesh start directory unless you specify another directory or
enter a file name.
This file contains the same results as the summary table in the previous image, but in a compact
format for use with HyperGraph in generating shear moment diagrams and potato plots of resultant
force and moment data for various cross-sections.
17. Close the Resultant Force and Moment tab.
Vector review of the Resultant Force and Moment results in the graphics area is covered in the next
step.
Step 4: Use FBD Results Manager to review resultant force and moment
vectors in graphics area.
1. From the menu bar, select Post > Free Body Results Manager to open the FBD Results
Manager tab.
2. Click Element Set twice.
3. Click set, and select Spar2_E2.
4. Click proceed.
5. In the FDB Results Manager window, activate the Show model check box to display the entire
model with the selected element set highlighted in red and all other elements transparent. This
feature will help you easily locate the element set within the model.
6. For Results type, select Resultant Force and Moment.
This operation scans the database for available loadsteps with resultant force and moment results
and populates the Loadsteps: list box.
7. For Loadsteps, select SUBCASE1.
This operation scans the database for available node sets with resultant force and moment results
and populates the Node sets: list box.
8. For Node sets, select Spar2_N3.
This operation will scan the database for available force and moment vector results and will enable
the check boxes for those force and moment vectors which are available.
9. For Display options, select Fy (shearthe results coordinate system had y-axis in the plane of the
web) and Mz (principal bending momentthe results coordinate system had z-axis perpendicular to
the plane of the web).
To determine the result coordinate system applied to a given cross-section of interest, use the FBD
Cross-Section Manager to review the defined cross-section. This operation will show the element
set, node set, results system, and sum node defined for the selected cross-section. Optionally,
select other force components to review their magnitude and direction in the graphics area. Single
or multiple force and moment vector results can be displayed in the graphics area to facilitate data
mining and reporting.
10. (Optional) Select Update load collector color and select color to change the color of the selected
load vectors.
The new color setting applies only to the load components selected and is saved in the database.
Therefore, this option can be used to recolor any single or multiple load vectors for any FBD result.
11. Click Accept to visualize the resultant force and moment vectors in the graphics area.
12. (Optional) Continue to review resultant force and moment vectors following Steps 4.2-4.14 for
additional cross-sections.
13. Click Reset to clear the display and reset the form.
Altair Engineering
446
14. Click Close to exit FBD Results Manager.
Step 5: Generate potato plots for Spar2 for selected cross-sections.

1. Click the Add Page
to create a new page.
2. On the toolbar, use the pull-down menu to switch to the HyperGraph 2D client.
3. From the menu bar, select Tools > Free Body Diagrams > Potato Plot to open the Potato Plot
dialog.
4. Click fbd file (
) to load the file, icw_res_force_moment.fbd.
The available cross-sections and loadstpes within the .fbd file are loaded into the form.
5. From the Sections list, select cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 as the cross-section for which to
generate potato plots.
Potato plots generate a single plot for each selected cross-section which contains data points for all
selected loadsteps Potato plots effectively "take a slice" through shear moment diagrams at a
given cross-section for all selected loadsteps. Since Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 is the wing root section
for Spar2, it will be the largest loaded section and hence can be utilized to determine the critical
loadsteps for Spar2. Potato plots can facilitate critical loadstep determination by identifying
maximum and minimum loads on given cross-section. In this case, you are going to be interested
in identifying maximum and minimum shear and moment forces, Fy and Mz respectively. There are
other methods for determining critical loadsteps and standard practices and methods should be
examined and utilized.
6. From the Loadsteps list, select all loadsteps using filter buttons next to the list box or using
CTRL/SHIFT.
7. On the Potato Plots tab, for X component select Fy (shear).
8. For Y Component, select Mz (principal bending moment).
447

Altair Engineering
9. Click Add plot.

Note: You can add additional potato plots by selecting alternative X and Y components and clicking
Add Plot. You can also delete defined plots by selecting the plots from the spreadsheet
area and clicking Delete Plots.
10. (Optional) On the Plot Titles tab, enter a Title and Subtitle.
11. On the Plot Options tab, for Reverse sign select cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 in the top
drop-down list.
12. Select Reverse selected section in the bottom drop-down list.
The explanation for the reverse cross-section options is discussed in Step 6.11.
13. Activate the Label points: Loadstep check box.
14. Click Apply to generate the requested potato plots.
Since one cross-section was selected, one plot will be generated (one for each cross-section).
Potato plots are typically used to determine the loadsteps from which maximum/minimum behavior
occurs. From the resulting potato plot of cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 it can be determined
that maximum/minimum loadsteps for shear and moment are SUBCASES 9, 11, 14, and 16. These
critical loadsteps will be considered in future submodeling procedures as a subset of all the
loadsteps used to design the spar. FBD forces will be extracted from these loadsteps in Exercise #2
and applied to a detailed model of Spar2 so that FBD analysis and design of the spar can be
performed.
Step 6: Generate shear moment diagrams for Spar2 for selected subcases.
1. Click the Add Page
to create a new page.
2. From the menu bar, select Tools > Free Body Diagrams > Shear Moment Plot to open the
Shear Moment Plot panel.
3. Click fbd file (
) to load the file, icw_res_force_moment.fbd.
The available cross-sections and loadsteps within the .fbd file are loaded into the form.
4. From the Sections list, select all sections related to Spar2 (Spar2_E1_Spar_N1 through
Spar2_E8_Spar2_N9) using filter buttons next to the list box or using CTRL/SHIFT.
5. From the Loadsteps list, select SUBCASE 9, SUBCASE 11, SUBCASE 14, and SUBCASE 16 the
critical loadsteps determined in Step 6.5.
Altair Engineering

448
6. On the VMT Plots tab, for X component select X. The (X) X component is selected because the
resultant force and moment extraction coordinate system was performed with coordinate system
102 which has the x-axis along the length of the Spar.
Options for X component include X, Y, or Z coordinates as defined from the coordinate system
selected to perform the resultant force and moment extraction (Step 3, part 6).
7. On the VMT Plots tab, for Y component select Fy and Mz to plot the shear and principal bending
moment for Spar2.
To determine the result coordinate system applied to a given cross-section of interest, use FBD
set, node set, results system, and sum node defined for the selected cross-section and can help in
identifying which components of force or moment are required for the desired plot.
8. (Optional) On the Plot Titles tab, type a Title and Subtitle.
9. On the Plot Options tab, for Reverse sign select cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 in the top
drop-down list.
10. Select Reverse selected section in the bottom drop-down list.
The option allows for methods to reverse the sign of the results from any single or multiple crosssections. The option is useful since, for this particular plot, all cross-sections were defined coming
from the right. However the first section [Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1], since it has no elements to the
left of this cross-section, can only be defined from the left. Cross-sections, defined by the nodes
and elements within their respective sets, can be defined coming from the left or right depending
on the elements chosen for any given nodal cross-section definition. Therefore any given crosssection can be defined from the left or from the right. The only difference in the results defined
either way is that the results will be opposite in sign but equal in magnitude. Either way, for a
shear moment diagram, it is important that all selected cross-sections be defined coming from the
same direction so that the resulting plot is valid.
11. Verify that the Envelop results check box is deactivated.
If you only want the maximum/minimum selected Y components to be plotted from all selected
loadsteps for each cross-section, activate the envelop check box. For this tutorial, do not activate
this check box.
12. For Layout, select the layout of plots desired.
This option affects the number of resulting plots that will be generated. The options are: One plot
per loadstep, One plot per Y Component, and One curve per plot. The total number of curves
that are generated is always (Curves = number or loadsteps * number of Y components). In this
example, since you selected four loadsteps and two Y components, there are a total of eight curves
that will be extracted. The number of plots that these eight curves will be displayed on depends on
the layout selection. With the option One Plot per loadstep, there are four plots since there are
four loadsteps; each plot with both selected Y components, or in this case shear and moment on a
single plot for each loadstep. The results of this layout option are shown in first picture, following.
With the option, One Plot per Y component, there are two plots since there are two Y
components, each plot with all four selected loadsteps, or in this case shear on one plot and
moment on another plot for all four selected loadsteps. The results of this layout option are shown
in the second picture, following. Try both options.
13. Click Apply to generate the shear moment plots.
These plots can be used with traditional mechanics of materials calculations such as S = My/I and T
= VQ/IT to calculate stresses for various cross-sections. The plots provide the M (bending or Mz)
and V (shear or Fy) values to these equations which when coupled with cross-section properties
which can be calculated using HyperBeam (from the main menu, select the1D page, then select
HyperBeam), allows for the calculation of the cross-section stresses.
449

Altair Engineering
Exercise 2: Extracting Free Body Diagrams from Global Loads Model and
Transferring to Detailed Model as Boundary Conditions Submodeling
Techniques
This exercise uses the model file, icw_ex2.hm.
Altair Engineering

450
Step 1: Extract free body diagrams for Spar2 using FBD Forces utility.
1. If continuing from Exercise 1, proceed; otherwise open HyperMesh and load the model file,
icw_ex2.hm.
2. From the menu bar select Post > Free Body > Force to open the FBD Forces tab.
3. If the icw.op2 file is currently loaded, proceed; otherwise, from the .op2 file: browser, select
icw.op2.
The selected .op2 file loads into the HyperMesh database for use with all FBD utilities until another
.op2 file is selected. It also populates the Subcases list box with all subcases in the selected .op2
file that contain Grid Point Force (GPFORCE) data. See the FBD documentation in the HyperMesh
User's Guide for more details.
4. In the Loadsteps list, select SUBCASE 9, SUBCASE 11, SUBCASE 14, and SUBCASE 16, the
critical subcases determined in Exercise 1, Step 5.
5. In the Entity selection area, click Element Set twice.
6. Click set, then select the Spar2 element set.
7. Click proceed.
Elements that represent Spar2 are now displayed in the graphics area. To turn on element shading,
click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines (
).
8. Click Result System twice.

The graphic area is updated with all systems in the model.
9. Select the system located at the left-middle end of Spar2 (system 102 created in Exercise 1, Step
1), and click proceed.
Note: You may have to display the Longeron2 system collector from the Model Browser to
display system 102.
The result system is the system for which all free body force and moment result vectors will be
transformed into and output.
10. Click Summation Node twice, select the left-bottom node, and then click proceed.
This summation node is the node for which all free body force and moment vector results will be
summed about to generate a single equivalent resultant force and moment vector. Note that for a
free body (all loads), the summation about any point must be zero. Therefore, this feature is
typically used to verify that the extraction produced a free body with zero summation. However, if
a free body other than (all loads) is performed, the selection of the summation node can be used to
determine the equivalent resultant force and moment vector for the extracted free body (applied
load only or reaction loads only) which in general will not be zero and can be of interest.
451

Altair Engineering
Review the following table for a description of the Output options for the FBD Forces utility.
Output Function
Description
FBD type
Defines the types of grid point forces (GPFORCE) to

consider in the free body extraction. GPFORCE data
available at any given node includes, element, applied,
SPC, and MPC forces. FBD types include; All loads
(which considers all GPFORCE data), Applied loads only
(which only considers applied forces only), and Reaction
loads only (which considers SPC and MPC forces only).
Zero tolerance
Defines any number less than this number is set to zero

for numerical issues.
Create load
collectors
Creates load collectors containing the results of the FBD

force calculations so that the results can be visualized in
the graphics area as force and moment vectors.
Show summary
table
This option brings up a window with formatted results

similar to the .csv (comma separated)file. Use this
output for quick checks of the data without having to
open an alternative spreadsheet or text editor program.
Create .csv file
Creates a .csv file with the results of the resultant force

and moment calculations, which can be opened directly
within any standard spreadsheet applications.
11. For FBD type, select All Loads.

12. For Zero tolerance, type 0.01.
13. Activate Create load collectors and optionally select a default color for the created load collectors.
14. Activate Show summary table.
15. Activate Create .csv file, browse to the desired location, and type icw_fbd_force.csv.
16. Click Accept to execute the FBD forces calculations for all selected subcases.
The FBD Forces Output Summary window displays the FBD forces calculations (see following
image). There is a separate data block grouped by loadstep. The data block contains free body
nodal forces, moments, and the sum of those nodal forces and moments about the defined sum
node. Note that the sum of the moment components (Mx, My, Mz) for each node is not the direct
sum as the (rXF) terms for the force resultant vector about the sum node must also be added to
each moment component appropriately. The sum of the forces components (Fx, Fy, Fz) for each
node is, however, the simple sum. In addition, the sum for a Free Body All Loads result should
be, and is, zero about any sum node selected. You can verify this with the SUM line at the bottom
of each data block. For other FBD types, however, the sum about the sum node may or may not be
zero, depending on the selections.
Altair Engineering

452
17. (Optional) Open the icw_fbd_forces.csv file directly with Microsoft Excel by double-clicking the
file in Windows Explorer. This file contains the same results as the summary table in the previous
image, but is available for import into standard spreadsheet or text editor programs.
18. Click Close to exit the FBD Forces utility.
Vector review of the FBD forces results in the graphics area is covered in the next step.
Step 2: Use FBD Results Manager to review FBD force vectors in graphics
area.
1. From the menu bar, select Post, then Free Body Results Manager to open the FBD Results
Manager tab.
3. Click set, then check Spar2.
4. Click select.
5. Click proceed.
6. (Optional) Activate the Show model check box to display the entire model with the selected
element set highlighted in red and all other elements transparent. This feature will help you easily
locate the element set within the model.
7. For Results type, select FBD Forces All Loads.
This operation scans the database for available loadsteps with FBD Forces All Loads results and
populates the Loadsteps list box.
8. For Loadsteps, select SUBCASE 9.
This operation will scan the database for available force and moment vector results and will enable
the check boxes for those force and moment vectors that are available.
9. For Display options, select Fy (shearthe results coordinate system had y-axis in the plane of the
web).
To determine the result coordinate system applied to a given cross-section of interest, use FBD
set, node set, results system, and sum node defined for the selected cross-section. Optionally,
select other force components to review their magnitude and direction in the graphics area. Single
or multiple force and moment vector results can be displayed in the graphics area to facilitate data
mining and reporting.
10. (Optional) Select Update load collector color and select color to change the color of the selected
load vectors.
453

Altair Engineering
The new color setting applies only to the load components selected and are saved in the database.
Therefore, this option can be used to recolor any single or multiple load vectors for any FBD result.
11. Click Accept to make visible the FBD force vectors in the graphics area.
12. (Optional) Continue to review FBD Forces All Load vector results following steps 2.6 2.13
for additional loadsteps and force/moment components.
13. Click Reset to clear the display and reset the form.
14. Click Close to exit the FBD Results Manager utility.
Step 3: Use FBD Export Manager to export FBD Forces to .fem file.
1. From the menu bar, select Post, then Free Body Export Manager to open the FBD Export
Manger tab.
3. Click set, then select Spar2.
4. Click proceed.
5. For Results type, select FBD Forces All Loads.
This operation scans the database for available loadsteps with FBD Forces All Loads results and
populates the Loadsteps list box.
6. For Loadsteps, Select SUBCASE 9, SUBCASE 11, SUBCASE 14, SUBCASE 16.
7. Check the options for Create appropriate loadsteps, and for Output file, browse to the desired
location and enter spar2_fbd_forces.fem.
8. Click Add to Export.
This operation turns on the display of all load collectors associated with the currently selected FBD
result type for all selected loadsteps. Additional loadsteps can be selected and accepted, which will
append to the current display on each click of accept. In addition, a new element set or FBD result
type can be selected and appended to the current display on each click of accept. To clear the
display click Reset.
9. Click Export.
This operation will export the currently displayed loads and all other associated/required cards to
the output file selected. This file can subsequently be imported into another HyperMesh database
(typically called the detailed model) and the loads contained therein can be "attached" to the
structure of the detailed model as boundary conditions with the addition of a rigid body constraint.
This process will be carried out in the next step.
10. Click Reset.
This operation clears the current display.
Altair Engineering
454
11. Click Close to exit the FBD Export Manager utility.

12. (Optional) On the File menu, click Save as, and save the HyperMesh database as icw_final.hm.
13. From the menu bar, select File, then Exit to exit HyperMesh.
Step 4: Import FBD forces from .fem file into detailed model and solve.
1. Load the model file, spar2_ex2.hm.
2. From the menu bar, select File > Import > Solver Deck to open the Import tab.
3. Select File type: OptiStruct, and browse for file: spar2_fbd_forces.fem.
4. Click Import.
This operation imports the free body loads from the global model into the detailed model of Spar2.
The next process is to "attach" the free body loads to the detailed model, perform some clean-up
operations, define new loadsteps with the free body loads and a rigid body constraint, and solve the
detailed model. This process will be accomplished in the remainder of this step.
5. From the menu bar, select Mesh, then Check, then Nodes, then Equivalence to go to the Edges
panel.
The nodes of the imported loads are equivalenced with those of the detailed model which are
overlaying each other as a consequence of importing the free body loads.
6. Toggle the selector from comps to elems.
8. Click preview equiv.
Eighteen nodes should be found, one at each load.
9. Click equivalence to combine nodes that were imported and attached to the loads with those that
are a part of the detailed mesh of Spar2.
Note: When the detailed Spar2 mesh was constructed, attention to where these interface nodes
were located was taken into account by placing fixed points on the surfaces at these
locations. The fixed points maintain a node at that location from the automesher and thus
guarantee that a node will exist where a load is located. This method is only one of several
potential methods. Other options could include importing the loads which do not line up with
any other nodes in the detailed mesh and then connecting the loads to the detailed mesh
with R-type elements (RBE2 or RBE3). Several other possibilities could also exist and best
methods and practices should be considered depending on the problem type.
10. Click return to exit the Edges panel.
11. Click Delete
to open the Delete panel.
12. Click comps.

13. Select TempMass.
14. Click select.
15. Click delete entity to delete the TempMass component entity.
16. Click return to exit the Delete panel.
17. On the Model tab, select the LoadCollector folder, right-click to bring up the context menu, and
select Hide to remove all loads from the graphics area.
18. To define a rigid body constraint perform the following:
455
Create a load collector for the rigid body constraint definition. From the menu bar, select
Collectors, then Create, then Load Collectors to to open the Create Load Collector dialog
box.
In the Name field enter Const.
Select color red.

Altair Engineering
Set Card Image to none.
Click create.
Note: This operation sets the current load collector to the newly created Const load collector.
The current load collector is the collector which any newly created load (constrains in this
case) are placed into.
Assign an analysis system to the nodes for which the rigid body constraint will be applied. From
the menu bar, select Mesh, then Assign, then Node Analysis System to go to the Systems:
Assign subpanel.
Select the three nodes highlighted in the following image.
Click system.
Select system 102 on left-middle end (x-axis along length, y-axis along web, z-axis normal to
web).
Note: You may have to display the Longeron2 system collector from the Model browser
(Model tab) to display system 102.
Click set displacement.
Click return to exit the Systems panel.
Assign a constraint to left-bottom node. From the menu bar, select BCs, then Create, then
Constraints to go to the Constraints panel.
Select the left-bottom node.
Select dof1, dof2, and dof3.

Make sure all other dofs are unselected.
Click create.
Select the left-top node.
Select dof1 and dof3.

Click create.
Select the right-bottom node.
Select dof3.
Click create.
Click return to exit the Constraints panel.
19. To update the loadsteps for all four free body load cases, perform the following:
From the menu bar, select Setup, then Edit, then LoadSteps to go to the LoadSteps panel.
Altair Engineering

456
Click name = and select SUBCASE 9.
Toggle type to linear static.
Select SPC, click =, and select Const load collector.
Click update.
Repeat steps for SUBCASE 11, SUBCASE 14, and SUBCASE 16.
20. From the menu bar, select Setup > Create > Control Cards to go to the Control Cards panel.
21. Click FORMAT.
22. For number_of_formats enter 2, and then hit ENTER on the keyboard.
There are now two FORMAT buttons.
23. Click each FORMAT button and set them to HM and OUTPUT2, respectively.
24. Click return to specify output file formats for HyperMesh .res (HM) and .op2 which can be used in
HyperView to post-process the results.
25. Click GLOBAL_OUTPUT_REQUEST
26. Click DISPLACEMENT and STRESS.
27. Click return to request displacement output for both output formats.
28. Click return to exit the Control Cards panel.
29. From the menu bar, select File > Save As, and save the model as spar2_ex2_analysis.hm.
30. From the Analysis page, click OptiStruct to run the model.
31. For run options, toggle to analysis.
32. For export options, toggle to all.
33. Click OptiStruct to export the solver deck and run the analysis in OptiStruct. If optiskip appears
in the options field, clear the field before clicking OptiStruct.
34. Once OptiStruct finishes, click return to exit the OptiStruct panel.
35. In the Post menu, click Deformed panel and review the results of the analysis.
36. Click Simulation = and select SUB9 PosShear PosMoment PosT.
37. Click data type = and select Displacements.
38. Click deform to produce the deformed shape of Spar2 in the graphics area for the selected
simulation.
39. Click return to exit the Deformed panel.
40. In the Post menu, click contour to go to the Contour panel and review the results of analysis.
41. Click Simulation = and select SUB9 PosShear PosMoment PosT.
42. Click data type = and select Von Mises Stress.
43. Select the legend subpanel.
44. Toggle find maximum to maximum = and enter 100000.
45. Click contour to produce the contour plot in the graphics area.
46. (Optional) Continue to use the contour panel to review additional results.
47. Click return to exit the Contour panel.
48. (Optional) From the menu bar, select File, then Save.
This operation saves the current HyperMesh database, spar2_ex2_analysis.hm.
49. From the menu bar, select File, then Exit to exit HyperMesh.
457

Altair Engineering
Altair Engineering

458

3654894165128161HyperMesh 14 Core Tutorials

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

3654894165128161HyperMesh 14 Core Tutorials

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

HyperWorks 14.

HyperWorks is a division of Altair

Copyright Altair Engineering Inc. All Rights Reserved for:

Altair Engineering Support Contact Information

HyperMesh Core Tutorials

HyperMesh Core 14.0 Tutorials

HyperMesh Core 14.0 Tutorials

HyperMesh Core 14.0 Tutorials

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

HM-1000: Getting Started with HyperMesh

Located around the graphics area, these buttons provide quick

The tab area is so named because various specialized tools

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

The Utility Menu contains four pages of tools that perform

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

To start HyperMesh on UNIX, perform the following steps:

To determine the start directory on Windows, perform the following steps:

On UNIX, the start directory is determined by the following:

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

HM-1010: Opening and Saving Files

Exercise 1: Opening and Saving Files

Step 1: Open the HyperMesh model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm.

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

2. From the File type list, select IGES.

2. From the File type list, select OptiStruct.

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

Step 5: Save the HyperMesh session as a HyperMesh model file called

Step 6: Export the models geometry data to an IGES file called

2. From the File type list, select IGES.

2. From the File type list, select OptiStruct.

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

Step 10 (Optional): Import the Optistruct input file you created,

Step 11 (Optional): Save your work.

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

HM-1020: Working with Panels

3. Optional: If necessary, click

on the Visualization toolbar to change the element view style to

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

5. To reset the selection of nodes, click

on the entity selector.

Step 3: Select and unselect elements from the graphics area.

3. To unselect an element, right-click on the element handle in the graphics area.

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

5. Still pressing SHIFT, click

, and draw a polygon window around a few unselected elements.

2. To clear the selection of elems, click

. HyperMesh displays the elements in shaded mode, rather

on the entity selector.

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

2. To activate the N1 selector, click

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

Step 8: Specify a distance to translate the selected elements and then

Step 9: Measure the distance between two nodes.

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

5. In the distance = field, highlight the value.

6. To copy the value, press CTRL + C.

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide

2. Click 5 . 5 (in that order).

on the direction selector. N1 becomes

HyperStudy 14.0 User Guide